Skip to main content

Full text of "Blood transfusion"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/bloodtransfusionOOkeynuoft 


BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 


OXFORD    MEDICAL   PUBLICATIONS 


BLOOD  TRANSFUSION 


GEOFFREY    KEYNES 

M.A.,    M.D.    CANTAB.,    F.B.C.S.    ENG. 
SECOND    ASSISTANT,    SITRGICAL   PROFESSORIAL    UNIT 

ST.  Bartholomew's  hospital 


LONDON 

HENRY    FROWDE    and    HODDER    &    STOUGHTON 

THE  LANCET  BUILDING 

1  BEDFORD  STREET,  STRAND,  W.C.2 


First  published  m  1922 


PRINTED  IN   GREAT   BRITAIN 

BZ   HAZELL,   WATSON  AND   VINEY,   LD. 

LONDON  AND  AYLESBXJRY. 


PREFACE 

Blood  transfusion  is  of  rapidly  growing  importance  in 
modern  therapeutics,  yet  the  subject  has  only  been  repre- 
sented in  the  medical  literature  of  this  country  hitherto 
by  isolated  communications  concerning  special  points. 
The  present  work  seeks  to  give  a  connected  account  of  the 
whole  subject  and  of  the  problems  arising  from  it,  together 
with  practical  instructions  for  performing  transfusions 
by  an  efficient  and  simple  method. 

I  am  indebted  for  helpful  criticisms  and  suggestions  to 
Professor  A.  V.  Hill,  F.R.S.,  of  Manchester  University. 
Dr.  J.  H.  Drysdale  has  kindly  allowed  me  to  use  the 
records  of  three  cases  of  pernicious  anaemia  treated  in  his 
wards  at  St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital.  Dr.  Joekes  has  per- 
mitted me  to  refer  to  some  of  his  own  observations  con- 
cerning abnormal  serum  reactions.  Dr.  R.  M.  Janes  has 
given  me  some  account  of  the  important  work  recently 
done  by  Dr.  Bruce  Robertson  and  himself  at  the  Hospital 
for  Sick  Children,  Toronto. 

The  Bibliography  at  the  end  of  the  book  makes  no  pre- 
tence of  being  absolutely  complete.  It  is,  however,  more 
extensive  than  any  that  has  yet  been  printed,  and  I  believe 
that  it  contains  references  to  nearly  all  the  contributions  of 
present  importance  published  up  to  the  date  of  going  to 
press.  Numbers  referring  to  the  Bibliography  have  been 
inserted  in  the  text  only  where  no  name  is  given  to  the 
authority  quoted. 

'  Geoffrey  Keynes. 

86,  Harley  Street,  W.l. 
February  1922. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  I 

PAGB 

Historical  Sketch      ......         1 


CHAPTER  II 

Indications   for   Blood    Transfusion  :   HiEMOR- 

RHAGE    AND    ShOCK  .....  19 

CHAPTER  III 

Indications  for  Blood  Transfusion — continued  : 
Hemorrhagic  Diseases — Blood  Diseases — 
Toxemias     .......       44 

CHAPTER  IV 
Dangers  of  Blood  Transfusion  ...       67 

CHAPTER   V 

Physiology  and  Pathology  of  Blood  Groups  .       79 

CHAPTER  VI 

The  Choice  of  Blood  Donor     ....       97 

CHAPTER  VII 

The  Methods  of  Blood  Transfusion  .         .108 

Bibliography .     137 

Index  .         .  .         .         .         .         .         .         .     159 


BLOOD  TRANSFUSION 


CHAPTER  I 

HISTORICAL    SKETCH 

From  the  earliest  times  the  vital  importance  of  blood  to 
the  human  system  has  been  fully  appreciated.  It  has  been 
supposed  to  carry  in  it  some  of  the  virtues,  such  as  the 
youth  and  health,  of  its  possessor,  and  it  has  therefore  been 
commonly  regarded  as  a  sacrifice  acceptable  to  the  gods. 
References  to  blood  in  the  Old  Testament,  in  classical 
authors,  and,  it  is  stated,  in  the  writings  of  the  ancient 
Egyptians,  refer  rather  to  these  mystical  attributes  than 
to  any  definite  transference  of  it  from  the  veins  of  one 
animal  to  those  of  another.  One  of  the  earliest  references 
to  actual  transfusion  of  blood  that  has  been  noticed  is  to 
be  found  in  a  work  by  Libavius  of  Halle,  published  in  1615. 
The  passage  has  been  translated  as  follows  : 

''  Let  there  be  present  a  robust  healthy  youth  full  of 
lively  blood.  Let  there  come  one  exhausted  in  strength, 
weak,  enervated,  scarcely  breathing.  Let  the  master  of 
the  art  have  little  tubes  that  can  be  adapted  one  to  the 
other ;  then  let  him  open  an  artery  of  the  healthy  one, 
insert  the  tube  and  secure  it.  Next  let  him  incise  the 
artery  of  the  patient  and  put  into  it  the  feminine  tube. 
Now  let  him  adapt  the  two  tubes  to  each  other  and  the 
arterial  blood  of  the  healthy  one,  warm  and  full  of  spirit, 
will  leap  into  the  sick  one,  and  immediately  will  bring  him 
to  the  fountain  of  life,  and  will  drive  away  all  languor." 

It  may  be  assumed,  however,  that  this  was  only  an  idea, 
and  had  not  yet  been  carried  into  practice.  It  was,  indeed, 
unlikely  that  any  attempt  to  perform  blood  transfusion 
1 


2  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

would  be  made  until  the  conception  of  the  circulation  of 
the  blood  had  been  promulgated,  and  this  in  1615  had  not 
yet  taken  place. 

William  Harvey  had  been  appointed  physician  to  St. 
Bartholomew's  Hospital  in  1609,  and  already  in  1616  as 
Lumleian  lecturer  had  stated  his  theory  of  the  circulation, 
but  not  until  its  publication  twelve  years  later  could  it  be 
generally  known.  His  treatise  entitled  Eocercitatio  Anato- 
mica  de  Motu  Cordis  et  Sanguinis  in  Animalibus,  which 
appeared  in  1628,  may  therefore  be  regarded  as  the  point 
from  which  blood  transfusion  first  arose.  'It  has  often 
been  stated  in  the  literature  of  the  subject  that  the  first 
transfusion  was  performed  in  1492,  when  the  blood  of 
three  boys  is  supposed  to  have  been  transfused  into  the 
veins  of  the  aged  Pope  Innocent  VIII. ^  This,  however, 
seems  to  have  been  a  mis-statement  of  the  facts.  Actually 
a  Jewish  physician  prepared  a  draught  for  the  Pope  from 
the  blood  of  three  boys,  who  were  bled  to  death  for  the 
purpose. 2  The  drinking  of  blood  was  not  a  new  idea;  this 
particular  incident  is  of  no  special  interest,  and  may  now 
be  allowed  to  sink  into  oblivion. 

It  is  not  until  after  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century 
that  authentic  references  to  blood  transfusion  are  to  be 
found.  The  first  is  in  the  writings  of  Francesco  Folli,  a 
Florentine  physician,  who  claims  to  have  demonstrated 
the  operation  of  transfusion  of  blood  on  August  13,  1654, 
to  the  Grand  Duke  Frederick  II.  There  does  not  seem  to 
be  any  confirmation  of  this  in  the  writings  of  others.  A 
few  years  later  experimental  work  tending  in  the  same 
direction  was  being  done  in  England,  and  the  inception  of 
this  was  due  to  the  ingenious  Sir  Christopher  Wren,  who 
in  this  connexion  has  not  hitherto  received  the  recognition 
that  is  his  due.  Dr.  Wren,  as  he  was  designated  at  the 
time,  was  one  of  the  most  active  members  of  the  recently 

1  The  first  reference  to  this  that  I  can  find  is  in  "  Moines  et  Papes,"  by 
Emile  Gebhardt,  La  Chronique  Medicale,  November  1912. 

2  Life  and  Times  of  Rodrigo  Borgia,  A.  H.  Mathew,  D.D.,  1912,  p.  66. 


HISTORICAL   SKETCH  8 

formed  Royal  Society,  and  was  responsible  for  many  new 
experiments  in  several  sciences.  It  is  clear  from  references 
in  the  Philosophical  Transactions  that  his  first  experiments 
were  done  in  1659,  and  the  following  statement  is  made  by 
Dr.  Thomas  Sprat  in  his  History  of  the  Royal  Society, 
published  in  1667  : 

"  He  was  the  first  author  of  the  Noble  Anatomical 
Experiment  of  Injecting  Liquors  into  the  Veins  of  Animals. 
An  Experiment  now  vulgarly  known ;  but  long  since 
exhibited  to  the  Meetings  at  Oxford,  and  thence  carried 
by  some  Germans,  and  published  abroad.  By  this  Opera- 
tion divers  Creatures  were  immediately  purg'd,  vomited, 
intoxicated,  kill'd,  or  reviv'd  according  to  the  quality  of 
the  Liquor  injected  :  Hence  arose  many  new  Experiments, 
and  chiefly  that  of  Transfusing  Blood,  which  the  Society 
has  prosecuted  in  sundry  Instances,  that  will  probably  end 
in  extraordinary  Success  "  (p.  317). 

Sir  Christopher  Wren  did  not  actually  carry  out  any 
transfusion  experiments  on  his  own  account.  This  was 
done  by  his  friend,  Richard  Lower,  well  known  for  his 
work  on  the  anatomy  of  the  heart,  who  worked  in  the 
laboratory  of  Thomas  Willis  at  Oxford.  In  these  experi- 
ments, some  account  of  which  was  published  in  1666,  he 
used  a  silver  cannula  for  obtaining  continuity  between  the 
artery  of  one  animal  and  the  vein  of  another.  Lower  must 
therefore  receive  the  credit  for  having  done  the  first  trans- 
fusion actually  performed  in  England.  In  the  following 
year  other  experiments  were  done  by  Dr.  Edmund  King 
and  Thomas  Cox,  both  of  whom  recorded  their  experiences 
in  the  Philosophical  Transactions. 

Meanwhile  Wren's  work  had  become  known  in  other 
countries,  and  it  is  said  that  transfusion  was  performed  in 
1664  by  Daniel  of  Leipsic,  who  thus  anticipated  the  work 
of  Lower.  However  this  may  be,  the  first  transfusion  done 
upon  a  human  being  was  certainly  carried  out  in  France  by 
Jean  Denys  of  Montpellier,  physician  to  Louis  XIV.  This 
is   admitted  in  the  Philosophical  Transactions,   but   the 


4  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

following  statement  in  extenuation  of  English  hesitancy  is 
made  : 

"  We  readily  grant,  They  were  the  first,  we  know  off, 
that  actually  thus  improved  the  Experiment ;  but  then 
they  must  give  us  leave  to  inform  them  of  this  Truth,  that 
the  Philosophers  in  England  had  practised  it  long  agoe  upon 
Man,  if  they  had  not  been  so  tender  in  hazarding  the  Life 
of  Man  (which  they  take  so  much  pains  for  to  preserve  and 
relieve),  nor  so  scrupulous  to  incurre  the  Penalties  of  the 
Law,  which  in  England,  is  more  strict  and  nice  in  case  of 
this  concernment,  than  those  of  many  other  Nations  are." 

Dr.  Edmund  King  further  asserts  that  "  We  have  been 
ready  for  this  Experiment  these  six  Months,"  that  is  to  say, 
since  March,  1667.  Moral  precedence  must,  however,  give 
way  to  the  actual,  and  it  is  clear  that  Denys  had  snatched 
the  laurels.  A  translation  of  a  full  and  interesting  account 
of  his  earlier  experiment  upon  animals  and  his  first  two 
transfusions  done  upon  men  was  published  in  the  Philoso- 
phical Transactions  for  July  22,  1667.  Of  the  first  of  these 
he  wrote  as  follows  : 

"  On  the  15  of  this  Moneth,  we  hapned  upon  a  Youth 
aged  between  15  and  16  years,  who  had  for  above  two 
moneths  bin  tormented  with  a  contumacious  and  violent 
fever,  which  obliged  his  Physitians  to  bleed  him  20  times, 
in  order  to  asswage  the  excessive  heat. 

"  Before  this  disease,  he  was  not  observed  to  be  of  a 
lumpish  dull  spirit,  his  memory  was  happy  enough,  and  he 
seem'd  chearful  and  nimble  enough  in  body ;  but  since 
the  violence  of  his  fever,  his  wdt  seem'd  wholly  sunk,  his 
memory  perfectly  lost,  and  his  body  so  heavy  and  drowsie 
that  he  was  not  fit  for  any  thing.  I  beheld  him  fall  asleep 
as  he  sate  at  dinner,  as  he  was  eating  his  Breakfast,  and  in 
all  occurrences  where  men  seem  most  unlikely  to  sleep. 
If  he  went  to  bed  at  nine  of  the  clock  in  the  Evening,  he 
needed  to  be  wakened  several  times  before  he  could  be  got 
to  rise  by  nine  the  next  morning,  and  pass'd  the  rest  of  the 
day  in  an  incredible  stupidity. 


I 


HISTORICAL   SKETCH  5 

'  I  attributed  all  these  changes  to  the  great  evacuations 

of   blood,  the  Physitians  had    been  oblig'd  to  make  for 

saving  his  life,  and  I  perswaded  myself  that  the  little  they 

had  left  him  was  extreamly  incrustated  [?  incrassated]  by 

the  ardour  of  the  fever.  .  .  .  Accordingly  my  conjecture 

was  confirmed  by  our  opening  one  of  his  Veins,  for  we 

beheld  a  blood  so  black  and  thick  issue  forth,  that  it  could 

hardly  form  itself  into  a  thread  to  fall  into  the  porringer. 

We  took  about  three  ounces  at  five  of  the  Clock  in  the 

morning,  and  at  the  same  time  we  brought  a  Lamb,  whose 

Carotis  Artery  we  had  prepar'd,  out  of  which  we  immitted 

into  the  young  man's  Vein,  about  three  times  as  much  of 

its  Arterial  blood  as  he  had  emitted  into  the  Dish,  and  then 

having  stopt  the  orifice  of  the  Vein  with  a  little  bolster,  as 

is  usual  in  other  phlebotomies,  we  caus'd  him  to  lie  down  on 

his  Bed,  expecting  the  event ;    and  as  I  askt  him  now  and 

then  how  he  found  himself,  he  told  me  that  during  the 

operation  he  had  felt  a  very  great  heat  along  his  Arm,  and 

since  perceiv'd  himself  much  eased  of  a  pain  in  his  side, 

which  he  had  gotten  the  evening  before  by  falling  down  a 

pair  of  staires  of  ten  steps  ;    about  ten  of  the  clock  he  was 

minded  to  rise,  and  being  I  observed  him  cheerful  enough, 

I  did  not  oppose  it ;   and  for  the  rest  of  the  day,  he  spent  it 

with  much  more  liveliness  than  ordinary ;    eat  his  Meals 

very  well,  and  shewed  a  clear  and  smiling  countenance. 

.  .  .  He  grows  fat  visibly,  and  in  brief,   is  a  subject  of 

amazement  to  all  those  that  know  him,  and  dwell  with 

him." 

This  boy  had  been  transfused  for  therapeutic  purposes  ; 
the  second  transfusion  performed  by  Denys  was  done 
upon  an  older  man  "  having  no  considerable  indisposition," 
and  was  purely  experimental.  About  twenty  ounces  of 
lamb's  blood  are  stated  to  have  been  transfused,  but  the 
procedure  was  without  any  ill  effect,  and  it  may  be 
doubted  whether  the  man  received  as  much  as  this. 
^  In  the  succeeding  number  of  the  Philosophical  Trans- 
actions, October  21,  1667,  the  remarks  of  another  French 


6  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

experimenter,  Gaspar  de  Gurye,  are  quoted.  These  are  of 
considerable  interest,  as  they  contain  the  first  warning  of 
the  dangers  attending  the  administration  of  incompatible 
blood.  De  Gurye  affirms  "  that  an  expert  Acquaintance 
of  his,  transfusing  a  great  quantity  of  blood  into  several 
Doggs,  observed  alwayes,  that  the  Receiving  Doggs  pissed 
Blood."  ^.-^^^ 

Other  cases  were  subsequently  recorded  by  Denys.  In 
one  he  claims  to  have  cured  a  patient  suffering  from  "  an 
inveterate  Phrenzy."  His  account  of  it  is  too  long  to  be 
quoted  here  in  full,  but  it  is  of  special  interest  in  that  it 
contains  the  first  account  of  haemolysis  and  the  attendant 
symptoms  in  man  which  follow  the  transfusion  of  incom- 
patible blood.  The  blood  of  a  calf  was  used  in  this  instance 
and  on  two  occasions  ;  at  the  first  transfusion  only  a  small 
amount  was  given,  but  at  the  second, 

"  the  Patient  must  have  received  more  than  one  whole 
pound.  As  this  second  Transfusion  was  larger,  so  were 
the  effects  of  it  quicker  and  more  considerable.  As  soon 
as  the  blood  began  to  enter  into  his  veins,  he  felt  the  like 
heal  along  his  Arm  and  under  his  Arm-pits  which  he  had 
felt  before.  His  pulse  rose  presently,  and  soon  after  we 
observed  a  plentiful  sweat  all  over  his  face.  His  pulse 
varied  extremely  at  this  instant,  and  he  complained  of 
great  pain  in  his  Kidneys,  and  that  he  was  not  well  in  his 
stomack,  and  that  he  was  ready  to  choak  unless  they  gave 
him  his  liberty. 

''  Presently  the  Pipe  was  taken  out  that  conveyed  the 
blood  into  his  veins,  and  whilst  we  were  closing  the  wound, 
he  vomited  store  of  Bacon  and  Fat  he  had  eaten  half  an 
hour  before.  He  found  himself  urged  to  Urine,  and  asked 
to  go  to  stooll.  He  was  soon  made  to  lie  down,  and  after 
two  good  hours  strainings  to  void  divers  liquors,  which 
disturbed  his  stomack,  he  fell  asleep  about  10  a  Clock,  and 
slept  all  that  night  without  awakening  till  next  morning, 
was  Thursday,  about  8  a  Clock.  When  he  awakened,  he 
shewed  a  surprising  calmness,   and   a  great  presence  of 


HISTORICAL   SKETCH  7 

mind,  in  expressing  all  the  pains  and  a  general  lassitude  he 
felt  in  all  his  limbs.  He  made  a  great  glass  full  of  Urine, 
of  a  colour  as  black,  as  if  it  had  been  mixed  with  the  soot  of 
Chimneys." 

The  hsemoglobinuria,  which  was  not  at  that  time 
attributed  to  its  true  cause,  cleared  up  in  the  course 
of  a  few  days,  and  the  patient  appeared  to  be  greatly 
benefited. 

Although  the  first  transfusion  performed  upon  a  human 
being  was  done  in  France,  similar  experiments  were  shortly 
afterwards  carried  out  in  England.  The  passage  already 
quoted  concerning  the  "  sundry  instances  "  mentioned  in 
Sprat's  History  of  the  Royal  Society  is  amplified  by  the 
diarist,  Samuel  Pepys,  who  witnessed  the  experiments  on 
at  least  one  occasion.  His  first  reference  to  the  subject  is 
under  the  date  November  14,  1666  : 

"  Here  [at  the  Pope's  Head]  Dr.  Croone  told  me,  that,  at 
the  meeting  at  Gresham  College  to-night,  .  .  .  there  was 
a  pretty  experiment  of  the  blood  of  one  dogg  let  out,  till 
he  died,  into  the  body  of  another  on  one  side,  while  all  his 
own  run  out  on  the  other  side.  The  first  died  upon  the 
place,  and  the  other  very  well,  and  likely  to  do  well.  This 
did  give  occasion  to  many  pretty  wishes,  as  of  the  blood 
of  a  Quaker  to  be  let  into  an  Archbishop,  and  such  like  ; 
but,  as  Dr.  Croone  says,  may,  if  it  takes,  be  of  mighty  use 
to  man's  health,  for  the  amending  of  bad  blood  by  borrow- 
ing from  a  better  body."     {Diary,  ed.  Wheatley,  vi.  p.  60.) 

Two  days  later  he  reports  : 

"  This  noon  I  met  with  Mr.  Hooke,  and  he  tells  me  the 
dog  which  was  filled  with  another  dog's  blood,  at  the  College 
the  other  day,  is  very  well,  and  like  to  be  so  as  ever,  and 
doubts  not  its  being  found  of  great  use  to  men, — and  so  do 
Dr.  Whistler,  who  dined  with  us  at  the  tavern."  (Ibid., 
p.  63.) 

On  November  28  there  was  further  conversation  at 
Gresham  College  to  the  same  effect  (ibid.,  p.  79).  In  the 
following  year  the  experiments  were  taken  a  stage  further, 


8  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

and  Pepys  refers  again  to  them  under  the  date  November 
21,  1667  : 

"  Among  the  rest  they  discourse  of  a  man  that  is  a  Httle 
frantic,  that  hath  been  a  kind  of  minister.  Dr.  Wilkins 
saying  that  he  hath  read  for  him  in  his  church,  that  is  poor 
and  a  debauched  man,  that  the  College  have  hired  for  20^. 
to  have  some  of  the  blood  of  a  sheep  let  into  his  body  ;  and 
it  is  to  be  done  on  Saturday  next.  They  purpose  to  let  in 
about  twelve  ounces  ;  which  they  compute,  is  what  will 
be  let  in  in  a  minute's  time  by  a  watch.  They  differ  in  the 
opinion  they  have  of  the  effects  of  it ;  some  think  it  may 
have  a  good  effect  upon  him  as  a  frantic  man  by  cooling 
his  blood,  others  that  it  will  not  have  any  effect  at  all. 
But  the  man  is  a  healthy  man,  and  by  this  means  will  be 
able  to  give  an  account  what  alteration,  if  any,  he  do  find 
in  himself,  and  so  may  be  usefull."     (Diary,  vii.  p.  195.) 

On  November  29  Pepys.  dined  at  a  house  of  entertain- 
ment, and  enjoyed  good  company. 

"  But  here,  above  all,  I  was  pleased  to  see  the  person 
who  had  his  blood  taken  out.  He  speaks  well,  and  did 
this  day  give  the  Society  a  relation  thereof  in  Latin,  saying 
that  he  finds  himself  much  better  since,  and  as  a  new  man, 
but  he  is  cracked  a  little  in  his  head,  though  he  speaks  very 
reasonably,  and  very  well.  He  had  but  205.  for  his  suffer- 
ing it,  and  is  to  have  the  same  again  tried  upon  him  :  the 
first  sound  man  that  ever  had  it  tried  on  him  in  England, 
and  but  one  that  we  hear  of  in  France,  which  was  a  porter 
hired  by  the  virtuosos."  ^     (Ibid:,  p.  205.) 

The  subject  of  this  experiment  was  Arthur  Coga,  an 
indigent  Bachelor  of  Divinity  of  Cambridge,  aged  about 
thirty-two.  It  is  recorded  in  the  Philosophical  Trans- 
actions that  the  experiment  was  performed  by  Richard 
Lower  and  Edmund  King  at  Arundel  House  on  November 
23,  1667,  in  the  presence  of  many  spectators,  including 
several  physicians.  Coga,  when  asked  why  he  had  not  the 
blood  of  some  other  creature  transfused  into  him,  rather 

1  This  refers  to  the  experiment  of  Denys,  mentioned  above. 


HISTORICAL   SKETCPI 


p 

H|  than  that  of  a  sheep,  rephed  :  "  Sanguis  ovis  symbolicam 
quandam  facultatem  habet  cum  sanguine  Christi,  quia 
Christus  est  agnus  Dei."  ^  It  was  estimated  that  Coga 
received  eight  or  nine  ounces  of  blood,  but  he  seems  to 
have  felt  no  effects,  good  or  ill,  and  it  is  probable  that  he 
did  not  actually  receive  as  much  as  this. 

These  beginnings  in  England  and  France  led  to  the  more 
frequent  use  of  blood  transfusion,  but  soon  afterwards  the 
operation  fell  into  disrepute.  Disasters  followed  the 
transfusions,  and  the  practice  also  met  with  violent  opposi- 
tion on  the  ground  that  terrible  results,  such  as  the  growth 
of  horns,  would  follow  the  transfusion  of  an  animal's  blood 
into  a  human  being.  In  consequence  of  this  they  were 
actually  forbidden  in  France  by  the  Supreme  Court  until 
the  Faculte  of  Paris  should  signify  its  approval,  but  the 
necessary  permission  was  not  given.  The  "  extraordinary 
success  "  predicted  by  Sprat  and  the  sanguine  expectations 
of  Pepys  and  his  friends  were  destined  not  to  be  fulfilled 
until  a  later  age. 

For  more  than  a  hundred  years  the  possibilities  of  blood 
transfusion  were  almost  entirely  neglected.  There  are 
some  isolated  references  to  it  in  medical  writings  towards 
the  end  of  the  eighteenth  century,  but  of  these  it  is  only 
necessary  to  notice  two.  In  1792,  at  Eye  in  Suffolk,  blood 
from  two  lambs  was  transfused  by  a  Dr.  Russell  into  a  boy 
suffering  from  hydrophobia,  and  he  claimed  that  the 
patient's  recovery  was  to  be  attributed  to  the  treatment. 
Soon  afterwards  in  1796  Erasmus  Darwin  recommended 
transfusion  for  putrid  fever,  cancer  of  the  oesophagus,  and 
in  other  cases  of  impaired  nutrition.  He  suggested  that 
the  blood  should  be  transferred  from  donor  to  recipient 
through  goose  quills  connected  by  a  short  length  of 
chicken's  gut,  which  could  be  alternately  allowed  to  fill 
from  the  donor  and  emptied  by  pressure  into  the  patient. 
This  operation  he  never  actually  performed. 

A  more  general  interest  in  the  subject  was  revived  in 

1  Birch's  History  oj  the  Royal  Society,  175G,  ii.  p,  216, 


10 


BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 


England  by  the  work  of  James  Blundell,  lecturer  on  physio- 
logy and  midwifery  at  St.  Thomas's  and  Guy's  Hospitals. 
He  published  in  1818  his  earliest  paper  on  experimental 


Fig.   1. — Blundell' s  Impellor 

From  Researches  Physiological  and  Pathological,  1824 

transfusion  with  a  special  form  of  syringe  invented  by 
himself.  His  first  apparatus  consisted  of  a  funnel-shaped 
receptacle  for  the  blood,  connected  by  a  two-way  tap  with 
a  syringe  from  which  the  blood  was  injected  through  a  tube 
and   cannula  into  the   recipient.     His   experiments   were 


HISTORICAL   SKETCH  11 


r 

^P  performed  upon  dogs,  and  he  began  by  drawing  blood  from 
the  femoral  artery  and  re-injecting  it  into  the  same  animal 
through  the  femoral  vein.  He  then  conducted  a  long  series 
of  investigations  into  the  properties  of  blood,  the  effects 
of  its  withdrawal,  and  the  resuscitation  of  an  exsanguinated 
animal.  Soon  he  had  opportunities  of  transfusing  patients 
withjiumaa-blood,   and  the  results  are  recorded  in  his 

paper  of  lg24. His  apparatus  had  by  then  been  elaborated, 

and  an  engraving  of  his  Impellor,  as  he  termed  it,  is  repro- 
duced here.  It  consisted  as  before  of  a  funnel-shaped 
\^m  receptacle  for  the  blood,  but  the  syringe  was  now  in- 
^B  corporated  in  one  side  of  the  funnel,  and  contained  a 
^B  complicated  system  of  spring  valves,  which  caused  the  blood 
^B  to  travel  along  the  delivery  tube  when  the  piston  was 
^H  pushed  down.  The  Impellor  was  fixed  to  the  back  of  a 
^B  chair  in  order  to  give  it  stability. 

^B  All  the  patients  transfused  by  Blundell  were  either 
^B  exceedingly  ill,  or,  judging  from  his  description,  already 
^^  dead,  so  that  his  results,  considered  statistically,  were  not 
favourable  !  Nevertheless,  he  was  not  discouraged,  and 
stated  his  "  own  persuasion  to  be  that  transfusion  by  the 
syringe  is  a  very  feasible  and  useful  operation,  and  that, 
after  undergoing  the  usual  ordeal  of  neglect,  opposition, 
and  ridicule,  it  will,  hereafter,  be  admitted  into  general 
practice.  Whether  mankind  are  to  receive  the  first  benefit 
of  it,  in  this  or  any  future  age,  from  British  surgery,  or  that 
of  foreign  countries,  time,  the  discoverer  of  truth  and  false- 
hood, must  determine."  Blundell's  work  has  been  de- 
scribed in  some  detail  because,  after  the  experimental  work 
of  the  seventeenth  century,  the  year  1818  may  be  taken  to 
mark  the  real  beginning  of  the  clinical  application  of  blood 
transfusion. 

The  chief  difficulty  in  the  way  of  successful  transfusion 
was,  of  course,  the  obstacle  introduced  by  the  coagulation 
of  the  blood.  Bischoff  in  1835  sought  to  overcome  this 
by  injecting  defibrinated  blood,  and  that  solution  of  the 
difficulty  was  adopted  by  many  operators,  including  Sir 


12  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

Thomas  Smith,  who,  in  1873,  used  defibrinated  blood  for 
transfusing  a  case  of  melsena  neonatorum  at  St.  Bartholo- 
mew's Hospital.     The  apparatus  on  this  occasion  consisted 
of  "  a  wire  egg-beater,  a  hair  sieve,  a  three-ounce  glass 
aspirator  syringe,  a  fine  blunt-ended  aspirator  cannula,  a 
short  piece  of  india-rubber  tubing  with  a  brass  nozzle  at 
either  end  connecting  the  syringe  with  the  cannula,  a  tall 
narrow  vessel  standing  in  warm  water  for  defibrinating  the 
blood,   and   a  suitable   vessel  floated  in  warm  water  to 
contain  the  defibrinated  blood."     Others,  too  numerous  to 
be  individually  named,  used  the  same  method  throughout 
the  nineteenth  century  and  during  the  first  ten  years  of 
the  twentieth.     Even  in  1914  a  method  of  using  defibrin- 
ated  blood  was  described   by  Moss.     An  objection  was 
raised  in  1877  that  it  was  dangerous  to  do  this,  owing  to 
the  excess  of  fibrin  ferment  introduced  with  blood  thus 
treated,  but  this  did  not  greatly  discourage  its  use.     Then, 
as  now,  one  of  the  chief  uses  of  blood  transfusion  was  found 
to  be  in  the  practice  of  obstetrics.     A  series  of  57  cases  of 
this  kind  were  reported  by  Martin  of  Berlin  in  1859,  43  of 
these  having  been  successful.     A  further  series  of  cases  was 
collected  by  Blasius  in  1863.     He  was  able  to  report  that 
of  116  transfusions  performed  during  the  previous  forty 
years,  in  56  the  results  were  satisfactory.     These  statistics 
did  not  indicate  a  remarkable  degree  of  success.     FataUties 
due   to  the   transfusion   had   occurred,    attended   by  the 
symptoms  which  we  have  now  learned  to  associate  with 
incompatibility  of  the  transfused  blood.     At  that  time, 
however,  the  deaths  were  believed  to  be  due  chiefly  to  the 
introduction  of  air  bubbles  into  the  circulation,  although 
it  had  been  shown  experimentally  by  Blundell  in  1818,  and 
again  by  Ore  in  1868,  that  small  quantities,  such  as  might 
be  accidentally  introduced  during  a  transfusion,  produced 
no  ill  effects.     Some  explanation,  however,  was  required, 
and  so  air  bubbles  for  a  long  time  received  the  blame. 

Although  some  of  the  early  experiments  on  blood  trans- 
fusion had  been  done  in  England,  and  although  its  revival 


Fig.  2. — Mr.  Higginson's  Transfusion  Instrument 

A  is  a  metallic  cup,  of  6-oz.  capacity,  to  receive  the  supply  of  blood .  B  an  outer  casing,  which 
will  hold  5  oz.  of  hot  water,  introduced  through  an  aperture  at  C.  D  is  a  passage  leading  into  an 
elastic  barrel,  composed  of  vulcanized  india-rubber,  E,  of  which  the  capacity  is  1  oz.  F'  the  exit 
for  the  blood  into  the  injection-pipe  G.  At  D  and  F  there  are  ball-valves,  capable  of  closing  the 
upper  openings  when  thrown  up  against  them,  but  leaving  the  lower  openings  always  free.  The 
blood,  or  other  fluid,  poured  into  the  cup  A,  has  free  power  to  run  unobstructed  through  D,  E,  P  ; 
a  small  plug  H  is  therefore  provided  to  close  the  lower  aperture  F  when  necessary.  The  tube  G- 
is  of  vulcanized  india-rubber,  and  terminates  in  a  metal  tube  0  for  insertion  into  the  vein.  This 
diagram  is  one-half  the  actual  size  of  the  instrument. 

13 


14  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

in  the  nineteenth  century  was  initiated  in  England,  yet  it 
is  to  be  noticed  that  most  of  the  references  to  it  up  to  1874 
are  to  be  found  in  the  works  of  Continental  writers.  Never- 
theless, an  important  modification  was  introduced  into  the 
technique  of  the  operation  in  1857  by  Higginson,  who 
applied  the  principle  of  a  rubber  syringe  with  ball-valves 
for  transferring  the  blood  from  the  receptacle  into  which 
it  was  drawn,  to  the  vein  of  the  recipient.  This  apparatus 
is  illustrated  here,  as  it  is  of  some  interest  in  the  history 
of  medicine.  Higginson's  syringe  is  now  used  for  a 
different  purpose,  but  it  was  successfully  applied  by  its 
inventor  in  a  series  of  seven  cases  which  he  duly  reported. 
One  patient  whom  he  transfused  was  suffering  from 
extreme  weakness,  which  was  attributed  to  the  too  pro- 
tracted suckling  of  twins.  He  gave  her  about  twelve 
ounces  of  blood  from  a  healthy  female  servant,  and  a  state 
of  quietude  followed  her  previous  restlessness.  A  few 
minutes  later  the  patient  was  seized  with  a  rather  severe 
rigor.  It  did  not  last  long,  but  led  to  a  state  of  reaction 
and  excitement,  in  which  she  sang  a  hymn  in  a  loud  voice. 
The  final  result  was  good,  and  Higginson  reports  that  in 
five  of  the  seven  cases  some  benefit  was  to  be  attributed  to 
the  transfusions.  Later  the  same  principle  was  used  in 
America  by  Aveling  and  by  Fryer  about  the  year  1874, 
and  subsequently  it  was  in  that  country  that  nearly  all 
the  important  advances  in  the  science  of  blood  transfusion 
were  made. 

In  1873  an  inquiry  was  carried  out  by  the  Obstetrical 
Society  of  London  into  the  merits  of  transfusion,  the 
subject  having  been  brought  to  the  Society's  notice  by  a 
report  of  a  case  by  Aveling,  and  an  interesting  summary  of 
the  evidence  was  prepared  by  Madge  in  1874.  The  results 
do  not  seem  to  have  been  very  encouraging, ''and  transfusion 
was  still  regarded  as  a  procedure  that  was  only  to  be  used 
as  a  last  resource.  Even  at  this  date  the  bloodi'of  other 
animals  was  being  used  for  transfusion,  although  the 
practice  had  been  discredited  by  Panum  in  1863  and  by 


HISTORICAL   SKETCH  15 

others,  and  a  series  of  eases  was  reported  by  Hasse  in  1873, 
in  which  lamb's  blood  was  given  for  various  conditions. 
Other  cases  were  reported  from  Italy  (3)  and  Russia  (101). 
Sentiment,  if  not  science,  seems  to  have  suggested  that 
there  was  something  repulsive  in  bringing  a  lamb  into  the 
sick  chamber  and  mixing  animal  with  human  blood,  but  it 
was  remarked  in  a  discussion  on  the  subject  that  "  it  was 
only  taking  lamb  in  another  form." 

After  1875,  however,  there  was  a  decline  in  the  amount  of 
attention  given  to  transfusion  which  lasted  for  thirty 
years.  This  was  probably  due  in  part  to  the  increasing 
number  of  fatalities  which  had  followed  the  more  general 
use  of  transfusion,  but,  as  Peterson  suggests,  it  was  also  to 
be  accounted  for  by  the  increasing  use  of  normal  saline 
solution  for  intravenous  injection  in  the  treatment  of 
haemorrhage.  There  was  also  a  period  during  which  the  use 
of  milk  was  advocated  for  intravenous  therapy  (37,  279). 
Soon  after  the  beginning  of  the  twentieth  century  trans- 
fusion received  a  fresh  impetus  which  has  steadily  gained 
force  up  to  the  present  time.  The  free  use  of  cannulse 
and  syringes  had  always  been  hampered  by  the  coagulation 
of  the  blood,  and  it  was  clearly  a  great  advance  to  be  able 
to  perform  a  direct  transfusion  without  the  intervention  of 
any  tube.  This  was  made  possible  by  great  improvements 
in  the  surgery  of  the  blood-vessels,  which  were  due  in  the 
first  place  to  the  work  of  Murphy,  published  in  1897  ;  they 
were  carried  still  further  by  others,  such  as  Carrel  and 
Guthrie,  and  culminated  in  the  work  of  Crile,  who  in  1907 
put  the  technique  of  direct  transfusion  on  a  securer  basis 
than  it  had  ever  been  before.  His  method  is  briefly 
described  in  a  later  chapter  of  the  present  work.  Mean- 
while the  chief  factor  responsible  for  previous  fatalities 
was  being  eliminated.  The  presence  of  agglutinins  and  iso- 
agglutinins  in  the  blood  had  been  detected  by  Landsteiner 
and  by  Shattock  in  1901  ;  in  1907  the  four  blood  groups 
into  which  human  beings  can  be  classified  were  determined 
by  Jansky  and  the  work  was  repeated  by  Moss  in  1910, 


16  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

Simplification  of  the  group  tests  soon  followed,  as  is 
described  in  another  chapter.  At  the  same  time  great  im- 
provements were  made  in  the  use  of  syringes,  paraffined 
tubes,  and  in  anastomosis  of  the  blood-vessels.  In  this 
connexion  one  of  the  most  notable  contributions  was  made 
by  Curtis  and  David,  who  in  1911  introduced  the  use  of 
syringe  transfusion  through  a  two- armed  tube  coated  on 
the  inside  with  paraffin.  In  1913  indirect  transfusion  by 
'  means  of  the  paraffined  vessel  was  introduced  by  Kimpton 
and  Brown,  and  it  was  now  evident  that  blood  transfusion 
was  shortly  to  become  a  method  of  treatment  which  would 
be  without  any  very  difficult  technique,  and  could  therefore 
be  more  extensively  applied. 

The  final  advance  was  made  in  1914,  when  the  use  of 
sodium  citrate  as  an  anticoagulant  was  made  possible  by 
the  work  of  Lewisohn  in  America,  of  Hustin  in  Belgium, 
and  of  several  others,  who  all  arrived  independently,  but 
almost  simultaneously,  at  the  same  conclusion.  The  use 
of  an  anticoagulant  was  no  new  idea.  In  1858  the  use  of 
small  quantities  of  ammonia  had  been  suggested  by  B.  W. 
Richardson  in  the  Guy's  Hospital  Reports,  and  in  1869 
sodium  phosphate  was  used  in  four  obstetrical  cases  by 
Braxton  Hicks,  who  found  that  the  process  was  greatly 
facilitated  thereby ;  but  neither  of  these  methods  came 
into  general  use.  It  had  long  been  known  that  hirudin  or 
leech  extract,  and  the  salts  of  oxalic  acid  or  of  citric  acid, 
could  be  used  as  anticoagulants  outside  the  body,  but 
their  supposed  toxicity  had  prevented  their  being  used  for 
transfusion.  The  proof  that  sodium  citrate  was  both 
efficient  for  this  purpose  and  non-toxic  in  a  dilution  that 
was  still  effective  at  once  raised  blood  transfusion  to  a  wider 
sphere  of  usefulness  than  had  been  possible  before.  The 
first  transfusion  of  citrated  blood  was  performed  by 
Professor  L.  Agote  of  Buenos  Aires,  on  November  14,  1914, 
a  date  which  is  therefore  of  the  greatest  importance  in  the 
history  of  blood  transfusion.  A  method  had  at  last  been 
discovered  which  approached  the  ideal,  since  it  united  the 


I 


HISTORICAL   SKETCH  17 

four  cardinal  virtues  of  simplicity,  certainty,  safety,  and 
efficiency. 

This   great  stride  forward  in  the   technique   of  blood 
transfusion  coincided  so  nearly  with  the  beginning  of  the 
war  that  it  seemed   almost   as  if  foreknowledge  of  the 
necessity  for  it  in  treating  war  wounds   had  stimulated 
research.     Yet  during  the  first  two  years  of  the  war  almost 
nothing  was  known  in  the  British  Army  of  its  possibilities.  I 
I  have  no  evidence  that  the  French  or  German  army  doctors 
were  any  better  informed  than  ourselves.     Some  attempt 
was  made  in  1916  to  introduce  the  use  of  direct  transfusion 
through  cannulae,  but  the  technique  was  too  difficult  and 
uncertain  for  the  stress  of  war  conditions.     It  was  not  until  / 
1917,  when  the  British  Army  Medical  Corps  was  being/ 
steadily  reinforced  with  officers  from  the  United  States  of 
America,  that  knowledge  of  blood  transfusion  began  to  be 
spread    through    the    Armies.     A    conspicuous    part    was ' 
borne  by  Oswald  Robertson  in  introducing  the  use  of  the 
citrate  method,  and  to  him  a  very  large  number  of  men, 
indirectly  owe  their  lives.     In  some  armies  the  paraffined) 
vessel   of  Kimpton   and   Brown  remained   the  favourite 
method,  but  to  me  the  citrate  method  seemed  the  more 
suitable,  because  of  the  certainty  with  which  success  could 
be  attained,  and  the  same  view  was  taken  by  many  others. 
At   the   same   time   the   investigators    appointed    by   the 
Medical  Research  Committee  attempted  to  elucidate  the 
problems  connected  with  haemorrhage  and  wound  shock, 
and  their  results,  as  will  be  seen,  served  to  confirm  the 
estimate  already  being  formed  of  the  value  of  blood  trans- 
fusion. 

In  this  way  a  large  number  of  operators  in  this  country 
became  familiar  with  the  various  methods,  and  transfusion 
has  in  consequence  been  used  increasingly  in  civilian 
practice  since  the  war.  It  is  undoubtedly  destined  to 
figure  still  more  largely  in  the  therapeutics  of  the  future. 
Meanwhile  the  public  mind  is  becoming  gradually  more 
used  to  the  idea,  and  the  time  is  past  when  every  transfusion 
2 


18  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

is  deemed  worthy  of  a  sensational  headline  in  a  newspaper. 
Nevertheless,  at  the  end  of  the  year  1920  the  following 
advertisement  appeared  in  the  personal  columns  of  The 
Times  : 

"  Will  any  Doctor  who  knows  method  of  treating 
cancer  by  transfusion  of  child's  blood  kindly  write 
Box  — ." 

So  the  wheel  is  come  full  circle,  and  the  shade  of  Pope 
Innocent  VIII  may  well  chuckle  as  he  notes  the  small 
advance  in  popular  knowledge  since  the  fifteenth  century. 


CHAPTER  II 

INDICATIONS    FOR   BLOOD    TRANSFUSION 

The  indications  for  blood  transfusion  are  gradually  becom- 
ing more  numerous  as  experience  of  its  effects  accumulates, 
and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  value  of  transfusion  as 
a  therapeutic  measure  is  destined  to  become  much  more 
generally  recognized  than  it  is  at  the  present  time.  Lack 
of  knowledge,  together  with  an  exaggerated  idea  of  the 
difficulties  of  the  process,  is  the  chief  obstacle  to  its  more 
extended  use.  Time  and  the  education  of  the  rising  genera- 
tion will  provide  the  remedy  for  this. 

The  conditions  for  which  blood  transfusion  may  be  used 
fall  into  four  well-defined  groups.  On  the  one  hand  are 
those  characterized  by  an  acute  anaemia,  which  demand  the 
performance  of  a  blood  transfusion  as  an  emergency  or 
life-saving  operation  ;  on  the  other  hand  are  those  in  which 
the  anaemia  is  of  slow  onset,  and  is  to  be  combated  by  a 
single  transfusion  to  tide  the  patient  over  an  operation  or 
a  critical  period  or  by  repeated  transfusions  in  the  hope  of 
prolonging  the  patient's  life  if  not  of  obtaining  a  cure. 
A  third  group  includes  the  haemorrhagic  diseases  in  which 
the  transfusion  is  administered  not  only  to  replace  blood 
which  has  been  lost,  but  also  to  bring  about  cessation  of 
the  haemorrhage.  A  fourth  group  includes  cases  of  general 
toxaemia,  whether  chemical  or  bacterial,  in  which  the  new 
blood  is  given  partly  on  account  of  its  therapeutic  pro- 
perties, partly  in  order  to  dilute  the  circulating  toxins  or  to 
supply  healthy  red  blood  cells  to  carry  on  the  oxygenation 
of  the  tissues. 

For  the  first  and  third  of  these  groups  blood  transfusion 

19 


20  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

is  now  very  firmly  established  as  a  method  of  treatment 
which  is  of  extraordinary  value.  For  the  second  group  it 
may  be  regarded  as  a  palliative  to  be  given  with  circum- 
spection. For  the  fourth  group  administration  of  blood  is 
still  in  the  experimental  stage. 

In  the  present  work  each  condition  will  be  taken  in 
turn  and,  as  far  as  possible,  separately,  though  at  the  outset 
it  has  been  found  undesirable  to  dissociate  the  two  con- 
ditions, haemorrhage  and  shock.  The  present  position  of 
blood  transfusion  in  relation  to  each  condition  will  be 
discussed ;  its  limitations  and  the  precautions  to  be 
observed  will  be  described. 

HAEMORRHAGE    AND    ShOCK 

Blood  transfusion  is  pre-eminently  the  best  form  of 
treatment  that  is  known  for  the  condition  of  acute  anaemia 
following  haemorrhage  to  whatever  cause  it  may  be  due. 
Its  good  efiects  were  seen  by  a  number  of  operators  in 
many  hundreds  of  exsanguinated  patients  during  the  latter 
part  of  the  war,  and  its  value  was  then  established  upon  a 
secure  foundation.  It  was  unusual  during  the  war  to  meet 
with  patients  who  were  in  danger  of  their  lives  from  loss  of 
blood  alone  without  the  additional  factor  of  traumatic 
shock,  but  such  cases  did  occur,  and  they  are  also  to  be  met 
I  with  in  civil  practice,  as,  for  instance,  in  attempted  suicide 
'  by  throat  cutting,  in  gastric  ulcer  with  severe  haematemesis, 
and  in  secondary  haemorrhage  after  operation.  The  more 
typical  condition  following  war  wounds,  haemorrhage  with 
I  shock,  will  be  faithfully  reproduced  in  the  victims  of  train 
or  street  accidents,  in  patients  who  have  undergone  certain 
severe  operations,  and  in  women  suffering  from  post-partum 
haemorrhage  or  a  ruptured  ectopic  gestation. 

The  signs  and  symptoms  of  acute  anaemia  will  be  familiar 
to  most  readers.  It  is  characterized  by  a  peculiar  greyness 
of  the  skin,  by  extreme  pallor  of  the  mucous  membranes, 
by  a  cold  perspiration,  by  a  thready  and  rapid  pulse  which 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  21 

may  exceed  140  beats  to  the  minute,  and  by  extreme  rest- 
lessness. The  "  amaurosis  "  of  the  text-books  is  seldom 
met  with,  but  in  the  last  stages  the  patient  becomes  semi- 
unconscious,  the  restlessness  tends  to  disappear,  the 
muscles  relax,  and  the  respiration  takes  on  a  peculiar  sigh- 
ing character,  which  is  described  as  "  air  hunger,"  and 
probably  indicates  exhaustion  of  the  respiratory  centre. 
Meanwhile,  if  instruments  are  at  hand,  additional  signs  may 
be  recognized.  The  most  important  of  these  is  a  fall  in 
blood  pressure.  It  has  been  stated  that  a  systolic  pressure 
below  70  mm.  of  mercury  is  scarcely  compatible  with  life, 
but  this  is  not  in  accordance  with  experience.  It  was 
common  during  the  war  to  meet  with  blood  pressures 
below  45  mm.,  so  low  in  fact  that  they  could  not  be 
measured  with  the  ordinary  apparatus  that  was  available, 
but  many  patients  whose  lives  had  reached  even  so  low  an 
ebb  as  this  were  quickly  restored  by  the  administration  of 
blood,  provided  that  the  exsanguinated  state  had  not  lasted 
for  too  long  a  time.  If  the  medullary  centres  are  damaged 
beyond  recovery  by  inadequate  oxygenation  lasting  for 
several  hours,  then  no  treatment  is  of  any  avail.  But 
provided  that  it  be  given  before  this  length  of  time  has 
elapsed,  a  blood  transfusion  may  succeed  in  saving  life  at 
any  stage  of  the  condition.  Its  efficacy  is  indeed  only 
limited  by  the  actual  cessation  of  the  patient's  heart  beats. 
I  have  successfully  treated  a  patient  who  before  transfusion 
could  only  be  described  as  moribund.  He  was  almost  un- 
conscious, absolutely  blanched,  and  his  radial  pulse 
imperceptible  ;  his  jaw  was  relaxed  and  his  breathing  had 
become  a  series  of  fish-like  gasps,  such  as  are  only  associated 
with  imminent  dissolution.  His  heart  would  certainly 
have  ceased  beating  within  a  few  minutes,  yet  his  condition 
improved  so  rapidly  after  transfusion  that  an  hour  later  it 
was  possible,  with  the  help  of  a  second  transfusion,  to 
amputate  his  leg  above  the  knee.  This  patient  ultimately 
recovered,  having  been  as  near  death  as  it  is  possible  to  be 
and  yet  remain  alive. 


22  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

The  results  of  a  blood  transfusion  upon  a  patient  suffering 
from  acute  anaemia  are,  indeed,  amongst  the  most  dramatic 
effects  to  be  obtained  in  the  whole  range  of  surgery. 
Within  a  few  minutes  of  its  commencement  the  whole 
aspect  of  the  patient  alters.  His  respiration  becomes  deep 
and  regular,  his  restlessness  disappears,  colour  returns  to 
his  face,  his  pulse  rate  falls,  and  he  begins  to  take  an  intelli- 
gent interest  in  his  surroundings.  These  changes  taking 
place  within  a  period  of  fifteen  minutes  may  well  strike  an 
onlooker  as  little  short  of  miraculous.  Shortly  afterwards 
the  patient  may  fall  into  a  natural  sleep,  a  sure  sign  that 
the  normal  circulation  has  been  restored  to  the  exhausted 
central  nervous  system. 

In  considering  how  much  blood  should  ordinarily  be 
given  in  the  treatment  of  acute  anaemia,  experience  is  a 
safer  guide  than  any  theoretical  considerations.  Never- 
theless, it  is  worth  while  to  inquire  briefly  into  the 
experimental  and  theoretical  basis  upon  which  the  treat- 
ment of  acute  anaemia  rests.  It  is  difficult  to  estimate 
accurately  the  total  quantity  of  blood  in  the  body  of  an 
adult,  but  it  has  been  variously  stated  by  physiologists  to 
be  from  a  twentieth  to  a  tenth  part  of  the  body  weight,  or, 
in  liquid  measure,  from  3  to  6  litres  (approximately  5  to  10 
pints).  This  has  been  estimated  in  several  ways,  the 
results  of  which  show  some  discrepancy.  A  figure 
approaching  the  higher  one  was  obtained  long  ago  by  the 
direct  method  of  washing  out  the  blood  from  the  bodies  of 
executed  criminals.  Recently  it  has  been  claimed  by 
Haldane  that  these  determinations  were  inaccurate  ;  by 
means  of  his  carbon  monoxide  method,  with  the  details 
of  which  we  are  not  concerned  here,  he  has  estimated  that 
the  blood  volume  is  but  one-twentieth  of  the  body  weight, 
or  in  very  stout  persons  is  even  as  low  as  one-thirtieth. 
Still  more  recently  Haldane's  estimation  has  been  chal- 
lenged in  its  turn  by  observers  who  have  injected  a  dye 
into  the  circulation  and  have  then  determined  its  degree 
of  concentration  in  the  blood  by  means  of  colorimetric 


HEMORRHAGE  AND   SHOCK  23 

comparisons.  It  is  evident  that  if  the  dilution  which 
occurs  when  a  known  quantity  of  dye  is  injected  can  be 
accurately  estimated,  then  the  total  volume  of  circulating 
fluid  can  be  calculated.  This  method  could  not  be  used 
until  a  non-toxic,  non-diffusable  dye  had  been  discovered, 
but  it  was  found  in  1915  that  "  vital  red  "  fulfilled  these 
requirements  (143).  The  results  obtained  in  this  way  show 
that  those  originally  given  by  the  direct  method  were  sub- 
stantially correct.  The  blood  volume  was  found  to  vary 
from  1/13  to  1/10-5  of  the  body  weight ;  on  the  average  it 
amounted  to  5,350  cc,  or  85  cc.  per  kilogram  of  body 
weight.  These  observations  have  been  in  their  turn 
criticized  (114),  but  only  to  the  extent  of  reducing  the 
amount  by  1/10.  It  may  therefore  be  assumed  that, 
according  to  the  most  recent  work,  the  blood  volume  is 
from  5  to  6  litres,  or,  approximately,  8  to  10  pints. 

It  is  a  still  more  difficult  matter  for  obvious  reasons  to 
estimate  how  much  blood  a  man  can  lose  and  yet  remain 
alive.  This  will  depend  partly  on  the  power  of  physiolo- 
gical accommodation  possessed  by  the  individual  in  his 
vaso-motor  system  and  tissue  fluids  and  partly  on  the 
rapidity  with  which  the  bleeding  takes  place.  Clinical 
observations  have  shown  that  after  a  moderate  haemor- 
rhage, such  as  the  withdrawal  of  800  cc.  of  blood  from 
a  donor,  the  blood  volume  may  be  restored  to  normal 
within  an  hour.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  haemorrhage  is 
excessive,  a  condition  results  in  which  the  normal  process 
of  rapid  restoration  of  volume  fails,  and  the  circulation 
remains  in  a  dangerously  depleted  condition.  The  heart 
attempts  to  keep  the  blood  pressure  at  an  adequate  level 
by  an  increase  in  its  rate,  but  it  is  in  effect  attempting  to 
circulate  a  small  volume  of  fluid  in  a  vascular  system  which 
has  become  too  big  for  it.  Imperfect  oxygenation  of  the 
medullary  and  cerebral  centres  with  exhaustion  of  the 
heart  results,  and  this  is  accompanied  by  all  the  symptoms 
of  anaemia  which  have  been  already  described. 

If  the  initial  haemorrhage  be  very  rapid,  death  may  result 


24  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

almost  at  once,  since  the  physiological  processes  may  have 
no  time  to  act.  On  the  other  hand,  a  rapid  haemorrhage 
may  under  certain  circumstances  save  the  patient's  life, 
for  the  immediate  syncope  which  results  produces  so  great 
a  fall  in  the  blood  pressure  that  haemorrhage  almost  ceases 
and  a  clot  may  form  in  the  lumen  of  the  divided  vessel. 
If  the  haemorrhage  be  more  gradual,  the  physiological  com- 
pensation may  at  first  be  adequate  to  maintain  the  blood 
volume,  but  finally  a  point  is  reached  at  which  this  process 
fails  and  the  patient  then  passes  into  the  condition  of  acute 
anaemia. 

The  actual  amount  of  blood  therefore  that  must  be  lost 
to  be  fatal  will  vary  according  to  circumstances.  Experi- 
ence shows  that  haemorrhage  may  take  place  into  the  peri- 
toneal or  pleural  cavities  to  the  extent  of  two  litres  or  even 
more,  and  it  may  be  stated  as  a  rough  guess  that  2-5  litres, 
that  is  to  say,  even  as  much  as  almost  half  the  total  blood 
volume,  may  be  lost  without  immediate  death  resulting. 
This  degree  of  depletion  could  not,  however,  be  endured 
for  long.  A  series  of  clinical  observations  made  by  Keith 
by  the  vital-red  method  upon  the  blood  volume  in  soldiers 
suffering  from  the  combined  effects  of  haemorrhage  and 
wound  shock  showed  that  in  the  most  serious  cases  the 
volume  was  below  65  per  cent,  of  the  normal,  frequently 
even  between  50  and  60  per  cent.  Serious  symptoms 
followed  a  reduction  to  between  65  and  75  per  cent.  In 
patients  without  distressing  symptoms  the  volume  was 
never  below  75  per  cent,  of  the  normal.  There  is  direct 
evidence,  therefore,  that  those  patients  who  are  most  in 
need  of  treatment,  such  as  a  transfusion  of  blood,  will 
probably  have  lost  from  25  to  50  per  cent,  of  their  blood 
volume,  that  is  to  say,  1-5  to  3  litres  in  amount,  and  will 
need  from  750  cc.  to  1-5  litres  to  restore  them  to,  or  near  to, 
the  75  per  cent,  level  at  which  the  compensatory  processes 
can  begin  to  regain  their  power. 

It  is  thus  possible  to  arrive  at  a  theoretical  basis  on  which 
an  idea  can  be  formed  of  the  amount  of  blood  that  should 


r 


HAEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  25 


be  given  in  acute  anaemia.  Practical  experience  is  in  agree- 
ment with  the  theory,  and  it  will  now  be  easier  to  under- 
stand how  it  is  that  in  treating  acute  anaemia  no  attempt 
need  be  made  to  replace  the  whole  amount  of  blood  that 
has  been  lost,  or  indeed  anything  approaching  it.  In  an 
extreme  case  2  to  3  litres  of  blood  will  have  been  lost  and 
1  litre  or  more  will  be  needed  to  restore  the  blood  volume 
to  approximately  75  per  cent,  of  the  normal.  A  case  of 
this  sort,  however,  is  fortunately  not  often  to  be  met. 
One  has  already  been  described  on  page  21  ;  this  patient 
received  altogether  nearly  1,600  cc.  of  blood  in  two  trans- 
fusions, and  1,000  cc.  of  normal  saline  were  given  in 
addition. 

In  most  cases  of  severe  haemorrhage  the  patient  has 
probably  not  lost  more  than  1,400  to  1,800  cc.  of  blood, 
and  600  to  800  cc.  will  be  enough  to  restore  the  balance  of 
the  circulation.  This  is  in  practice  the  amoim^t  of  blood 
that  is  commonly  administered,  and  it  is  well  within  the 
limits  of  what  a  single  blood  donor  can  afford  to  lose.  If 
a  more  definite  standard  be  required,  it  may  be  laid  down 
that  in  a  single  transfusion  for  acute  anaemia  750  cc.  of 
blood  should  be  given.  If,  in  an  exceptional  case,  more 
than  this  is  needed,  a  second  transfusion  should  be  per- 
formed with  a  similar  amount  taken  from  another  donor. 
Sometimes  it  may  happen  that  a  patient  already  in 
exti^emis  from  loss  of  blood,  needs  a  severe  operation  ;  in 
such  a  case  a  second  transfusion  may  be  given  with  great 
advantage  at  the  conclusion  of  the  operation.  The  first 
transfusion  will  restore  the  patient  sufficiently  to  render 
the  performance  of  an  operation  possible  ;  the  second  will 
combat  the  additional  shock  and  haemorrhage  which  it  has 
caused.  ^ 

It  has  already  been  stated  that  it  was  uncommon  during 
the  war  to  meet  with  patients  who  were  suffering  from 
anaemia  uncomplicated  by  traumatic  shock.  It  was  in 
fact  the  condition  of  shock  which  tended  to  dominate  the 
clinical  picture,  and  it  was  towards  the  elucidation  of  the 


26  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

facts  concerning  shock,  its  causation,  prevention,  and 
treatment,  that  the  investigations  co-ordinated  by  the 
Medical  Research  Committee  were  mainly  directed.  These 
investigations  were  carried  out  both  in  the  laboratory  and 
in  the  military  hospitals,  and  considerable  additions  were 
made  to  the  knowledge  of  the  condition.  It  is  necessary 
to  give  some  account  of  the  conclusions  which  were  reached 
in  order  that  the  role  of  blood  transfusion  in  the  treatment 
of  shock  may  be  fully  understood. 

Haemorrhage  and  shock  cannot  be  dissociated,  and  this 
is  not  only  because  they  so  frequently  occur  together  in 
the  same  patient,  but  also  because  the  manifestations  of 
the  two  conditions  are  essentially  the  same.  In  shock,  as 
in  haemorrhage,  are  found  the  same  pallor  of  the  face  and 
mucous  membranes,  the  same  fall  of  blood  pressure  and 
rapid  pulse,  the  same  perspiration,  restlessness,  and  shallow 
respiration.  The  symptoms  following  a  severe  haemorrhage 
have  sometimes  been  referred  to  as  constituting  a  "  shock- 
like condition."  As  will  be  seen,  however,  it  is  more 
accurate  to  describe  the  symptoms  of  shock  as  closely 
resembling  those  of  haemorrhage,  and  to  regard  both 
conditions  as  a  manifestation  of  deficient  fluid  content  in 
the  circulation. 

Numerous  theories  have  been  advanced  to  account  for 
the  symptoms  seen  in  shock.  Until  recent  years  it  was 
customary  to  suppose  the  vaso-motor  centres  had  failed, 
being  overcome  by  exhaustion  consequent  upon  excessive 
stimulation  by  a  greatly  increased  number  of  afferent 
impulses  from  the  periphery  of  the  body.  It  was  suggested 
that  as  a  result  there  was  a  general  dilatation  of  the  vas- 
cular system,  especially  in  the  abdominal  veins,  and  there- 
fore a  general  impairment  of  the  circulation.  Various 
hypotheses  were,  in  addition,  formulated,  to  account  for 
the  vaso-motor  failure.  These  included  the  ideas  of 
deficient  carbon  dioxide  in  the  blood,  exhaustion  of  the 
adrenal  secretion,  and  exhaustion  of  nerve-cells  in  the 
higher  centres.     All  these  theories  found  their  supporters 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  27 

and  much  experimental  evidence  was  brought  forward, 
but  none  was  susceptible  of  final  proof.  The  whole  theory 
of  vaso-dilatation  and  the  idea  that  the  patient  "  bleeds 
into  his  own  abdominal  veins  "  were  eventually  disposed 
of  by  observation  of  the  clinical  facts.  Many  extensive 
abdominal  operations  have  been  performed  upon  shocked 
patients,  but  the  accumulation  of  blood  in  the  splanchnic 
area  has  never  been  demonstrated.  It  has,  on  the  other 
hand,  been  found  that  in  the  limbs  the  arteries  and 
arterioles  are  strongly  contracted.  It  is  also  by  no  means 
unusual  to  meet  with  the  condition  known  as  venospasm ; 
the  veins  are  collapsed  and  their  walls  contracted,  so  that 
it  becomes  necessary  to  use  a  considerable  positive  pressure 
before  any  fluid  can  be  induced  to  flow  into  them.  It  has, 
in  addition,  been  shown  that  the  vaso-motor  system  is  still 
active,  and  the  heart,  although  beating  rapidly,  still 
responds  to  reflex  stimulation  and  to  increase  of  intra- 
cranial tension. 

It  becomes  necessary,  therefore,  to  find  some  other  ex-  j 
planation  of  the  low  blood  pressure  which  is  the  essential 
feature  of  shock.  Of  especial  value  in  this  connexion  are 
the  investigations  by  Keith,  already  mentioned,  into  the 
changes  in  blood  volume  found  in  soldiers  suffering  from 
shock  and  haemorrhage.  In  very  few  of  these  cases  were 
the  symptoms  due  to  shock  alone,  but  usually  the  loss  of 
blood  volume  was  much  greater  than  could  be  accounted 
for  by  the  amount  of  haemorrhage  which  had  taken  place. 
Here,  therefore,  was  evidence  strongly  suggesting  that  the 
symptoms  of  shock  are  due  to  actual  loss  of  circulating 
fluid,  and  the  problem  now  resolved  itself  into  a  search 
for  this  fluid  which  has  ceased  to  be  part  of  the  effective 
blood  volume.  Enough  has  already  been  said  to  show  that 
there  is  no  evidence  that  the  larger  vessels,  whether 
arteries  or  veins,  are  acting  as  reservoirs  in  which  the  blood 
is  stagnating.  It  therefore  only  remains  to  consider 
whether  the  capillary  system  is  capable,  under  abnormal 
conditions,  of  holding  so  large  a  proportion  of  the  blood  as 


28  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

has  been  shown  by  Keith  to  have  left  the  circulation.  For 
a  discussion  of  this  problem  the  reader  may  be  referred  to 
W.  B.  Cannon's  summary  of  the  arguments  (45),  from  which 
it  becomes  clear  that  the  capillary  system  may  be  regarded 
as  a  potential  reservoir  large  enough  to  contain  the  lost 
blood  in  shock.  The  question  is,  however,  further 
complicated  by  the  fact  that  the  capillary  blood  in  shock 
differs  from  the  circulating  blood  in  containing  an  abnormal 
concentration  of  corpuscles.  Extensive  observations  made 
on  wounded  soldiers  have  shown  that  the  number  of  red 
blood  cells  may  rise  even  to  8,000,000  per  cmm.  in  the 
capillary  blood,  while  the  number  in  the  venous  blood 
remains  at  5,500,000  or  less.  This  concentration  of  the 
red  cells  is  gradual  and  progressive,  and  will  by  itself 
account  for  a  large  part  of  the  loss  of  volume,  since  normally 
the  bulk  of  the  blood  is  made  up  of  corpuscles  and  plasma 
in  approximately  equal  parts.  The  stagnation  is,  more- 
over, accentuated  by  the  increased  viscosity  of  the  blood 
resulting  from  the  concentration,  and  by  the  chilling  of 
the  surface  of  the  body,  which  is  always  a  feature  of  the 
state  of  shock.  A  vicious  circle  is  thus  established,  and 
the  symptoms  of  shock  become  severe  as  the  capillary 
stagnation  becomes  more  pronounced. 

A  second  factor  which  may  also  play  its  part  in  the  loss 
of  blood  volume  in  the  general  circulation  is  the  exudation 
of  some  of  the  plasma  into  the  surrounding  tissue  spaces. 
As  the  stagnation  increases,  oxygenation  decreases,  and  the 
walls  and  the  capillaries  become  more  permeable,  so  that 
some  fluid  is  probably  lost  in  this  way.  This  permeability 
may  also  be  accentuated  by  the  increased  hydrogen- ion 
concentration  in  the  blood,  which  often  accompanies 
shock,  but  it  seems  to  be  clear  that  this  is  a  secondary 
phenomenon  resulting  from  imperfect  oxygenation  in  the 
tissues,  and  it  will  therefore  not  be  regarded  as  one  of  the 
factors  responsible  for  shock.  Further  fluid  is  lost  by  the 
copious  perspiration  commonly  seen  in  shock.  There 
seems,  therefore,  to  be  a  conspiracy  between  a  whole  set  of 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  29 

different  factors  all  tending  to  deprive  the  patient  of  his 
circulating  fluid.  The  net  result  is  a  condition  so  closely 
resembling  haemorrhage  that  it  may  be  impossible  to 
distinguish  the  two,  this  difficulty  being  increased  by  the 
fact  that  they  so  often  occur  together. 

In  the  foregoing  account  of  the  production  of  shock  the 
fate  of  the  lost  blood  has  been  discussed,  but  nothing  has 
been  said  of  the  factors  initiating  the  capillary  stagnation. 
This  is  a  subject  which  is  of  great  interest  and  some 
obscurity,  and  is  of  evident  importance  in  considering  how 
shock  may  be  avoided.  The  present  treatise,  however,  is 
primarily  concerned  with  the  treatment  of  shock  when 
already  established,  and  it  is  therefore  not  proposed  to 
follow  out  the  other  question  in  detail.  An  injury  may  be 
followed  immediately  by  a  condition  of  "  primary  wound 
shock,"  in  which  the  patient  becomes  suddenly  pale  and 
pulseless.  This  is  a  physiological  reaction,  which  may  be 
transient,  and  it  is  to  be  distinguished  from  the  much 
more  serious  condition  of  "  secondary  wound  shock " 
which  appears  some  time  later.  It  is  this  secondary  shock 
alone  which  has  been  under  consideration  in  the  preceding 
pages.  The  chief  importance  of  the  primary  shock  lies  in 
the  fact  that  it  may  initiate  the  conditions  which  predis- 
pose to  secondary  shock,  so  that  under  certain  circum- 
stances the  one  may  become  merged  in  the  other.  These 
predisposing  conditions  are  ii^creased  evaporation  from 
the  skin,  a  general  fall  in  the  temperature  of  the  body, 
mental  anxiety,  and  the  continued  stimulation  of  the 
higher  centres  by  afferent  impulses  as  is  manifested  by 
pain.  The  condition  of  secondary  wound  shock  was 
shown  in  a  striking  degree,  during  the  earlier  years  of  the 
war,  by  the  men  suffering  from  fracture  of  the  femur.  In 
the  later  part  of  the  war  warmth  was  supplied  more 
systematically  than  before  to  the  seriously  wounded,  and 
all  fractured  femurs  were  treated  at  an  early  stage  with 
Thomas's  splints.  Two  of  the  factors  predisposing  to 
shock,  namely  cold  and  pain,  were  in  this  way  to  some 


30  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

extent  eliminated,  and  it  was  very  striking  how  much  better 
than  before  was  the  general  condition  of  the  patients  on 
arrival  at  the  hospitals. 

Nevertheless,  the  elimination  of  these  factors,  which  is 
a  simpler  matter  in  civil  life  than  it  was  under  conditions 
of  war,  will  not  avert  all  shock  in  a  large  proportion  of 
cases.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  find  some  additional 
factor  which  will  initiate  shock  in  addition  to  the  predis- 
posing causes.  It  is  thought  that  this  may  have  been 
identified  in  a  substance  of  obscure  nature  which  is  derived 
from  the  damaged  tissues  themselves,  and  which,  circulating 
in  the  blood,  is  able  directly  to  affect  the  capillary  system. 
Just  as  the  shock  following  severe  burns  is  believed  to  be 
due  to  the  circulation  of  a  toxic  substance  formed  by  the 
burning  of  the  skin  and  other  tissues,  so  the  shock  following 
severe  trauma  is  believed  to  be  of  toxic  origin,  the  toxin 
being  derived  from  damaged  tissues,  muscle  being  parti- 
cularly active  in  this  respect.  The  condition  may,  there- 
fore, be  one  of  "  traumatic  toxaemia,"  in  which  there  is  a 
general  loss  of  capillary  tone  throughout  the  body,  so  that 
"  the  blood  percolates  into  the  network  of  channels  as  into 
a  sponge."  The  circulating  blood  is  thus  rapidly  depleted, 
and  the  symptoms  of  shock  become  established.  The 
investigation  of  this  source  of  shock  was  carried  out 
chiefly  by  Dale,  Bayliss  and  Cannon  (65),  who  were 
able  to  reproduce  the  condition  of  shock  in  animals 
by  the  injection  into  their  circulation  of  a  substance 
obtained  from  damaged  muscles.  To  this  substance 
the  name  histamine  was  given.  It  would  be  a  mistake, 
however,  to  suppose  that  because  a  substance  producing 
shock  experimentally  has  been  obtained  from  muscles,  that 
therefore  this  is  the  identical  substance  which  is  responsible 
for  every  case  of  traumatic  toxsemia.  Extreme  shock  may 
be  produced  when  but  little  damage  has  been  done  to 
muscles.  Probably  damage  to  any  tissue  of  the  body  if 
extensive  enough  will  produce  a  substance  or  substances 
which  will  give  rise  to  the  symptoms,  and  it  may  be  a  long 


r 


HEMORRHAGE  AND   SHOCK  31 


time  before  these  are  isolated  and  identified.  That  the 
last  word  on  the  production  of  shock  is  still  far  from  being 
uttered  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  profound  shock  may  be 
induced  without  doing  any  appreciable  damage  to  tissue, 
namely,  by  handling  and  exposing  the  abdominal  viscera. 

It  may  be  this  traumatic  toxaemia  which  will  account  for 
many  cases  of  post-operative  shock,  but  it  has  been  shown 
that  some  anaesthetics,  such  as  chloroform  or  ether,  will  of 
themselves  greatly  accentuate  shock  initiated  by  other 
causes. 

It  has  already  been  mentioned  that  the  increased  hydro- 
gen-ion concentration  in  the  blood,  which  results  from 
imperfect  oxygenation  in  the  tissues,  is  not  itself  a  cause 
of  shock,  but  it  will  aggravate  shock  due  to  other  factors. 
A  discussion  of  this  will  be  found  in  the  paper  by  W.  B. 
Cannon  already  referred  to. 

The  present  state  of  knowledge  concerning  the  causation 
of  shock  having  been  thus  briefly  reviewed,  the  question 
of  the  treatnient  of  the  condition  may  be  discussed.  In 
this  connexion  the  value  of  blood  transfusion  will  be 
considered.  It  will  have  become  clear  that  essentially  the 
condition  to  be  combated  in  treating  shock  is  one  of 
lowered  blood  pressure  following  upon  a  diminution  of  the 
volume  of  blood  in  the  circulation.  All  the  factors  which 
have  been  mentioned  in  considering  the  causation  of  shock 
must  be  combated.  Warmth  must  be  supplied,  morphia 
administered,  fractures  efficiently  immobilized,  damaged 
tissues  excised  :  but  clearly  all  these  measures  are 
prophylactic  rather  than  curative.  None  of  them  will 
remove  a  state  of  profound  shock  once  established,  for  they 
will  not  of  themselves  restore  the  blood  volume  depleted 
by  capillary  stasis.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  attack 
this  condition  directly.  It  may  with  justice  be  compared 
to  a  state  of  acute  anaemia  following  haemorrhage,  but  with 
this  difference,  that  the  blood  is  still  present  in  the  body  and 
will  return  to  the  circulation  when  the  capillary  stasis  has 
been    abolished    and    the    circulating    balance   has    been 


a^  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

restored.     The  possibility  of  recovery  from  shock  depends 
upon  how  long  the  condition  has  existed.     After  a  certain 
time  the  toxaemia,  whether  the  primary  traumatic  toxsemia 
or  the  secondary  increase  in  hydrogen-ion  concentration, 
appears  to  have  a  damaging  effect  upon  the  capillary  walls, 
so  that  an  increased  loss  of  fluid  takes  place  into  the  tissues 
and  this  cannot  be  remedied.     It  is  essential,  therefore,  to 
use  the  means  which  will  most  rapidly  restore  the  circula- 
tion and  bring  about  a  rise  in  blood  pressure  which  will  be 
permanent.     It  is  reasonable  to  infer  that  the  most  hopeful 
means  of  bringing  this  about  is  by  a  blood  transfusion, 
which  will  actually  replace  the  blood   temporarily  lost. 
This  is  the  physiological  remedy,  and  its  value  has  been 
proved  by  the  results  obtained  in  many  cases  of  my  own  as 
well  as  in  those  recorded  by  others.     The  efficiency  of  the 
treatment  is  accentuated  by  the  fact  that  so  large  a  pro- 
portion of  cases  of  shock  are  associated  with,  and  aggra- 
vated by,  some  degree  of  haemorrhage.     Apart  from  this, 
Keith's  observations  have  shown  that  the  diminution  of 
blood  volume   in  shock  is   comparable  with  that  which 
attends  severe  haemorrhage.     The  state  of  shock  in  fact  so 
closely    resembles    haemorrhage    that    most    of   the   same 
remarks  concerning  blood  volume  and  the  amounts  that 
should  be  given  by  transfusion  may  be  applied,  and  it  is 
unnecessary  to  repeat  them  here.     It  must  be  remembered, 
however,  that  in  pure  shock  the  amount  of  haemoglobin  in 
the  body  is  not  reduced  though  there  is  less  in  the  circula- 
tion.    It  is  restored  to  the  circulation  when  the  capillary 
stagnation  is  overcome.     This  will  be  referred  to  again 
later  on. 

During  the  war  the  value  of  blood  transfusion  in  shock 
was  amply  demonstrated.  In  civilian  practice  I  have 
found  it  to  be  of  value  when  given  after  operations  such  as 
removal  of  the  rectum,  whether  by  the  perineal  or  abdomino- 
perineal route,  amputation  of  the  leg  through  the  hip  joint, 
or  removal  of  a  sarcoma  from  the  nasopharynx.  Trans- 
fusion should  be  given  towards  the  close  of  the  operation 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  33 

before  the  evidences  of  shock  have  reached  their  maximum. 
The  depletion  of  the  blood  volume  is  then  actually  remedied 
as  it  takes  place,  and  transfusion  becomes  almost  as  much 
a  prophylactic  measure  as  warmth  and  the  administration 
of  morphia. 

It  is  probable  that  the  mortality  following  very  severe 
operations  such  as  those  mentioned  above  would  be  con- 
siderably reduced  if  blood  transfusion  were  to  be  given  as 
a  routine  measure.  Reference  has  already  been  made  to 
the  bad  effect  of  the  ordinary  anaesthetics,  and  the  best 
effects  are  obtained  by  a  blood  transfusion  in  conjunction 
with  gas  and  oxygen  or  with  spinal  anaesthesia.  It  is 
necessary,  however,  to  draw  attention  to  the  fact  that  a 
blood  transfusion  if  given  to  a  patient  under  the  influence 
of  a  spinal  anaesthetic  must  not  be  performed  until  the 
operation  is  very  nearly  completed,  for  it  will  very  often 
produce  a  much  more  rapid  return  of  sensation  than  would 
otherwise  occur. 

In  advocating  the  use  of  blood  transfusion  to  combat  the 
effects  of  shock  and  haemorrhage,  it  would  be  misleading  to 
imply  that  this  is  necessarily  the  only  treatment  that  is 
available.  Something  must  be  said  of  the  substitutes  for 
blood  that  have  been  used,  and  in  particular  the  value  of 
gum  acacia  must  be  considered.  In  the  days  before  the  war 
it  was  customary  to  treat  post-operative  shock  or  haemor- 
rhage with  large  quantities  of  normal  salt  solution  given 
intravenously  or  subcutaneously.  During  the  earlier  part 
of  the  war  also  this  was  used,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt 
that  for  the  less  severe  cases  this  treatment  is  often  bene- 
ficial. Occasionally  even  the  lives  of  patients  who  were 
desperately  ill  have  been  saved  by  it ;  I  have  seen  a  saline 
infusion  cause  the  recovery  of  a  man  who  had  a  dozen 
perforations  of  the  small  intestine  and  who  had,  in  addition, 
lost  several  pints  of  blood  intraperitoneally  from  a  wound 
of  a  large  mesenteric  vessel.  Such  cases  are,  however, 
exceptional.  In  the  presence  of  severe  shock  or  haemor- 
rhage a  saline  infusion  may  cause  an  immediate  rise  in 


^4  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

blood  pressure,  but  the  fluid  exudes  so  rapidly  into  the 
tissues  that  the  effect  is  usually  very  transient.  This, 
fact  is  universally  admitted  to  be  true  and  need  not  be 
further  emphasized.  Saline  solution  administered  by  the 
rectum  is  likely  to  have  a  more  lasting  effect,  but  the 
process  of  absorption  is  slow,  and  the  patient  may  be  dead 
before  it  has  had  time  to  act.  The  same  applies  to  water 
given  by  the  mouth.  A  patient  suffering  from  severe 
shock  is  unable  to  tolerate  more  than  a  very  small  quantity 
of  fluid  in  his  stomach  without  vomiting.  Some  success 
was  attained  by  Oswald  Robertson  in  treating  cases  of 
haemorrhage  by  the  method  of  "  forced  fluids,"  large 
quantities  being  given  by  the  mouth  and  by  the  rectum  (245). 
In  many  serious  cases,  however,  this  treatment  is  inappli- 
cable, and  it  is  clear  that  transfusion  is  more  rapid  and 
more  certain  in  its  effect.  Isotonic  saline  having  been 
found  ineffectual,  it  was  suggested  that  a  hypertonic 
solution  (2  per  cent,  sodium  chloride)  might  be  of  more 
value.  This  was  tested  clinically  and  in  the  laboratory, 
and  was  found  to  have  no  advantage  over  the  isotonic 
solution  (11). 

When  the  association  of  increased  hydrogen-ion  con- 
centration with  shock  was  demonstrated,  it  was  at  first 
supposed  to  be  one  of  the  factors  producing  the  condition. 
It  was  therefore  natural  that  the  effect  of  a  solution  of 
sodium  bicarbonate  (4  per  cent.)  should  be  tried.  The 
effect  upon  certain  cases  suffering  from  extreme 
"  acidosis  "  and  air  hunger  was  very  striking,  but  in 
general  the  alkaline  solution  was  no  more  effective  than 
the  ordinary  isotonic  saline.  I  soon  abandoned  its  use 
for  intravenous  infusion,  but  it  was  of  service  in  serious 
cases  when  given  by  the  rectum. 

During  the  war  the  necessity  for  the  conservation  of 
time — and  of  blood — ^was  evident.  The  search  for  a 
satisfactory  substitute  for  blood  was  therefore  prosecuted 
with  great  energy,  most  of  the  research  being  done  by,  or 
under  the  direction  of.   Professor  W.   M.   Bayliss.     The 


r 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  35 


object  of  the  research  was  to  discover  a  non-toxic  solution 
which  possessed  the  same  "  viscosity  "  as  the  blood,  and 
the  same  osmotic  pressure  due  to  contained  colloid.  It  was 
believed  that  such  a  solution  would  not  tend  to  exude  so 
rapidly  into  the  tissues  and  would  therefore  augment  the 
blood  volume  more  effectively  than  the  fluids  previously 
used.  After  many  experiments  it  was  claimed  in  1916 
that  a  blood  substitute  had  been  found  in  a  6  per  cent, 
solution  of  gum  acacia  with  -9  per  cent,  sodium  chloride. 
It  was  even  stated  on  the  evidence  of  laboratory  experi- 
ments that  the  gum  solution  was  as  effective  as  blood  in 
the  treatment  of  shock  and  haemorrhage.  It  was  therefore 
used  very  extensively  among  the  wounded,  and  favourable 
reports  upon  its  value  were  made  by  various  workers.  It 
is  difficult,  however,  to  control  the  results  in  giving  treat- 
ment of  this  kind.  If  a  patient  dies  after  being  given  a 
gum  infusion,  no  one  can  state  definitely  that  he  would 
have  lived  had  he  been  given  a  blood  transfusion  instead. 
If  a  patient  lived  after  having  a  blood  transfusion,  it  would 
be  equally  rash  to  state  that  he  would  have  died  had  he 
been  given  gum.  Nevertheless,  after  giving  the  gum 
solution  a  number  of  trials,  I  formed  the  opinion  that  the 
results  were  inferior  to  those  obtained  with  blood.  Patients 
did  not  recover  whom  from  previous  experience  with  blood 
transfusion  I  should  have  expected  to  do  so.  I  accordingly 
continued  to  use  blood  in  preference  to  gum  whenever  it 
was  available,  although  justice  must  be  done  to  those  who 
so  strongly  advocated  gum  by  saying  that  there  can  be  no 
doubt  that  it  is  very  much  more  effective  than  other 
solutions  previously  used.  The  same  opinion  was  formed 
by  many  other  surgeons,  although  it  was  natural  to  feel 
a  bias  in  favour  of  gum  which  could  be  given  with  much 
greater  economy  of  time  and  effort  than  blood.  Up  to 
the  present  time  I  have  seen  no  reason  for  altering  this 
opinion,  and  should  always  prefer  to  treat  haemorrhage  and 
shock  with  a  blood  transfusion  if  possible. 

Recently  the  relative  values  of  a  number  of  intravenous 


36  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

infusions  for  shock  have  been  put  to  an  extensive  experi- 
mental test  by  F.  C.  Mann.  The  shock  was  produced  by 
handling  the  abdominal  contents,  and  the  effect  on  the  blood 
pressure  of  the  various  fluids  was  mechanically  registered. 
The  conclusion  was  reached  that  far  the  best  results  were 
obtained  by  a  transfusion  of  blood  or  blood  serum,  the 
effect  of  these  being  more  permanent  than  that  of  any  other 
substance  used.  The  use  of  gum  acacia  was  found  to  give 
results  which  were  "  variable  and  sometimes  disastrous," 
but  this  may  have  been  due  to  some  extent  to  errors  in  the 
technique  of  preparing  the  solution. 

This  draws  attention  to  a  possible  objection  to  the  use 
of  gum,  namely,  that  some  samples  of  the  solution  have 
been  found  to  be  actually  toxic  ;  but  it  is  said  that  this  can 
be  avoided  if  proper  care  be  exercised  in  its  preparation. 
Full  instructions  for  this  are  given  in  a  paper  by  S.  V. 
Telfer. 

Into  the  discussion  of  the  relative  merits  of  blood  and 
gum  solutions  may  be  profitably  introduced  the  further 
question  as  to  which  is  the  more  valuable  constituent  of 
transfused  blood,  the  corpuscles  or  the  plasma.  It  has 
been  seen  that  the  essential  factor  in  producing  the 
symptoms  of  shock  and  haemorrhage  is  a  reduction  of  blood 
volume,  and  treatment  is  therefore  directed  in  the  first 
place  towards  the  restoration  of  this  volume,  with  a  fluid 
of  the  same  viscosity  and  osmotic  pressure  as  blood.  This 
might  be  done  with  plasma  or,  some  may  say,  equally  well 
with  gum.  From  the  point  of  view  only  of  volume,  the 
corpuscles  and  plasma  are  of  equal  value,  since  each  forms 
approximately  half  the  total  volume  of  a  given  quantity 
of  blood.  There  is,  however,  another  aspect  to  be  con- 
sidered. One  of  the  results  of  loss  of  blood  volume  is 
imperfect  oxygenation  in  the  tissues.  When  the  volume 
is  increased  by  the  addition  of  plasma  or  gum,  the  corpuscles 
in  the  circulation  are  diluted,  and  this  by  itself  would  tend 
further  to  impair  oxygenation.  The  dilution  is,  however, 
compensated  for  by  the  improvement  in  circulation  which 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  37 

in  its  turn  improves  the  supply  of  oxygen  to  the  tissues, 
and  it  is  still  further  counteracted  by  the  restoration  to  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  corpuscles  which  were  stagnating 
in  the  capillary  system.  It  seems  clear  that  these 
successive  processes  will  be  accelerated  by  the  use  of  a 
fluid  which  itself  contains  corpuscles,  and  this  may  afford 
a  theoretical  explanation  of  the  clinical  observation  that 
blood  is  more  effective  than  gum.  Its  use  will  tend  to 
establish  more  quickly  the  "  virtuous  circle  "  following 
increased  volume,  and  so  undo  the  "  vicious  circle  "  due 
to  insufficient  volume.  It  has  been  questioned  whether 
the  corpuscles  of  transfused  blood  really  do  play  an  active 
part  in  the  economy  of  their  new  host,  or  whether  their 
new  environment  may  not  quickly  render  them  effete. 
This  has  been  answered  by  the  exceedingly  interesting  and 
ingenious  series  of  experiments  carried  out  by  Winifred 
Ashby.  She  has  transfused  blood  of  a  known  group  (see 
Chapter  IV)  into  an  individual  of  a  different,  but  compatible 
group,  and  then  shown  that  it  is  possible  by  selective 
agglutination  with  a  suitable  serum  to  demonstrate  the 
presence  m  the  blood  of  the  two  kinds  of  corpuscles  side 
by  side.  In  this  way  she  has  shown  that  transfused  cor- 
puscles are  still  present  in  the  circulation  and  of  normal 
appearance  thirty  days  after  they  were  introduced. 

It  is  therefore  justifiable  to  make  the  inference  that 
transfused  corpuscles  can  for  some  little  time  carry  out 
their  normal  function.  If  it  be  true  that  their  presence  is 
an  advantage  in  the  treatment  of  deficient  blood  volume, 
it  may  also  be  conjectured  that  their  presence  is  likely  to 
be  of  greater  importance  in  treating  haemorrhage  than  it 
is  in  the  treatment  of  pure  shock,  for  in  the  latter  condition 
all  the  original  corpuscles  are  still  present  in  the  body, 
while  in  the  former  they  are  not. 

I  should  sum  up  the  discussion  of  the  relative  merits  of 
blood  and  gum  by  saying  that  on  the  groimds  of  experi- 
ment and  clinical  experience  I  believe  blood  to  be  the 
more  efficient  of  the  two,  particularly  in  the  most  serious 


38  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

cases.  Every  patient  who  needs  it  should  therefore  have 
the  advantages  conferred  by  blood  transfusion  if  it  can  be 
done.  If  it  cannot,  then  gum  and  saline  is  much  the  most 
satisfactory  substitute  that  is  at  present  known. 

Some  of  the  concluding  remarks  in  the  foregoing  pages 
will  have  suggested  that  the  use  of  gum  infusion  may  be 
considered  of  more  value  in  treating  pure  shock  than  in 
treating  haemorrhage.  For  this  reason,  apart  from  other 
diagnostic  considerations,  it  may  be  of  importance  to 
be  able  to  distinguish  clinically  between  shock  and 
haemorrhage.  Attention  has  already  been  drawn  to  the 
fact  that  the  symptoms  and  appearance  seen  in  a  patient 
suffering  from  severe  shock  very  closely  resemble  those 
seen  in  haemorrhage.  It  may,  in  fact,  be  impossible  to 
say  from  purely  clinical  evidence  whether  a  patient  is 
suffering  from  shock,  or  haemorrhage,  or  both.  A  case 
which  recently  came  under  my  own  observation  well 
illustrates  this  point.  A  very  stout,  elderly  man  had 
fallen  down  a  lift-shaft  and  was  brought  into  St.  Bartholo- 
mew's Hospital  soon  after  the  accident.  He  appeared 
to  have  fallen  on  his  feet,  and  the  lower  ends  of  both  tibiae 
had  been  driven  through  the  inner  sides  of  his  soles,  but 
there  were  no  other  signs  of  injury.  His  general  condition 
on  arrival  at  hospital  was  fairly  good,  but  all  the  usual 
measures  were  taken  to  minimize  shock.  An  hour  or  two 
later  he  had  passed  into  a  condition  of  extreme  collapse, 
and  exhibited  all  the  symptoms  which  have  already  been 
described.  Not  much  haemorrhage  had  taken  place  from 
the  wounds  in  his  feet,  and  the  question  arose  as  to  whether 
his  present  condition  was  due  to  internal  haemorrhage  from 
visceral  injury,  or  whether  it  was  due  chiefly  to  shock. 
His  abdomen  contained  so  much  fat  that  no  evidence  could 
be  obtained  from  an  examination  of  it,  and  it  was  in  fact 
impossible  to  arrive  at  any  conclusion.  There  could,  how- 
ever, be  no  question  of  performing  any  operation,  and  the 
patient  made  no  response  to  other  treatment.  At  the 
autopsy  it  was  found  that  there  were  fractures  of  the  ribs, 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  39 


r 

■  spinal  column,  and  symphysis  pubis  in  addition  to  the 
K  injuries  to  the  legs.  There  was  very  little  haemorrhage  in 
^P  connexion  with  any  of  the  fractures,  and  it  appeared  that 
death  was  to  be  attributed  almost  entirely  to  shock.  This 
was  perhaps  a  somewhat  unusual  case,  in  which  no  help 
could  be  derived  from  an  examination  of  the  patient,  but 
similar  difficulties  will  sometimes  be  met. 

It  might  be  expected  that  a  criterion  would  be  supplied 
by  an  examination  of  the  blood.  The  results  from  this, 
however,  have  proved  to  be  disappointing.  The  facts  have 
^k  been  investigated  by  Cannon  and  others  (47)  and  may  be 
^^  summarized  as  follows.  The  number  of  red  corpuscles  in 
the  blood  from  the  capillaries  of  the  ear  or  finger  has  been 
found  to  be  invariably  raised  in  patients  suffering  from 
shock.  A  blood  count  may  show  an  increase  up  to  seven 
million  red  cells  per  cmm.  or  even  more.  The  blood  in  the 
venous  circulation,  however,  of  the  same  patient  is  more 
dilute,  the  count  being  less  by  one  to  two  million  red  cells. 
When  the  shock  is  complicated  by  haemorrhage,  the  blood 
count  in  the  venous  system  will  again  be  lower  than  that 
in  the  capillaries,  but  in  both  the  counts  will  be  less  than  if 
there  were  no  haemorrhage.  The  differences  are,  however, 
not  so  great  or  so  constant  that  any  principle  can  be  laid 
down  by  which  the  two  conditions  may  be  distinguished. 
In  patients  in  whom  haemorrhage  is  the  outstanding  feature 
the  blood  counts  will  be  still  lower,  but  the  capillary  and 
venous  difference  will  still  be  present.  It  was  found  that 
in  haemorrhage  the  haemoglobin  percentage,  and  therefore 
the  colour  index,  tended  to  be  lower  than  in  shock,  but  this 
was  most  obvious  when  the  haemorrhage  had  been  very 
severe,  and  in  such  cases  the  diagnosis  is  usually  clear 
from  other  evidences.  The  clinical  difficulty  lies  in  the 
distinction  between  cases  of  pure  shock  and  of  shock 
complicated  by  considerable  haemorrhage.  It  seems  that 
little  help  is  to  be  derived  from  an  examination  of  the 
blood.  This  difficulty  in  diagnosis  can  only  influence 
treatment  in  the  direction  of  giving  blood  rather  than 


40  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

gum-saline,  though  the  latter  would  probably  be  effective 
for  many  of  the  cases  of  shock  if  they  could  be  distin- 
guished. 

The  effects  of  transfusion  for  haemorrhage  and  shock 
are  to  be  judged  best  by  the  clinical  results.  The  abnormal 
distribution  of  the  corpuscles  is  altered  by  the  treatment 
with  a  consequent  redistribution  in  the  circulation.  No 
constant  changes,  therefore,  in  the  blood  count  follow 
transfusion,  and  no  exact  mathematical  effect  can  be 
demonstrated.  It  has  been  shown  by  Huck  that  some- 
times the  immediate  rise  in  the  blood  count  is  greater  than 
can  be  accounted  for  by  the  amount  of  blood  given.  This 
is  often  followed  by  a  fall,  which  is  succeeded  in  its  turn  by 
a  second  rise.  These  results  are  to  be  explained  by  altera- 
tions in  the  amount  of  destruction  and  formation  of  red 
cells  going  on  in  the  body.  That  is  to  say,  they  are 
biological  rather  than  mechanical,  and  are  at  present  but 
imperfectly  understood. 

In  the  foregoing  discussion  haemorrhage  and  si  ock  have 
been  considered  in  a  general  way.  Something  i  lUst  now 
be  said  of  the  particular  conditions  for  which  transfusion 
may  be  given.  Concerning  traumatic  haemorrhage  and 
shock  there  is  little  to  be  added,  for  these  conditions  present 
the  general  features  of  the  problem  in  its  least  complicated 
form.  No  clear-cut  rule  can  be  laid  down  as  to  the  point 
at  which  transfusion  becomes  necessary.  The  blood 
pressure  is  perhaps  the  best  single  indication,  and  if  this 
has  fallen  below  80  mm.  (systolic),  then  a  transfusion  is 
certainly  indicated.  Apart  from  this,  the  patient's  general 
condition  is  the  safest  guide.  As  soon  as  it  becomes 
evident  that  his  life  is  in  danger,  a  transfusion  should  be 
given.  Better  save  a  few  lives  by  many  transfusions  than 
lose  them  by  reserving  transfusion  for  those  who  are 
actually  moribund. 

Secondary  haemorrhage  following  an  operation  is  funda- 
mentally similar  to  primary  haemorrhage,  but  may  present 
a  few  additional  points.     In  recent  years  by  far  the  largest 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK  41 

number  of  transfusions  for  secondary  haemorrhage  have 
been  given  for  bleeding  from  septic  amputation  stumps. 
In  many  cases  of  this  sort  it  is  no  easy  matter  to  stop  the 
bleeding  by  ligaturing  a  bleeding  vessel ;  sometimes  it  is 
impossible.  Nevertheless,  transfusion  should  not  be  with- 
held owing  to  a  risk  of  increased  haemorrhage  supposed  to 
follow  a  rise  in  blood  pressure.  Usually  the  patient  is 
debilitated  by  prolonged  suppuration,  and  often  his  blood 
is  deficient  in  its  power  of  coagulation.  It  has  been  found 
that  a  transfusion,  in  addition  to  replacing  some  of  the 
blood  that  has  been  lost,  tends  to  improve  the  patient's 
resistance  to  micro-organisms,  and  to  shorten  the  coagula- 
tion time  of  the  blood.  Recurrence  of  the  haemorrhage  is 
therefore  discouraged  on  the  whole,  and  in  many  cases  a 
series  of  transfusions  for  recurrent  haemorrhages  has  saved 
a  patient's  life  when  the  prognosis  had  seemed  to  be  almost 
hopeless. 

Post-operative  haemorrhage  associated  with  chronic 
jaundice  is  another  condition  which  demands  special 
consideration  ;  this  will  be  dealt  with  later  under  the 
heading  of  haemorrhagic  diseases. 

The  proper  treatment  of  severe  haemorrhage  from  a 
gastric  or  duodenal  ulcer  has  always  puzzled  physicians 
and  surgeons  alike.  It  is  probably  true  that  patients  very 
seldom  die  as  the  result  of  a  single  rapid  haemorrhage,  even 
if  severe.  There  can,  however,  be  no  doubt  that  death 
due  actually  to  acute  anaemia  may  follow  repeated  or  pro- 
longed haemorrhage.  Hitherto  treatment  has  been  con- 
ducted mainly  on  medical  lines.  Opinion  is  now,  however, 
tending  to  favour  earlier  and  more  frequent  surgical  inter- 
ference, and  this  can  be  made  a  less  dangerous  procedure 
by  giving  a  preliminary  blood  transfusion  to  improve  the 
patient's  general  condition.  When  the  patient's  life  is 
threatened  by  haemorrhage  repeated  or  prolonged,  trans- 
fusion is  undoubtedly  the  best  means  of  saving  him.  Here 
again  the  fear  of  restarting  the  haemorrhage  by  raising  the 
blood  pressure  has  acted  as  a  deterrent,  so  that  transfusion 


42  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

is  apt  to  be  withheld  until  too  late.  Nevertheless,  it  is  clear 
from  the  numerous  cases  recorded  in  the  literature  that  this 
fear  is  groundless  (130,  215,  etc.).  The  effect  of  a  transfusion 
on  the  coagulating  power  of  the  patient's  blood  more  than 
compensates  for  the  risk  attending  a  rise  in  blood  pressure. 
Now  only  is  lost  blood  replaced,  but  also  the  clot  plugging 
the  damaged  vessel  is  made  more  secure.  The  patient  is 
tided  over  the  immediate  danger  to  his  life,  and  surgical 
treatment  is  made  possible.  This  view  will  doubtless 
meet  with  much  adverse  criticism,  but  its  justice  will 
eventually  be  recognized. 

As  in  the  early  days  of  transfusion,  so  at  the  present 
time,  a  considerable  proportion  of  the  patients  that  need 
transfusion  will  be  met  with  in  the  course  of  obstetrical 
practice.  It  has  often  been  remarked  how  much  blood  can 
be  lost  by  a  woman  following  the  delivery  of  her  child 
without  any  serious  result ;  nevertheless,  many  deaths 
are  occasioned  every  year  by  post-partum  haemorrhage, 
placenta  prsevia,  and  rupture  of  an  ectopic  gestation. 
Sometimes  the  bleeding  is  so  rapid  that  there  is  no  margin 
of  time  available  for  a  transfusion  unless  all  the  facilities 
be  immediately  at  hand.  Short  of  this,  transfusion  is  the 
ideal  treatment,  and  the  problem  is  a  simple  one,  the  relief 
of  acute  anaemia  being  the  only  object  in  view.  One 
interesting  modification  of  the  procedure  has  been  recently 
recommended  by  German  writers,  namely,  the  reinfusion 
of  the  patient's  own  blood.  This  is  applicable  only  when 
the  haemorrhage  has  taken  place  into  the  peritoneal  cavity, 
and  is  therefore  limited  to  the  treatment  of  a  ruptured 
liver  or  spleen,  a  ruptured  uterus,  or  a  tubal  abortion. 
With  a  ruptured  uterus  the  sterility  of  the  blood  is  not 
assured,  and  this  condition  were  better  not  included.  For 
the  other  conditions  Lichtenstein  recommends  that  the 
blood  should  be  ladled  out  of  the  peritoneal  cavity  into 
Ringer's  solution  and  then  strained  to  remove  clots.  The 
resulting  fluid  is  infused  into  a  vein.  Judging  from  my 
own  experience  of  intraperitoneal  haemorrhage,  not  much 


HEMORRHAGE   AND   SHOCK 


43 


blood  would  actually  be  recovered  in  this  way,  since 
usually  so  much  of  it  has  clotted.  In  any  case,  the  whole 
procedure  is  to  be  looked  upon  with  suspicion  owing  to  the 
unknown  and  probably  profound  changes  that  have  taken 
place  in  partially  clotted  blood.  Eberle  records  that  in 
one  case  re  infusion  was  followed  by  haemolysis,  and  among 
twenty-one  cases  reported  by  Schweitzer  in  1921,  one  death 
was  attributed  to  the  reinfusion,  which,  as  in  Eberle's 
case,  was  followed  by  haemoglobinuria.  Transfusion  has 
also  been  used  for  the  toxaemias  of  pregnancy,  but  this  will 
be  dealt  with  under  another  heading. 


CHAPTER   III 

INDICATIONS  FOR  BLOOD  TRANSFUSION — Continued 

HEMORRHAGIC    DISEASES 

It  is  claimed  that  blood  transfusion  provides  an  efficient 
means  of  treatment  in  most  conditions  distinguished  by 
symptoms  of  spontaneous  haemorrhage  or  by  traumatic 
haemorrhage  which  cannot  be  controlled.  All  such  diseases 
have  the  common  features  that  the  coagulation  time  of 
the  blood  is  abnormally  prolonged,  and  it  may  be  supposed 
that  the  transfused  blood  supplies  some  missing  constituent, 
so  that  for  the  time  the  blood  is  enabled  to  coagulate  more 
normally.  Most  of  the  evidence  available  shows  that  the 
claims  made  for  transfusion  are  not  exaggerated. 

Jaundice. — It  is  well  known  how  exceedingly  dangerous 
an  operation  upon  a  jaundiced  patient  may  be  owing  to 
the  difficulty  of  obtaining  haemostasis.  The  coagulation 
time  of  the  patient's  blood  is  not  affected  in  a  transient 
catarrhal  jaundice,  but  in  the  chronic  condition  it  has  been 
shown  to  be  three  or  four  times  the  normal  (223).  In  these 
circumstances  it  is  found  that  a  transfusion  is  of  some 
use  in  shortening  the  coagulation  time  of  the  patient's 
blood  so  that  bleeding  ceases,  although  sometimes, 
especially  in  cases  of  jaundice  due  to  malignant  disease  in 
which  the  biliary  obstruction  has  not  been  relieved  by  the 
operation,  the  effect  is  very  transitory,  and  after  two  or 
three  days  the  patient  may  again  begin  to  bleed  (215). 
No  other  method  of  overcoming  this  has  yet  been  fomid  to 
be  more  effective  than  transfusion,  though  the  intravenous 
administration  of  calcium  compounds  is  sometimes  of  value. 

44 


HEMORRHAGIC  DISEASES  45 

Haemophilia. — Blood  transfusion  is  of  still  greater  value 
when  the  coagulation  time  of  the  blood  is  prolonged  owing 
to  a  congenital  deficiency,  as  in  haemophilia.  It  is  un- 
necessary to  discuss  here  in  detail  the  precise  nature  of  the 
deficiency.  No  definite  conclusion  has  yet  been  reached, 
though  it  seems  to  be  clear  that  the  abnormality  resides  in 
the  organic  clotting  complex,  and  not  in  the  calcium  content 
of  the  blood.  Treatment,  therefore,  will  aim  at  supplying 
the  deficient  substance,  so  that  the  coagulation  time  may 
be  reduced  to  normal,  whereupon  the  bleeding  will  cease. 
Various  methods  of  bringing  this  about  have  been  used. 
Horse  serum  or  whole  blood  injected  subcutaneously  has 
often  been  found  effective  and  sometimes  even  when  used 
merely  as  a  local  application.  Not  infrequently,  however, 
horse  serum  fails  of  its  effect,  so  that  no  reliance  can  be 
placed  upon  it.  Even  when  effective,  the  alteration  in 
coagulation  time  is  transitory,  a  fact  which  introduces  an 
obvious  objection  to  its  use,  for  if  the  occasion  should  arise, 
as  it  easily  may,  for  a  repetition  of  the  treatment,  the 
patient  may  be  exposed  to  the  risk  of  severe  anaphylactic 
shock. 

Another  form  of  treatment  has  been  introduced  by 
H.  W.  C.  Vines,  in  which  a  slight  anaphylactic  shock  is 
deliberately  induced,  the  result  of  this  being  a  fall  in  the 
coagulation  time  of  the  blood  to  normal.  The  mechanism 
of  this  change  is  at  present  unexplained.  Again,  the  effect 
is  transitory,  but  for  a  certain  period  afterwards  a  surgical 
operation  may  be  safely  performed  upon  a  haemophilic 
patient  treated  in  this  way.  This  method  has  not  yet 
been  extensively  tested,  and  in  any  case  it  cannot  be  used 
in  an  emergency,  for  the  patient  must  be  sensitized  by  a 
preliminary  injection  and  an  interval  of  several  days  allowed 
to  elapse  before  the  anaphylaxis  can  be  produced. 

The  efficiency  of  blood  transfusion  in  the  treatment  of 
haemophilia  has  been  very  often  demonstrated,  and  seems 
at  present  to  afford  the  most  certain  means  that  we  possess 
of  arresting  the  symptoms.     Presumably  the  transfused 


46  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

blood  supplies  directly  the  deficient  factor  in  the  coagula- 
tion complex,  and  it  has  been  shown  by  Bernheim  (1917) 
that  the  transfusion  even  of  quite  a  small  amount  of  blood 
will  almost  immediately  stop  the  bleeding.  In  addition 
to  comparative  certainty  and  rapidity  in  action,  transfusion 
has  the  advantage  that  it  will  replace  the  blood  which  has 
been  lost,  for  often  the  patient  has  reached  a  stage  at  which 
he  is  in  danger  of  his  life  from  actual  anaemia.  This 
treatment,  therefore,  will  always  be  useful  in  an  emergency, 
whether  the  patient  be  bleeding  to  death  from  a  slight 
wound,  or  whether  he  be  suffering  from  acute  appendicitis 
and  so  is  in  need  of  an  immediate  operation.  If  trans- 
fusion does  not  at  once  stop  the  bleeding,  the  treatment 
can  be  repeated,  so  that  the  patient  should  not  be  allowed 
to  die  from  loss  of  blood.  In  most  cases  the  bleeding  will 
eventually  stop  if  the  patient's  life  can  be  prolonged. 
Even  if  the  treatment  be  immediately  successful,  the  trans- 
fused blood  necessarily  contains  only  a  limited  quantity 
of  the  substance  necessary  for  the  coagulation  complex, 
and  this  gradually  disappears.  Again,  therefore,  the  effect 
is  transitory,  so  that  transfusion  is  in  no  sense  curative. 
It  has  been  noticed  that  the  tendency  of  a  haemophilic  to 
bleed  decreases  as  age  advances,  and  it  has  been  suggested 
by  Ottenberg  and  Libmann  that  small  quantities  of  blood 
should  be  injected  into  his  veins  at  regular  intervals  of  one 
to  three  months.  It  is  possible  that  in  this  way  he  might 
be  brought  safely  through  the  more  perilous  years  of  his 
life. 

The  proof  of  the  effect  of  transfusion  upon  the  coagula- 
tion time  of  the  blood  rests  upon  the  evidence  of  a  number 
of  independent  observers.  Pemberton  has  recorded  a  case 
of  a  haemophilic  whose  coagulation  time  before  transfusion 
was  estimated  to  be  23  minutes.  Blood  was  given  to  the 
amount  of  500  cc,  and  5  minutes  later  the  coagulation 
time  was  3  minutes.  Twelve  hours  later  it  was  8  minutes, 
and  on  the  fourth  day  after  transfusion  it  had  risen  again 
to  20  minutes. 


HEMORRHAGIC  DISEASES 

Other  observations  have  been  made  as  follows 


47 


Coagulation  time. 

Minutes. 

Bulger 

Before  transfusion 
1  day  after  transfusion 
8  days     „ 

25     „        „ 

82 

10 

8 

40 

Minot  &  Lee 

Before  transfusion 

After 

3  days  after  transfusion 

150 

normal 

60 

100 

Addis    . 

Before  transfusion 
After              „ 
25  days  after  transfusion 
After  8  cc.  serum  injected 

245 
24 

200 
38 

In  treating  jaundice  or  haemophilia  the  transfusion  may 
be  performed  by  the  method  of  choice  described  in  Chapter 
VII  of  the  present  work.  The  addition  of  an  anticoagulant 
to  the  blood  does  not  render  it  any  less  efficient  as  a  haemo- 
static agent.  In  all  cases  the  coagulation  time  of  the 
patient's  blood  is  found  to  be  reduced  after  transfusion, 
whether  sodium  citrate  be  used  as  an  anticoagulant  or 
not.  The  explanation  of  this  may  be  found  in  the  fact 
referred  to  on  p.  120,  that  the  citrate  is  very  rapidly 
destroyed  in  the  circulation,  and  so  cannot  for  long 
influence  adversely  the  haemostatic  properties  of  normal 
blood. 

The  seeming  paradox  of  using  an  anticoagulant  in  an 
endeavour  to  promote  the  coagulation  of  the  blood  is 
heightened  by  the  work  of  Ottenberg,  who  has  shown  that 
the  coagulation  time  may  be  reduced  by  the  intravenous 
injection  of  sodium  citrate  alone.  In  this  experiment  20 
cc.  of  a  3  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  citrate  were  injected 
into  a  haemophilic,  whose  coagulation  time  had  been  found 
to  be  85  minutes.  Ten  minutes  after  the  injection  it  was 
found  to  be  25  minutes.     Two  days  later  it  had  risen  again 


48  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

to  85  minutes.  This  observation  has  not  been  confirmed^ 
but,  if  it  be  true,  citrated  blood  is  likely  to  be  actually 
more  efficient  in  the  treatment  of  hsemophilia  than  un- 
treated blood. 

The  amount  of  blood  to  be  transfused  in  hsemophilia 
will  vary  with  the  age  of  the  patient  and  according  to 
whether  he  is  suffering  from  acute  anaemia  or  not.  If 
haemostatic  effects  only  are  wanted,  100  cc.  of  blood  will 
be  enough.  If  anaemia  is  also  present,  the  dosage  will 
be  governed  by  the  same  considerations  as  have  already 
been  discussed  in  the  section  on  the  treatment  of 
haemorrhage. 

Melaena  Neonatorum.  —  Another  haemorrhagic  con- 
dition in  which  blood  transfusion  is  of  the  very  greatest 
value  is  that  known  as  melcena  neonatorum.  Severe 
haemorrhage  takes  place  from  the  bowel  of  an  infant, 
sometimes  only  a  few  hours  after  birth.  The  cause  is 
quite  unknown,  but  it  is  found  that  absolute  haemostasis 
is  usually  brought  about  by  blood  transfusion.  Horse 
serum  has  often  been  successfully  used  as  in  treating 
haemophilia,  but  blood  transfusion  again  has  the  additional 
merit  that  the  blood  which  has  been  lost  is  thereby  re- 
placed. A  single  transfusion  is  usually  enough,  as  the 
haemorrhage  does  not  tend  to  recur  when  once  it  has  been 
stopped.  For  a  newly  born  infant,  even  if  in  extremis, 
only  a  small  quantity  of  blood  is  needed,  so  that  a  trans- 
fusion of  50  to  100  cc.  is  usually  found  to  be  enough. 
Bruce  Robertson  suggests  that,  as  a  good  working  rule, 
the  amount  should  not  exceed  15  ccm.  per  pound  of  body 
weight.  The  superficial  veins  of  an  infant  are  exceedingly 
small,  so  that  the  introduction  even  of  a  fine  needle  into 
the  median  basilic  may  be  matter  of  the  greatest  difficulty. 
The  best  method  of  transfusing  an  infant,  therefore, 
demands  special  consideration.  A  description  of  this  will 
be  found  on  p.  134  of  the  present  work. 

The  value  of  transfusion  for  melcena  neonatorum  has  not 
been  very  generally  recognized,  but  a  number  of  striking 


H-^MORRHAGIC  DISEASES  49 

cases  have  been  reported.  Defibrinated  blood  had  been 
used  in  1873  by  Sir  Thomas  Smith  as  described  in  Chapter 
I,  but  the  first  case  in  which  whole  blood  was  used  was 
published  by  Lambert  in  1908.  Later,  in  1910,  Welch, 
and  then  Schloss,  recommended  the  subcutaneous  injection 
of  serum  or  of  blood,  but  these  measures  were  clearly  not 
so  effective  as  the  intravenous  transfusion  of  blood,  as 
has  been  testified  by  numerous  observers  (Lespinasse, 
Unger,  Vincent,  Graham,  Bruce  Robertson,  Lapage, 
Hutchinson,  etc.).  The  patients  may  be  actually  mori- 
bund, for  a  new-born  infant  can  only  afford  to  lose  a 
relatively  small  amount  of  blood,  but  even  then  transfusion 
is  often  successful.  Bruce  Robertson  reports  that  of  a 
series  of  forty  cases  of  hsemorrhagic  disease  of  the  new- 
born which  were  treated  by  transfusion,  all  recovere'd 
except  four  ;  of  these  two  died  from  associated  umbilical 
sepsis,  one  from  intracranial  haemorrhage,  and  the  fourth 
had  already  ceased  breathing  when  the  treatment  was 
begun. 

It  has  sometimes  been  stated  that  for  transfusing  an 
infant  either  parent  can  be  safely  used  as  blood  donor,  on 
the  assumption  that  the  serum  reactions  are  not  yet 
developed.  This  may  sometimes  be  true,  but  the  fallacies 
and  possible  dangers  of  this  are  explained  in  a  later  chapter. 

A  case  was  recently  reported  by  R.  D.  Laurie,  who, 
knowing  that  he  himself  belonged  to  Group  IV,  drew  20 
ccm.  of  his  own  blood  into  a  syringe  containing  five  grains 
of  sodium  citrate  in  solution.  This  he  injected  into  a 
vein  in  the  infant's  arm  ;  the  small  size  of  the  vein  he  had 
chosen  made  this  difficult,  but  the  treatment  resulted  in 
the  rapid  recovery  of  the  patient. 

Purpura. — Of  all  the  forms  of  haemorrhagic  diseases,  the 
two  already  described,  haemophilia  and  melaena  neonatorum, 
are  the  only  ones  for  which  blood  transfusion  is  a  really 
effective  remedy.  It  is  probable  that  under  the  somewhat 
general  term  "  purpura  haemorrhagica "  are  grouped 
several  conditions,  all  of  very  obscure  origin,  none  of 
4 


50  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

which  are  conspicuously  benefited  by  transfusion.  Many 
transfusions  have  been  given  for  purpuric  symptoms, 
chiefly  in  America.  Several  cases  are  reported  by  Bern- 
heim,  and  twelve  transfusions  were  given  to  seven  patients 
by  Peterson.  In  some  of  these  the  treatment  produced  a 
temporary  improvement,  but  usually  they  relapsed  after 
an  interval  of  a  few  months.  One  of  Bernheim's  patients 
appears  to  have  owed  his  life  for  the  time  being  to  a 
transfusion,  but  he  died  subsequently  during  a  recurrence. 
Two  cases  are  reported  by  Graham.  One  was  not  bene- 
fited at  all  ;  the  other  improved  for  a  time,  but  afterwards 
relapsed.  In  a  serious  case,  therefore,  transfusion  may 
be  worth  trying  ;  it  has  indeed  been  stated  by  Ottenberg 
and  Libmann,  observers  with  a  wide  experience  of  trans- 
fusion, that  this  treatment  is  "  definitely  curative  "  in 
severe  cases  of  purpura.  At  the  present  time  there  is 
little  to  add  on  the  subject,  but  it  is  possible  that  further 
advances  will  be  made  by  proceeding  on  these  lines. 

Blood  Diseases 

Pernicious  Anaemia. — Blood  transfusion  has  been 
advocated  for  several  conditions  characterized  by  altera- 
tions in  the  cells  of  the  patient's  blood.  It  has  been  used 
in  the  treatment  of  aplastic  anaemia,  splenic  anaemia, 
chlorosis,  and  leukaemia,  but  in  none  of  these  diseases  has 
it  been  of  much  avail.  In  pernicious  anaemia,  however, 
transfusion  has  proved  to  be  of  very  great  service. 

It  is,  indeed,  now  a  recognized  form  of  treatment  for 
this  disease,  though  the  numerous  reports  upon  results 
that  have  been  published  have  not  pronounced  unanimously 
in  its  favour.  Variability  in  results  probably  depends  to 
some  extent  upon  the  difficulty  of  distinguishing  true 
pernicious  anaemia  from  some  forms  of  secondary  anaemia. 
It  is  hardly  to  be  expected  that  much  benefit  w^ould  follow 
blood  transfusion  in  the  undiagnosed  secondary  type, 
since  the  destruction  or  loss  of  corpuscles  is  continuous 


r 


BLOOD   DISEASES  51 


until  the  cause  has  been  removed.  In  true  pernicious 
anaemia,  on  the  other  hand,  there  may  be  remissions  in  the 
disease,  and  it  is  quite  clear  that  these  may  be  initiated  or 
prolonged  by  blood  transfusion.  The  largest  number  of 
consecutive  cases  that  has  been  recorded  was  treated  in 
the  Mayo  Clinic  in  the  years  1915  to  1918  (Archibald, 
Pemberton,  Hunt).  It  was  estimated  that  in  about  60 
per  cent,  of  the  patients  with  pernicious  anaemia  a  definite 
improvement  followed  transfusion.  It  is  generally  agreed 
that  the  best  results  are  seen  in  those  who  have  not  yet 
reached  the  last  stages  of  the  disease,  though  sometimes 
patients  who  are  actually  in  extremis  will  also  show  great 
improvement.  A  remarkable  instance  of  this  has  been 
reported  in  Norway  (261).  A  man,  aged  thirty-three,  was 
dyspnoeic,  semi-conscious,  and  moribmid  when  admitted  to 
hospital.  His  red  cells  numbered  850,000  per  cmm.,  and 
his  haemoglobin  percentage  was  19.  Immediate  improve- 
ment followed  the  transfusion  of  900  cc.  of  cit rated  blood, 
the  red  cells  rising  quickly  to  2,000,000  and  later  to 
3,000,000.  Twelve  days  after  admission  he  was  walking 
about.  No  case  must  therefore  be  regarded  as  hopeless, 
though  disappointments  must  be  expected. 

As  a  general  rule  blood  transfusion  should  be  given 
before  the  more  serious  secondary  manifestations  of  the 
disease  have  shown  themselves,  that  is  to  say,  some  time 
before  the  condition  has  become  dangerous  to  life.  Pro- 
bably the  disappointing  results  of  this  treatment  have 
partly  been  due  to  the  fact  that  it  has  been  regarded  as  a 
last  resort  and  has  often  been  given  at  too  late  a  stage. 
No  rule  can  be  laid  down  as  to  when  transfusion  should 
be  given,  but  common  sense  suggests  that  it  should  be  tried 
as  soon  as  it  is  evident  that  the  disease  is  progressing  in 
spite  of  other  methods  of  treatment.  One  authority 
(Anders)  even  advises  that  transfusions  should  be  given  as 
soon  as  an  assured  diagnosis  has  been  made,  but  he  weakens 
his  case  by  adding  that  other  methods  of  treatment  should 
be  used  at  the  same  time.    If  the  patient  is  already  seriously 


52  BLOOD    TRANSFUSION 

ill  when  first  seen,  the  blood  transfusion  should  be  tried 
at  once,  as  its  effect,  if  beneficial,  is  likely  to  be  more  rapid 
than  that  of  any  other  form  of  treatment. 

The  amounts  of  blood  given  in  pernicious  anaemia  have 
varied.  Massive  doses  have  occasionally  been  given  (179), 
but  the  general  opinion  seems  to  favour  smaller  amounts,  300- 
500  cc,  the  dose  being  repeated  at  intervals  of  two  or  three 
weeks.  Repeated  transfusions  have  been  an  outstanding 
feature  of  the  treatment,  and  as  many  as  thirty-five  trans- 
fusions of  500  cc.  or  more  have  been  given  to  one  patient, 
extending  over  a  period  of  thirty  months.  This  is  in  itself 
a  demonstration  of  the  fact  that  blood  transfusion  does  not 
cure  the  disease  ;  the  beneficial  effect  of  each  transfusion 
may  wear  off  in  a  short  time,  but  by  repeating  the  treat- 
ment the  patient's  life  can  be  prolonged  for  months  or 
even  years  beyond  the  time  when  it  would  otherwise  have 
ended. 

Although  the  effect  of  transfusion  is  apt  to  be  transient 
yet  it  is  certain  that  its  good  effects  are  due  not  merely  to 
the  addition  of  a  certain  number  of  healthy  corpuscles  to 
the  circulation,  but,  in  addition,  to  an  obscurer  factor. 
This  can  best  be  expressed  by  saying  that  the  transfused 
blood  appears  to  have  a  stimulating  effect  upon  the  blood- 
forming  tissues  of  the  patient,  so  that  more  red  corpuscles 
are  discharged  into  the  circulation.  One  observer  believes 
that  enumeration  of  the  reticulated  red  cells  may  be  used 
as  an  indication  of  the  haemopoietic  powers  of  the  bone 
marrow  (289).  The  reticulated  appearance  is  assumed  to 
be  characteristic  of  cells  which  have  recently  entered  the 
circulation.  The  mode  in  which  this  stimulus  acts  is  un- 
known, and  the  whole  subject  calls  for  further  investigation. 
That  this  does  take  place  is  well  illustrated  by  the  following 
details  of  three  cases  from  Dr.  Drysdale's  wards  at  St. 
Bartholomew's  Hospital.  The  transfusions  were  given  by 
Dr.  Joekes,  who  was  also  responsible  for  the  estimations 
of  the  corpuscles. 

I.  A  woman,  aged  51,  had  been  treated  for  four  years  for 


BLOOD   DISEASES 


53 


pernicious  anaemia,  and  when  admitted  to  hospital  was 
becoming  steadily  worse.  The  red  corpuscles  numbered 
1,470,000  per  cmm.,  and  her  haemoglobin  percentage  was 
32  on  October  21,  1918,  and  by  November  19  they  had 
fallen  to  750,000  and  25.  On  November  22  she  was  trans- 
fused with 
500  CC.  of 
citra  t  ed 
blood,  and  a 
blood  count 
made  imme- 
diately after- 
wards showed 
that  she  then 
had  1,410,000 
red  cells  per 
cmm.  On 
December  12 
the  number 
had  risen 
to  over 
3,000,000, 
and  on  Janu- 
ary  2  8  of 
the  following 
year  it 
was  over 
4,000,000. 
This  was  still 
maintained 
in  May,  1919, 

and  on  the  last  occasion  on  which  a  blood  count  was  made 
she  was  found  to  have  4,400,000,  with  a  haemoglobin 
percentage  of  90.  Since  then  she  has  been  lost  sight  of, 
but  would  certainly  have  returned  had  she  relapsed. 
This  case  shows  what  remarkable  results  sometimes  follow 
a   single    transfusion   and    the    progressive   improvement 


jK/d)' 


^Kid" 


3  X/O 


2X.IO 


'A^io' 


-^ 

/ 

r 

J 

^ 

V 

>  ' 

\f 

} 

\ 

S  lO 

WEEKS 


15 


20 


Fig.  3. — Pernicious  Anemia,  Case  I 


54 


BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 


which  follows  the  initial  rise.  The  diagram  shows  the 
results  more  graphically. 

II.  A  similar  result,  even  more  striking,  was  obtained  in 
a  woman  aged  42.  She  was  treated  medicinally  for  four 
months,  during  which  time  her  red  cells  steadily  decreased 

froml, 250,000 
to  429,000 
per  cmm . 
She  was  then 
transfused 
with  400  cc. 
of  blood,  and 
her  blood 
count  rose 
immediately 
to  967,000. 
The  rise  con- 
tinued steadi- 
ly, and  three 
months  later 
her  blood 
count  was 
3,690,000  per 
cmm.  Two 
very  small  ad- 
ditional trans- 
fusions were 
given  during 
this  period, 
but  to  what 
extent     these 

helped  in  the  treatment  cannot  be  estimated.  The  results 
in  this  case  also  are  represented  graphically  by  the 
diagram  above. 

III.  A  less  favourable  result  is  illustrated  by  the  follow- 
ing history  :  A  stores  assistant,  aged  47,  had  been  ill  for 
two  years,  and  was  first  treated  for  pernicious  anaemia  in 


5X/0 


^-x-io 


ay-io 


2i</0 


3  '/zx/o^ 


ii 
1 

B 

1 

1 

S: 

|/ 

1 

< ' 

1 

I 

1 

1 

^ 

- 

h^. 

5  lO 


15 


20 


25 


<30 


Fig.  4. — Pernicious  Anemia,  Case  II 


BLOOD   DISEASES 


55 


April,  1920.  He  was  medicinally  treated  with  arsenic, 
but  no  improvement  followed.  On  June  18,  1920,  his 
corpuscles  numbered  1,060,000  per  cmm.  He  was  trans- 
fused with  600  cc.  of  blood,  and  his  corpuscles  increased  at 
once  to  1,840,000  per  cmm.  A  month  later  there  had 
been  a  further  increase 
to  2,520,000,  but  this 
was  not  maintained,  and 
nine  months  afterwards 
he  was  given  a  second 
transfusion  of  500  cc.  of 
blood.  Immediately  after 
this  his  red  cells  num- 
bered 1,800,000  per  cmm. 
(April  14,  1921).  There 
was  a  further  slight  rise 
and  then  another  rapid 
fall,  so  that  on  June  4, 
1921,  he  had  only  830,000 
red  cells  per  cmm.  He 
was  then  given  a  third 
transfusion  of  700  cc. 
The  effect  of  this  was  a 
steady  rise,  and  on  June 
17  he  had  2,112,000  red 
cells  per  cmm.  A  fourth 
transfusion  of  500  cc.  was 
given  at  this  point,  and 
thereafter  the  improve- 
ment was  maintained, 
with     slight     variations, 

until,  on  August  4, 1921,  his  corpuscles  numbered  3,450,000 
per  cmm. 

In  this  case  the  effect  of  the  two  first  transfusions  was 
short-lived,  but  perseverance  with  the  treatment  brought 
him  in  the  course  of  two  months  from  an  extremely  serious 
condition  to  a  state  of  comparatively  good  health,  in  which 


5  i^lO^ 


4- Kit 


3  KIO 


ZXfcf 


I  X.IO 


1''^ 


x/o 


1. 

1    ! 

1    ^ 

^1 

/ 

A 

/ 

H 

r 

vj 

S  lO 

h/EEKS 


15 


20 


Fig.  5. — Pebnicious  Anemia,  Case  III 


56  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

he  could  again  for  a  time  go  about  his  business.  The 
diagram  illustrates  well  the  rise  which  followed  each  of  the 
later  transfusions.  He  had  again  relapsed  four  months 
later,  but,  unless  each  transfusion  had  chanced  to  coincide 
with  the  remissions  which  may  occur  spontaneously  in 
this  disease,  it  seems  clear  that  the  treatment  greatly 
relieved  him  for  a  time. 

There  is  no  objection  to  the  use  of  citrated  blood  for 
pernicious  anaemia,  so  that  the  transfusion  can  be  carried 
out  in  the  ordinary  way  described  in  Chapter  VII.  It  is 
necessary,  however,  to  utter  a  warning  as  to  the  choice 
of  a  blood  donor.  It  is  quite  clear  that  in  some  patients, 
whose  disease  has  been  diagnosed  as  pernicious  anaemia, 
there  is  an  alteration  in  the  reactions  of  the  serum.  The 
corpuscles  may  show  an  agglutination  which  conforms  to 
one  of  the  group  tests  described  in  Chapter  VI ;  never- 
theless, it  is  essential  in  addition  that  the  patient's  serum 
should  be  tested  directly  against  the  corpuscles  of  the 
proposed  donor,  even  if  he  belongs  to  Group  IV,  whose 
corpuscles  are  not  agglutinated  by  the  serum  of  any  normal 
person.  I  was  recently  asked  to  transfuse  a  patient  whose 
disease  had  been  diagnosed  as  pernicious  anaemia.  Her 
red  blood  cells  had  fallen  to  600,000  per  cmm.,  so  that  she 
was  probably  in  the  last  stages.  Her  corpuscles  were 
agglutinated  only  by  serum  of  Group  III,  so  that  she 
apparently  belonged  to  Group  II.  Only  two  donors  were 
available,  both  of  whom  belonged  to  Group  IV.  Never- 
theless, the  patient's  serum  strongly  agglutinated  the 
corpuscles  of  both  of  them,  so  that  I  considered  it  inadvis- 
able to  carry  out  the  treatment.  Similar  abnormalities 
have  been  noticed  by  others.  It  seems  to  be  a  universal 
experience  that  slight  reactions  are  more  commonly  met 
with  after  transfusion  for  pernicious  anaemia  than  when  it 
is  done  for  other  conditions,  although  these  do  not  in  any 
way  prejudice  the  results  that  are  obtained.  These 
reactions  are  possibly  to  be  explained  by  abnormalities, 
though  of  slight  degree,  in  the  patient's  serum.     In  a  case 


BLOOD   DISEASES  57 

such  as  I  have  described  the  reaction  would  probably  be 
very  severe,  if  not  fatal.  It  is  possible  also  that  a  well- 
marked  alteration  in  the  serum  reaction  is  not  characteristic 
of  the  clinical  entity  constituting  true  pernicious  anaemia, 
but  in  reality  indicates  that  there  is  another  underlying 
cause  for  the  anaemia,  such  as  an  undiagnosed  carcinoma. 
Dr.  Joekes  has  recently  (August  1921)  told  me  that  he 
believes  from  his  own  observations  that  this  is  actually 
the  case,  but  it  needs  to  be  established  by  further  investiga- 
tion. The  connexion  between  malignant  disease  and 
abnormal  serum  reactions  is  referred  to  elsewhere 
(p.  93). 

Another  possible  complication  is  introduced  into  the 
treatment  by  the  necessity  for  giving  repeated  transfusions. 
It  has  been  noticed  that  sometimes  a  serious  reaction 
follows  one  or  more  of  the  later  transfusions  of  a  series, 
even  when  the  blood  is  taken  from  the  same  donor  who  had 
been  used  before  without  ill  effects.  A  report  on  several 
such  cases  shows  that  this  form  of  reaction  cannot  be 
predicted  or  eliminated  by  the  most  careful  testing  before- 
hand for  reactions  between  the  patient's  serum  and  the 
donor's  corpuscles,  though  it  has  occasionally  been  so 
severe  as  actually  to  hasten  the  patient's  death  (34).  This 
fact  suggests  that  the  reaction  is  not  due  to  the  presence  of 
agglutinins,  but  is  rather  of  the  nature  of  an  anaphylactic 
shock,  the  patient  having  been  sensitized  by  a  trace  of 
foreign  protein  introduced  in  the  blood  on  the  earlier 
occasions.  Possibly  it  may  be  to  some  extent  avoided  by 
not  using  the  same  donor  if  another  is  available.  It  also 
emphasizes  the  necessity  for  giving  the  blood  slowly  and 
cautiously,  so  that  the  transfusion  may  be  stopped  at  the 
first  sign  of  a  reaction  in  the  patient. 

Very  large  numbers  of  transfusions  for  pernicious 
anaemia  have  been  given  in  the  past,  yet  a  reaction  of  a 
dangerous  severity  has  occurred  in  but  few  of  them.  This 
need  not,  therefore,  be  regarded  as  a  contra-indication  for 
transfusion,  but  rather  as  an  indication  for  circumspection 


58  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

in  giving  it.     Transfusion  is  clearly  a  therapeutic  measure 
of  great  value. 

Very  recently  it  has  been  claimed  by  Waag  that  excellent 
results  have  been  obtained  by  the  repeated  subcutaneous 
injection  of  small  doses  (5  cc.)  of  whole  blood.  In  an  actual 
case  which  he  reports,  nine  injections  were  given  twice 
weekly.  If  the  claim  be  substantiated  by  further  successes, 
this  method  of  treatment  may  eventually  supplant  the 
more  elaborate  process  of  actual  transfusion. 

Toxemias 
Bacterial  Infections 

Pyogenic. — The  value  of  vaccines  and  bactericidal  sera 
in  pyogenic  infections,  though  not  in  universal  favour,  is 
strongly  advocated  by  many  competent  authorities,  and 
the  transfusion  of  blood  from  an  immunized  donor  suggests 
itself  as  a  natural  corollary.  A  quantity  of  blood  taken 
from  a  vigorously  reacting  man  and  given  to  a  debilitated 
patient  should  theoretically  supply  him  with  a  large  amount 
of  the  antibodies  of  which  he  stands  in  need.  During  the 
war  it  was  found  that  transfusion  enabled  an  exsanguinated 
patient  better  to  withstand  the  attacks  of  pyogenic  and 
putrefactive  organisms  in  his  wounds,  but  this  was  probably 
due  to  the  improvement  in  the  general  circulation  which 
resulted  rather  than  to  any  bactericidal  properties  in  the 
transfused  blood.  It  is  known  that  outside  the  body 
blood  has  considerable  powers  of  inhibiting  the  growth  of 
bacteria,  but  ordinarily  it  does  not  possess  bactericidal 
properties.  It  has  been  claimed,  on  the  other  hand,  that 
the  best  criterion  of  the  degree  of  immunity  in  an 
immunized  animal  is  the  measurement  of  the  bactericidal 
power  of  its  blood.  There  is  justification  therefore  for 
attempting  to  combat  a  pyogenic  infection  by  the  trans- 
fusion of  immunized  blood. 

This  method  has  at  present  not  progressed  beyond  the 
stage  of  preliminary  trials.     I  have  attempted  it   in  one 


TOXAEMIAS  59 

case,  but  without  any  obvious  benefit.  The  patient  was 
a  middle-aged  man  suffering  from  a  chronic  staphylococcal 
septicaemia  and  a  secondary  anaemia.  He  received  a 
transfusion  of  650  cc.  of  blood  from  a  donor  who  had  himself 
just  recovered  from  a  severe  infection  with  staphylococcus 
aureus.  The  patient's  red  blood  cells  miderwent  a  tem- 
porary increase  in  number,  but  no  other  result  was 
observed.  One  series  of  nine  cases  has  been  recorded  by 
Fry,  and  in  these  the  results  leave  some  doubt  as  to  the 
efficacy  of  the  treatment.  Six  of  these  patients  were 
almost  hopelessly  ill  with  streptococcal  (five)  or  staphy- 
lococcal (one)  septicaemia,  and  only  one  of  these  responded 
to  treatment.  He  received  transfusion  from  an  ordinary 
donor  and  two  from  immunized  donors,  who  had  been  given 
five  or  six  injections  of  a  mixed  vaccine,  the  maximum  dose 
of  which  contained  120,000,000  streptococci.  Improve- 
ment definitely  followed  the  transfusions,  and  his  recovery 
was  afterwards  encouraged  by  injections  of  an  autogenous 
vaccine.  The  other  five  patients  received  similar  treat- 
ment, but  all  died.  The  remaining  three  patients  had 
chronic  suppuration,  one  following  a  streptococcal 
arthritis  of  the  knee,  but  no  septicaemia,  and  all  recovered. 
It  cannot  be  assumed  that  these  recoveries  were  due  to  the 
transfusions. 

It  is  stated  by  Waugh  that  he  transfused  nineteen  cases 
of  pyaemia  of  whom  twelve  recovered,  and  in  these  cases 
an  ordinary  donor  was  used.  No  details,  however,  are 
given,  so  that  it  is  not  possible  to  make  any  inferences  from 
this. 

Greater  success  is  claimed  by  Hooker,  who  reported  that 
in  five  cases  of  pyogenic  infection  the  results  were  distinctly 
favourable.  He  used  immunized  blood,  but  has  formed 
the  impression  that  the  transfusion  even  of  normal  blood 
is  of  value  in  septicaemia  by  correcting  the  anaemia  and 
helping  to  restore  the  normal  resistance.  He  recommends 
that  if  the  patient  has  a  good  blood  volume  and  a  high 
bacterial    content    in    the   blood,   he   should   be   bled   by 


60  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

venesection  before  transfusion.  A  striking  case  of  staphy- 
lococcal septicaemia  has  been  recorded  by  Little,  who 
believed  that  the  patient's  recovery  was  directly  due  to 
the  treatment.  Four  transfusions  were  given,  the  blood 
for  three  of  these  being  taken  from  donors  who  had  each 
received,  four  days  previously,  an  injection  of  vaccine 
made  from  the  patient's  own  infection.  Ottenberg  and 
Libmann  have  treated  ten  cases  of  pyogenic  infections  with 
transfusions.  All  the  patients  were  extremely  ill  and  six 
died.  It  is  stated  that  the  four  who  recovered  "  probably 
owe  their  lives  to  the  transfusion,"  but  obviously  it  is 
difficult  to  control  the  results.  The  same  observers  have 
used  transfusion  in  the  treatment  of  infective  endocarditis, 
but  unsuccessfully. 

Some  experimental  work  on  this  subject  has  been  carried 
out  by  Kahn.  A  bacterial  infection  was  introduced  into 
the  peritoneal  cavities  of  several  dogs.  Continuous  trans- 
fusion between  an  infected  dog  and  a  healthy  dog  was  then 
performed,  the  blood  passing  to  and  fro  between  the 
animals,  sometimes  for  over  an  hour.  It  was  found  that 
all  the  transfused  animals  fared  better  than  those  that 
were  not.  The  experiment  suggests  that  resistance  to 
infection  is  heightened  if  two  bodies  can  combat  the  in- 
fection present  in  one ;  but  continuous  transfusion  is 
scarcely  practicable  in  man. 

Diphtheria. — In  the  later  stages  of  some  acute  diseases 
due  to  a  bacterial  infection,  the  patient  falls  into  a 
condition  of  acute  toxaemia,  the  symptoms  of  which 
resemble  in  some  ways  those  of  shock.  Harding  has 
drawn  attention  to  this  condition  in  diphtheria  ;  he  has 
produced  it  experimentally  in  animals  and  has  treated  it 
by  blood  transfusion.  The  toxaemic  stage  was  found  to 
occur  on  the  fourth  to  the  eleventh  day.  It  was  charac- 
terized by  a  reduction  of  the  output  of  the  heart  with  a 
corresponding  fall  in  blood  pressure,  an  exudation  of  lymph 
into  the  tissues,  and  an  increased  specific  gravity  of  the 
blood.     In  all  these  respects  it  resembled  the  collapse  due 


TOXEMIAS 


61 


to  trauma  or  to  haemorrhage,  and  it  was  shown  by  experi- 
ment that  the  treatment  must  be  directed  towards  increas- 
ing the  amount  of  effective  fluid  in  the  circulation  and  to 
decreasing  its  viscosity.  It  was  found  that  normal  saline 
solution  failed  to  do  this  ;  gum-saline  solution  also  failed, 
and  tended  to  produce  a  pronounced  agglutination  of  the 
red  blood  cells.  Blood  transfusion,  on  the  other  hand, 
resulted  in  a  considerable  number  of  recoveries.  In  the 
aggregate  more  than  twice  as  many  animals  survived  after 
transfusion  as  survived  without  it,  the  same  amount  of 
toxin  being  given  in  each  case. 

These  experimental  findings  are  exceedingly  suggestive, 
but  the  clinical  efficacy  of  the  treatment  still  remains  to  be 
proved.  Harding  found  that  the  amount  of  blood  that 
should  be  transfused  was  one-fifth  of  the  total  blood 
volume  ;  the  following  amounts  are,  therefore,  recom- 
mended for  the  treatment  of  children  in  the  toxaemia  stage 
of  diphtheria : 


Age. 

Weight. 

Amount. 

U  years  . 
2"       „      . 
4        „      .         . 
6        „      •         . 

21  lbs. 
28    „ 
35    „ 
42    „ 

160  ccm. 
200     „ 
300     „ 
400     „ 

Pneumonia. — A  condition  of  toxaemia  similar  to  that 
seen  in  diphtheria  was  also  observed  in  some  of  the  cases 
of  pneumonia  which  complicated  the  influenza  epidemic  of 
1918-19.  In  the  United  States,  among  a  large  number  of 
cases  admitted  to  an  emergency  hospital,  a  series  of  28 
patients,  some  of  whom  were  moribund,  was  treated  by 
blood  transfusion  by  Rose  and  Hund.  The  results  were 
compared  with  those  in  21  similar  cases  which  were  not 
transfused.  The  figures  seemed  to  show  that  transfusion 
was  of  some  value.  Of  the  28  who  were  transfused,  6,  or 
22-4  per  cent.,  died,  and  the  rest  recovered  ;   of  the  21  who 


62  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

were  not  transfused,  9,  or  47-7  per  cent.,  died,  and  12 
recovered.  The  numbers  treated  are  not  large  enough  to 
afford  statistical  evidence  that  can  be  relied  upon,  but  the 
results  were  at  least  encouraging. 

Typhoid,  Measles,  Tuberculosis. — Transfusion  has 
been  tried  for  several  other  bacterial  infections  with  vary- 
ing results.  McClure  has  administered  immunized  blood 
to  a  typhoid  patient  with  a  remarkably  good  result. 
Ottenberg  and  Libmann  have  transfused  five  typhoid 
patients,  all  of  whom  were  desperately  ill ;  two  of  them 
recovered.  Transfusion  has  also  been  used  for  intestinal 
haemorrhage  in  typhoid,  but  this  is  chiefly  with  the  object 
of  combating  anaemia.  Subcutaneous  injection  of  blood 
has  been  successfully  used  by  Terrien  in  a  case  of  malignant 
measles  ;  the  donor  had  had  measles  six  months  previously. 
Freilich  has  recently  transfused  six  patients  suffering  from 
tuberculosis,  but  without  benefit.  He  is  at  present  testing 
the  use  of  blood  from  donors  who  show  a  positive  comple- 
ment fixation  test  for  the  tubercle  bacillus. 

It  is  evident  that  treatment  with  immunized  blood  is 
still  in  an  experimental  stage,  but  it  merits  further  trials, 
all  the  circumstances  of  which  should  be  carefully  recorded. 
Toxaemias  of  Pregnancy. — The  treatment  of  eclampsia 
by  blood  transfusion  was  first  employed  by  Kimpton,  who 
speaks  favourably  of  the  results  obtained.  Later  it  was 
independently  suggested  to  Blair  Bell,  who  was  the  first 
to  employ  it  in  this  country,  by  certain  investigations  into 
the  facts  of  immunology.  It  had  been  found  that  symp- 
toms resembling  those  of  eclampsia  could  be  produced  in 
mice  by  injecting  into  them  an  extract  of  placenta,  whether 
from  a  healthy  or  an  eclamptic  woman  ;  the  same  results 
were  obtained  by  injecting  fresh  serum  from  similar  in- 
dividuals. Further,  if  the  placental  extract  was  mixed 
with  serum  from  a  normal  person  of  either  sex,  the  effects 
were  not  obtained,  and  it  was  inferred  that  the  placental 
toxin  had  been  neutralized  by  antibodies  in  the  serum.  If, 
however,   the   placental   extract  was   mixed   with   serum 


TOXEMIAS  63 

obtained  from  the  blood  of  an  eclamptic  patient,  then  the 
toxic  symptoms  were  obtained  as  before.  Apparently, 
therefore,  the  serum  in  eclampsia  lacks  certain  antibodies 
which  are  present  in  the  serum  of  normal  individuals.  If 
these  observations  had  been  correctly  interpreted,  it  seemed 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  blood  from  a  normal  person 
would  supply  an  eclamptic  patient  with  the  antibodies 
which  she  lacks.  The  patient  treated  by  Blair  Bell  was 
already  comatose  and  apparently  dying.  She  was  given 
500  cc.  of  citrated  blood  and  rapidly  recovered  ;  her 
convalescence  was  uninterrupted.  It  would  be  unwise  to 
found  great  hopes  on  a  single  case,  but  the  treatment 
undoubtedly  merits  further  trial. 

Transfusion  has  also  been  used  by  Keator  in  treating  the 
toxaemia  of  early  pregnancy,  and  Morel  has  successfully 
used  the  blood  of  a  healthy  pregnant  woman  for  the  same 
purpose.  Gettler  recommends  the  use  of  alkalinized  blood 
for  "  acidosis  "  in  pregnancy.  At  present,  however,  little 
evidence  can  be  adduced  in  favour  of  this  form  of  treat- 
ment. 

Nephritis. — ^A  single  case  of  nephritis  successfully 
treated  by  blood  transfusion  has  been  recorded  by  Ramsay. 
The  patient,  a  man  aged  22,  had  been  ill  for  ten  days. 
He  was  slightly  drowsy  and  had  a  furred  tongue.  His 
systolic  blood  pressure  was  100  mm.  and  diastolic  60. 
His  urine  had  a  specific  gravity  of  1010,  and  contained 
much  albumin  and  many  granular  casts,  but  no  blood  cells. 
Vomiting  was  .incessant.  On  the  second  day  after  ad- 
mission he  passed  2  ozs.  of  urine  and  his  systolic  blood 
pressure  fell  to  90  mm.,  his  diastolic  to  40  mm.  His  low 
blood  pressure  and  the  evident  imminence  of  suppression 
of  urine  suggested  the  administration  of  blood  ;  he  was 
accordingly  given  1,140  cc.  of  fresh  blood.  His  blood 
pressure  immediately  rose  to  100  mm.  systolic,  and  50  mm. 
diastolic,  and  the  other  symptoms  abated.  He  passed 
24  ozs.  of  urine  during  the  ensuing  twenty-four  hours.  He 
was  afterwards  treated  with  alkalies,  intravenously  and 


64  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

by  the  mouth,  and  his  condition  steadily  improved.  It 
cannot  be  inferred  from  the  evidence  that  his  recovery  is 
to  be  attributed  entirely  to  the  transfusion,  but  it  appears 
to  have  been  initiated  by  this  treatment,  which  was  a 
reasonable  one  in  view  of  the  symptoms.  No  other  similar 
cases  have  as  yet  been  recorded. 

Carbon  Monoxide  Poisoning. — In  any  condition  in 
which  the  function  of  a  large  proportion  of  the  red  blood 
cells  as  oxygen  carriers  has  been  temporarily  destroyed  or 
impaired,  it  is  a  rational  procedure  to  replace  as  many  of 
them  as  possible  with  normal  red  cells.  The  evidence 
that  transfused  blood  cells  can  carry  out  their  functions  in 
their  new  host  has  been  given  on  another  page.  In  carbon 
monoxide  poisoning  the  oxyhaemoglobin  has  been  converted 
into  carboxy haemoglobin,  which  is  more  stable  than  the 
oxygen  compound,  and  therefore  useless  for  purposes  of 
respiratory  exchange.  Undoubtedly  the  ideal  treatment 
for  carbon  monoxide  poisoning  is  by  putting  the  patient  in 
a  specially  constructed  chamber  in  which  he  can  breathe 
oxygen  under  a  pressure  of  about  three  atmospheres.  By 
this  means  the  carboxyhsemoglobin  is  dissociated  and  re- 
placed by  oxy haemoglobin.  An  oxygen  chamber  is  usually 
not  available,  though  a  very  useful  substitute  may  be  tried 
in  the  shape  of  a  Haldane's  oxygen  mask.  Failing  this, 
there  is  evidence  to  show  that  a  blood  transfusion  is  an 
effective  form  of  treatment.  Nevertheless,  although 
poisoning  with  coal  gas  is  by  no  means  a  rare  event,  this 
treatment  does  not  seem  to  have  had  the  attention  it 
undoubtedly  deserves.  Transfusion  was  first  used  for 
carbon  monoxide  poisoning  by  Hiiter  in  1870,  who  was 
able  to  record  a  case  in  which  recovery  appeared  to  have 
been  due  to  the  treatment.  It  was  also  advocated  by 
Lauder  B:unton  in  1873.  After  this  date  recorded  cases 
are  few,  but  in  1916  Burmeister  put  this  form  of  treatment 
on  a  more  scientific  basis  by  direct  experiment.  Using 
rabbits  and  dogs  he  showed  that  if  the  animals  treated  with 
coal  gas  were  transfused  without  a  venesection,  75  per  cent. 


TOXEMIAS  65 

of  them  recovered.     Of  a  series  of  control  animals,  which 
were  not  transfused,  nearly  all  died. 

Most  writers  on  the  subject  have  recommended  that  as 
much  blood  be  taken  from  the  patient  by  venesection  as  is 
to  be  replaced  by  transfusion.  On  theoretical  grounds  this 
seems  to  be  sound,  though  it  is  not  supported  by  the  results 
of  Burmeister's  experiments.  Nevertheless,  in  a  recent 
series  of  seven  cases  reported  by  Bruce  Robertson,  in 
which  1,000  cc.  of  blood  were  removed  and  the  same  amount 
given  by  transfusion,  satisfactory  results  were  obtained. 
If  no  venesection  is  done,  there  is  some  risk  that  the  trans- 
fusion may  put  an  additional  load  upon  an  already  over- 
strained right  heart,  so  that  a  preliminary  venesection  is 
certainly  a  wise  precaution.  Transfusion  should  not  be 
withheld  until  the  patient  is  in  extremis ;  if  no  oxygen 
chamber  is  available,  it  should  be  given  at  once.  A  mini- 
mum amount  of  750  cc.  of  blood  should  be  taken  by  vene- 
section, and  1,000  cc.  of  blood  should  be  given.  If  the 
patient's  condition  does  not  then  show  enough  improve- 
ment, this  should  be  repeated. 

Nitrobenzol  and  Benzol  Poisoning. — Blood  trans- 
fusion for  poisoning  with  nitro-benzol  (CgHgNOg)  has  been 
recommended  by  Hindse-Nielsen,  who  records  a  case  in 
which  it  was  successfully  employed.  The  patient,  a  girl 
of  19,  had  taken  a  tablespoonful  of  the  poison  several 
hours  before,  and  her  condition  appeared  to  be  hopeless. 
She  was  deeply  cyanosed,  the  mucous  membranes  being  of 
a  dark  blue  colour.  Washing  out  the  stomach  and  inhala- 
tion of  oxygen  were  tried  without  effect.  Finally  she  was 
bled  to  the  extent  of  600  cc,  and  1,000  cc.  of  citrated  blood 
were  injected.  Her  colour  at  once  became  more  normal 
and  recovery  followed.  The  literature  does  not  contain 
records  of  any  other  cases  treated  in  this  way,  but  the 
condition  is  analogous  to  coal-gas  poisoning  referred  to  in 
the  last  paragraph,  oxyhsemoglobin  being  in  this  case 
replaced  by  methhsemoglobin,  and  its  treatment  by  trans- 
fusion has,  therefore,  a  rational  basis. 
5 


66  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

A  somewhat  similar  condition  is  seen  in  benzol  poisoning, 
though  there  is  an  additional  destruction  of  red  blood  cells. 
Three  cases  treated  by  transfusion  have  been  reported  by 
McClure.  One  patient,  whose  red  blood  cells  had  been 
reduced  to  1,460,000  per  cmm.,  was  extremely  ill,  but 
recovered  after  five  transfusions  up  to  a  total  amount  of 
1,500  cc. 

Diabetes. — Blood  transfusion  has  been  used  in  treating 
diabetes  mellitus,  but  there  is  no  evidence  to  show  that  it 
is  of  any  service.  Ottenberg  and  Libmann  transfused  four 
patients  who  were  already  in  diabetic  coma,  but  no 
improvement  resulted.  Another  patient  who  was  trans- 
fused by  Raulston  was  actually  made  worse,  as  was 
indicated  by  an  increased  output  of  sugar,  acetone,  and 
ammonia  compounds. 

Pellagra. — The  precise  aetiology  of  pellagra  being  still 
unknown,  treatment  of  the  disease  can  only  be  empirical. 
From  this  point  of  view  blood  transfusion  has  been  tried 
by  Cole,  who  began  using  it  in  1908.  The  results  in  twenty 
cases  have  been  reported,  and  are  distinctly  encouraging. 
All  the  transfused  patients  were  in  the  last  stages  of  the 
disease,  but  nevertheless  a  recovery  rate  of  60  per  cent, 
was  obtained,  the  usual  rate  being  10  to  20  per  cent.  In 
the  present  state  of  knowledge  comment  is  scarcely  possible, 
but  if  pellagra  is,  as  some  observers  have  suggested,  a 
"  deficiency  disease,"  it  may  be  supposed  that  the  trans- 
fused blood  provides  a  temporary  supply  of  the  substance 
that  is  lacking  ;  the  patient  is  thus  enabled  to  start  along 
the  road  to  recovery. 


CHAPTER   IV 

DANGERS    OF   BLOOD    TRANSFUSION 

Appreciation  of  the  dangers  attending  the  practice  of 
blood  transfusion  has  varied  greatly  at  different  times. 
In  the  seventeenth  century  a  happy  ignorance  took  no 
account  of  them  whatever.  In  the  eighteenth  century 
they  were  so  greatly  feared  that  transfusion  fell  into 
abeyance.  In  the  nineteenth  century  it  was  realized  that 
dangers  existed,  but  they  were  imperfectly  understood  ; 
when  fatalities  occurred,  a  partial  knowledge  explained 
them  away  more  easily  than  our  fuller  knowledge  can 
to-day,  so  that  transfusion  was  practised  in  spite  of  them. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  twentieth  century,  with  the  dis- 
covery of  "  blood  groups,"  it  was  thought  that  all  danger 
had  been  eliminated.  At  the  present  time  the  pendulum 
is  swinging  back  again,  and  the  problem  of  the  complete 
elimination  of  danger  is  proving  more  complex  than  it  was 
thought  to  be  a  few  years  ago. 

The  chief  dangers  of  blood  transfusion  are  two -fold — 
that  of  introducing  into  the  recipient  a  disease  carried  by 
the  donor,  and  that  due  to  the  inherent  properties  of  the 
donor's  blood  which  may  interact  in  a  serious  manner  with 
the  blood  of  the  recipient.  The  first  of  these  dangers  is 
obvious,  and  common  sense  will  suggest  what  steps  should 
be  taken  to  avoid  it.  Danger  of  communicating  disease  is 
almost  restricted  to  conditions  in  which  an  infective  agent 
is  actually  circulating  in  some  form  in  the  blood.  Inquiry 
will  usually  be  enough  to  establish  the  possible  presence 
in  the  prospective  donor's  blood  of  an  organism  such  as  the 
malaria  parasite.     Nevertheless,  a  case  has  been  recorded 

67 


68  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

by  van  Dijk,  in  which  malaria  was  transmitted  by  injecting 
into  a  patient  suffering  from  influenza  some  serum  obtained 
from  another  patient  who  was  supposed  to  be  convalescent 
from  influenza,  but  had  been  treated  for  malaria  a  few 
months  earlier.  Another  case  is  reported  by  Bernheim, 
who  transmitted  a  double  infection  of  malaria — tertian  and 
sestivo -autumnal — by  means  of  a  blood  transfusion.  Blood 
infections,  such  as  those  due  to  the  exanthemata,  may  be 
avoided  by  the  precaution  of  never  employing  a  blood  donor 
who  shows  any  signs  of  present  illness,  even  though  a 
raised  temperature  be  the  only  symptom.  In  certain  cases, 
when,  for  instance,  the  prospective  donor  may  be  suffering 
from  tuberculosis  in  some  form  or  from  gonorrhoea,  the 
organism  is  extremely  unlikely  to  be  present  in  the  blood  in 
numbers  sufficient  to  communicate  disease.  Nevertheless, 
on  general  principles,  such  donors  should  be  eliminated  if 
circumstances  permit.  The  most  subtle  form  of  infection, 
the  most  dangerous,  and  the  most  difficult  to  eliminate,  is 
syphilis.  Definite  cases  have  been  recorded  in  which 
syphilis  has  been  communicated  by  blood  transfusion.  In 
one  instance  recorded  by  Sydenstricker  and  by  Bernheim 
a  father  was  infected  by  blood  taken  from  his  son,  who 
had  refused  beforehand  to  allow  himself  to  be  tested. 
Fortunately  such  occurrences  are  rare.  Still  rarer  and  still 
more  curious  is  the  transmission  of  horse  asthma  recorded 
by  Ramirez.  In  this  instance,  in  which  the  disease  is  to 
be  regarded  as  a  form  of  anaphylaxis,  the  patient  had 
received  an  amount  of  serum  sensitive  to  horse  protein 
great  enough  to  provide  him  with  the  corresponding 
symptoms  for  some  time  afterwards. 

If  the  transfusion  is  being  done  at  leisure,  the  donor's 
blood  must  be  tested  for  a  positive  Wassermann  reaction. 
Even  this  test,  however,  has  been  known  to  fail,  and  since, 
in  an  emergency,  the  most  careful  inquiry,  aided  by  a 
desire  on  the  part  of  the  donor  to  arrive  at  the  truth,  may 
reach  an  erroneous  conclusion,  the  risk  of  infection  with 
syphilis    can    never    be    completely    eliminated.     Since 


DANGERS   OF  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION        69 

reasonable  care  can  make  the  danger  a  remote  one,  it  need 
not  hinder  the  performance  of  a  transfusion  any  more 
than  an  occasional  death  under  anaesthesia  prevents  the 
frequent  use  of  general  anaesthetics.  The  mere  existence 
of  such  a  danger  is,  however,  an  argument  in  favour  of  the 
general  use  of  the  "  professional  blood  donor,"  whose 
Wassermann  reaction,  personal  history,  and  mode  of  life 
are  well  known  to  the  practitioner  ;  the  previous  use  of  his 
blood  on  perhaps  more  than  one  occasion,  if  unattended  by 
any  ill  results,  will  give  an  added  confidence.  The  tragedy 
of  such  a  misfortune  is  so  great  that  no  precaution  which 
can  possibly  be  taken  should  be  regarded  as  absurd. 

The  second  danger  present  in  the  inherent  qualities  of 
the  donor's  blood  has  been  already  alluded  to  in  the 
historical  sketch  of  the  subject.  Before  the  existence 
of  the  "  blood  groups  "  was  realized,  a  number  of  fatalities 
due  to  an  unexplained  cause  had  occurred.  Even  after 
the  existence  of  the  groups  had  been  demonstrated,  the 
warning  that  resulted  was  apt  to  be  disregarded,  and  it 
was  not  until  still  further  fatalities  due  to  this  incompati- 
bility of  bloods  had  taken  place  that  the  very  important 
nature  of  the  discovery  came  to  be  understood.  The 
chances  are,  on  the  whole,  that  the  blood  of  any  donor 
chosen  at  random  will  not  prove  fatal  to  a  given  recipient ; 
nevertheless,  it  must  frequently  happen  that  the  transfusion 
without  being  fatal  will  be  wasted,  or  to  some  degree 
detrimental.  It  is  therefore  evident  that  the  existence  of 
blood  groups  must  be  seriously  regarded,  and  it  is  necessary 
to  enter  into  a  detailed  consideration  of  their  relations  to 
one  another  and  the  symptoms  which  they  may  produce. 
In  the  next  chapters  will  be  found  a  further  description  of 
their  physiology  and  pathology  and  of  the  methods  of  test- 
ing for  them. 

It  has  long  been  known  that  if  the  blood  of  one  species 
of  animal  is  injected  into  the  circulation  of  another  species, 
the  corpuscles  of  the  foreign  blood  are  at  once  destroyed, 
their  contained  haemoglobiu  being  set  free.     This  process 


70  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

of  haemolysis  is  under  such  circumstances  rapid  and 
complete,  and  haemoglobin  may  appear  in  the  urine  in  a 
short  time.  The  precise  nature  of  the  reaction  is  obscure 
and  need  not  be  discussed  here  in  detail.  The  present 
bearing  of  the  phenomenon  is  the  fact  that  a  similar,  or 
analogous,  reaction  may  occur  when  the  bloods  of  certain 
individuals  are  mixed  with  the  bloods  of  certain  others 
even  of  the  same  species.  It  was  the  observation  of  this 
fact  that  first  led  to  the  discovery  of  the  so-called  "  blood 
groups  "  among  human  beings,  and  so  to  the  partial 
elucidation  of  the  cause  of  the  previously  unexplained 
fatalities  following  blood  transfusion.  In  1901  Landsteiner 
had  detected  the  presence  of  hsemolysins  and  iso-haemoly- 
sins  in  blood  and  classified  three  groups  in  human  beings. 
In  1907  it  was  shown  by  Jansky  that  human  beings  may 
be  divided  into  four  groups,  the  blood  of  the  members  of 
each  group  having  a  certain  definite  relation  to  the  blood 
of  the  other  groups  as  determined  by  the  manner  of  their 
interaction.  The  work  was  repeated  and  confirmed  by 
Moss  in  1910.  The  reaction  takes  place  between  the 
serum  of  one  group  and  the  corpuscles  of  the  other  groups, 
and  is  evidenced  by  the  agglutination  or  haemolysis  of  the 
corpuscles  that  are  being  acted  upon.  In  the  course  of 
his  researches  Moss  showed  that  haemolysis,  or  the  breaking 
up  of  the  corpuscles,  is  always  preceded  by  agglutination 
or  the  clumping  together  of  the  corpuscles.  The  process 
does  not  necessat'ily  go  as  far  as  the  destruction  of  the  cor- 
puscles, but  may  be  arrested  at  the  stage  of  agglutination. 
It  may,  on  the  other  hand,  be  as  rapid  and  complete  as  if  the 
bloods  belonged  to  different  species,  and  the  appearance  of 
haemoglobin  in  the  urine  may  quickly  give  evidence  of  this. 
The  groups  have  been  arbitrarily  numbered,  and  it  is 
now  usual  to  refer  to  them  by  the  Roman  numerals  I,  II, 
III,  and  IV.  According  to  the  accepted  convention,  the 
reactions  of  these  four  groups  are  as  follows  :  ^ 

1  The  notation  used  here  is  that  initiated  by  Moss  in  1910.     This  does 
not  agree  with  the  notation  introduced  three  years  previously  by  Jansky, 


DANGERS   OF  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION        71 

The  corpuscles  of  Group  I  are  agglutinated  by  the  sera 
of  II,  III,  IV.  The  corpuscles  of  Group  II  are  agglutinated 
by  the  sera  of  III,  IV.  The  corpuscles  of  Group  III  are 
agglutinated  by  the  sera  of  II,  IV.  The  corpuscles  of 
Group  IV  are  not  agglutinated  by  any  of  the  other  groups. 

On  the  other  hand  : 

The- serum  of  Group  I  agglutinates  no  other  corpuscles. 
The  serum  of  Group  II  agglutinates  the  corpuscles  of 
Groups  I,  III.  The  sertim  of  Group  III  agglutinates  the 
corpuscles  of  Groups  I,  II.  The  serum  of  Group  IV 
agglutinates  the  corpuscles  of  Groups  I,  II,  III. 

This  may  be  represented -more  graphically  by  the  follow- 
ing table,  a  -f  indicating  agglutination,  a  —  indicating 
no  reaction  : 


Serum 

I 

n   - 

III 

IV     . 

CO 

© 

8 

I  ^ 

- 

-f 

+ 

+ 

II 

- 

- 

+ 

+ 

III  ' 

- 

+ 

- 

+ - 

IV 

- 

- 

- 

The  active  principle  in  the  serum  is  called  "  agglutinin  " 
or  "  hsemolysin,"  according  to  the  degree  of  the  reaction, 
and  the  corpuscles  are  rendered  sensitive  to  this  by  the 

the  Groups  I  and  II  of  Moss  corresponding  to  the  Groups  IV  and  III  of 
Jansky  and  vice  versa.  The  difference  has  given  rise  to  confusion  and  some 
disasters,  and  it  has  been  recently  recommended  by  an  American  Medical 
Committee  that  the  notation  of  Jansky  be  universally  adopted  on  grounds 
of  priority.  This  decision  is  no  doubt  fully  justified  in  American  practice, 
but  in  this  country  the  notation  of  Moss  has  been  so  generally  used  that  I 
have  not  attempted  to  reverse  it.  The  possible  dangers  that  may  arise 
should,  however,  be  realized. 


72  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

possession  of  an  "  iso-agglutinin  "  or  "  iso-hsemolysin." 
Sometimes  the  corpuscles  are  said  to  have  "  agglutino- 
philic  "  properties.  It  may  be  stated,  therefore,  that  the 
serum  of  Group  I  entirely  lacks  agglutinins,  whereas  the 
corpuscles  of  Group  IV  lack  iso-agglutinins.  All  these 
terms,  like  the  "  amboceptors,"  "  receptors,"  and  "  hapto- 
phores  "  of  Ehrlich,  are  used  to  conceal  ignorance  rather 
than  as  an  expression  of  knowledge,  but,  until  more  light 
has  been  shed  upon  the  nature  of  the  reactions,  ignorance 
must  be  abbreviated. 

It  is  now  clear  that  the  blood  as  a  whole  contains  two  sets 
of  reactions  which  are  independent.  These  properties 
reside  in  the  serum  and  in  the  corpuscles  respectively,  and 
the  reactions  are  complementary  between  Groups  II  and 
III,  that  is  to  say,  the  serum  of  each  group  agglutinates 
the  corpuscles  of  the  other.  It  will  be  seen  from  the  table 
that  the  serum  of  Group  I  blood  does  not  agglutinate  the 
corpuscles  of  any  of  the  other  groups,  and  conversely  the 
corpuscles  of  Group  IV  are  not  agglutinated  by  the  serum  of 
any  of  the  other  groups.  Individuals  of  Groups  I  and  IV 
have  therefore  been  named  "  universal  recipients  "  and 
"  universal  donors  "respectively.  This  implies  that  if  the 
recipient  be  found  to  belong  to  Group  I,  the  blood  of  any 
donor  may  be  transfused  into  his  veins  irrespective  of  his 
group,  and  that  if  the  donor  be  of  Group  IV,  his  blood  may 
be  used  for  transfusion  irrespective  of  the  group  of  the 
recipient.  These  statements  may  be  accepted  as  true  in 
an  emergency,  but  important  reservations  may  have  to  be 
made  under  certain  conditions. 

It  was  at  one  time  believed  that  the  group  reactions  were 
clear-cut  and  absolute  rather  than  relative.  At  the 
present  time,  however,  the  view  is  gaining  ground  that 
there  may  be  some  "  over-lapping  "  of  groups,  that  is  to 
say,  a  serum  may  contain  agglutinins  which  give  a  gross 
reaction  with  the  corpuscles  of  one  group  and  a  reaction 
with  another  group  so  slight  that  it  can  be  detected  only 
with  difficulty,  or  alternatively  the  recipient's  corpuscles 


DANGERS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION        73 

may  give  a  definite  and  limited  group  reaction,  while  his 
serum  may  cause  some  agglutination  in  the  blood  of  a 
theoretically  compatible  group.  These  properties  have 
recently  been  termed  "  major  "  and  "  minor  agglutinins  " 
by  Unger,  who  claims  that  the  possible  presence  of  minor 
agglutinins  makes  it  advisable  to  test  the  recipient's  blood 
directly  against  the  donor's  in  every  case.  The  term 
"  universal  donor  "  commonly  applied  to  Group  IV  is,  in 
fact,  misleading.  The  blood  of  Group  IV  cannot  be  used 
indiscriminately  with  complete  impunity.  The  groups  are 
determined  by  the  major  agglutinins,  and  by  these  the 
ordinary  gross  reactions  may  be  eliminated.  Everyone 
who  has  used  blood  transfusions  extensively  has  observed 
that  slight  reactions  may  occur  after  transfusion  with  a 
compatible  blood,  irrespective  of  the  methods  employed. 
Usually  these  reactions  are  slight,  and  do  not  in  any  way 
prejudice  the  benefits  conferred  by  the  transfusion,  but 
they  may  become  greatly  accentuated  in  the  later  trans- 
fusions of  a  series,  and  it  is  probable  that  minor  agglutinins 
may  be  developed  in  certain  pathological  conditions. 
Further  reference  to  these  phenomena  will  be  made  else- 
where (p.  93).  In  addition  to  this,  it  has  been  commonly 
observed  that  the  intensity  of  the  reaction  varies  greatly 
with  the  sera  of  different  individuals  of  the  same  group. 
It  has  also  been  stated  by  Stansfeld  that  the  agglutinating 
power  of  the  serum  of  an  individual  may  vary  from  time 
to  time.  As  a  rule  the  corpuscles  of  a  person  belonging 
to  Group  I  are  not  agglutinated  with  equal  rapidity 
or  intensity  by  the  sera  of  Groups  II  and  III,  but 
the  meaning  of  this  phenomenon  has  not  been  fully 
investigated. 

A  possible  source  of  trouble  will  occur  to  anyone  looking 
critically  at  the  table  of  reactions,  for  it  will  be  noticed 
that  the  serum  of  Group  IV,  the  so-called  "  universal 
donors,"  agglutinates  the  corpuscles  of  all  the  other  groups. 
How  does  it  come  about,  therefore,  that  the  blood  of  this 
group  may  be  given  indiscriminately  ?     The  answer  is  to  be 


74  BLOOD    TRANSFUSION 

found  in  the  fact  that  though  the  reaction  takes  place  as 
shown  in  the  table  outside  the  body,  nevertheless  the  serum 
of  the  transfused  blood  does  not  exert  its  agglutinating 
power  in  the  body  of  the  recipient.  Several  hypotheses 
have  been  advanced  to  account  for  this  discrepancy,  though 
no  final  explanation  has  yet  been  arrived  at.  In  the  first 
place  it  is  possible  that  the  agglutinating  power  of  the  serum 
is  rendered  ineffective  by  the  dilution  which  it  undergoes 
when  it  is  mixed  with  the  blood  of  the  recipient.  It  has 
been  shown,  however,  by  Culpepper  that  agglutination 
takes  place  outside  the  body  with  serum  diluted  up  to 
1  :  150,  a  degree  of  dilution  far  greater  than  is  ever  obtained 
in  a  transfusion  where  the  dilution  in  the  patient's  circula- 
tion is  usually  no  greater  than  1  :  7.  Secondly,  it  has  been 
suggested  that  the  transfused  plasma  meets  with  an  excess 
of  plasma  containing  protective  or  antihsemolytic  pro- 
perties. The  evidence  on  this  point  is  conflicting.  Hek- 
toen  in  1907  was  unable  to  demonstrate  any  such  property 
in  serum  or  plasma.  Brem  and  Minot  in  1916  both  claimed 
to  have  demonstrated  antihaemolytic  properties  in  serum, 
and  Minot  added  the  observation  that  its  concentration 
varies.  Karsner  in  1921  reported  that  he  had  failed  to 
demonstrate  anti-agglutinins  in  the  blood.  For  the  present, 
therefore,  the  point  must  remain  undecided.  Finally,  it  is 
possible  that  the  agglutinins  of  the  transfused  plasma, 
meeting  with  an  excess  of  agglutinable  cells,  are  all  absorbed 
without  actually  producing  any  agglutination.  Which- 
ever of  these  hypotheses  be  true,  the  fact  remains  that  the 
blood  of  Group  IV  individuals  may  be  given  without 
serious  effects  in  most  ordinary  cases  in  which  transfusion 
is  indicated. 

It  must  not  be  inferred  from  the  tabulated  reactions  that 
a  transfusion  with  the  blood  of  an  incompatible  group 
necessarily  produces  a  fatal,  or  even  a  serious,  result.  If, 
for  instance,  an  individual  of  Group  II  be  transfused  with 
blood  of  Group  III,  the  corpuscles  of  the  donor's  blood  will 
certainly  be  rendered  ineffective,  being  destroyed  either  at 


DANGERS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION         75 

once  or  in  the  course  of  a  short  time.  But  beyond  this 
wastage  of  the  transfused  blood  there  may  be  no  effects, 
as  shown  by  morbid  symptoms  in  the  recipient ;  he  will 
merely  not  be  benefited.  There  may,  on  the  other  hand, 
be  an  evident  reaction  in  the  recipient,  the  symptoms 
varying  from  slight  discomfort  to  almost  immediate  death. 
It  appears,  therefore,  that  there  is  a  gradation  of  toxicity 
between  the  bloods  of  incompatible  groups,  so  that  it  may 
be  justifiable  owing  to  extreme  urgency  in  certain  cases  to 
perform  a  transfusion  without  doing  any  preliminary  tests 
on  the  bloods  of  donor  and  recipient.  There  is  a  good 
chance  that  the  groups  will  be  compatible  ;  if,  however, 
they  be  incompatible,  there  is  still  a  good  chance  that  the 
recipient  will  be  no  worse  off  than  he  was  before  the 
transfusion. 

Even  when  the  tests  have  been  performed,  it  may  still 
happen  that  through  various  causes  a  mistake  has  arisen. 
Owing  to  the  inexperience  of  the  operator  or  to  staleness  of 
the  sera  used  in  performing  the  test,  an  incompatible  group 
may  appear  to  be  compatible.  It  is  necessary,  therefore, 
that  everyone  who  performs  a  transfusion  should  be  able 
to  recognize  the  symptoms  of  a  reaction  as  soon  as  it  begins 
to  appear,  so  that  the  transfusion  may  be  at  once  discon- 
tinued. Sometimes  the  reaction  between  incompatible 
groups  is  so  immediate  and  severe  that  death  takes  place 
almost  at  once.  I  did  not  myself  perform  any  transfusions 
until  after  the  period  when  blood-grouping  tests  had 
become  a  routine  procedure,  so  that  I  have  no  personal 
experience  of  such  unfortunate  results.  The  symptoms 
may  therefore  best  be  described  in  the  words  of  one  who 
has  several  times  witnessed  the  effects  of  an  incompatible 
blood  :  "  The  clinical  picture  of  these  reactions  is  typical. 
They  occur  early,  after  the  introduction  of  50  cc.  or  100  cc. 
of  blood  ;  the  patient  first  complains  of  tingling  pains 
shooting  over  the  body,  a  fullness  in  the  head,  an  oppressive 
feeling  about  the  precordium,  and,  later,  excruciating  pain 
localized  in  the  lumbar  region.     Slowly  but  perceptibly 


76  BLOOD    TRANSFUSION 

the  face  becomes  suffused  a  dark  red  to  a  cyanotic  hue  ; 
respirations  become  somewhat  laboured,  and  the  pulse 
rate,  at  first  slow,  sometimes  suddenly  drops  as  many  as 
from  twenty  to  thirty  beats  a  minute.  The  patient  may 
lose  consciousness  for  a  few  minutes.  In  one-half  of  our 
cases  an  urticarial  eruption,  generalized  over  the  body,  or 
limited  to  the  face,  appeared  with  these  symptoms.  Later 
the  pulse  may  become  very  rapid  and  thready  ;  the  skin 
becomes  cold  and  clammy,  and  the  patient's  condition  is 
indeed  grave.  In  from  fifteen  minutes  to  an  hour  a  chill 
occurs,  followed  by  high  fever,  a  temperature  of  103°  to 
105°,  and  the  patient  may  become  delirious.  Jaundice 
may  appear  later.  The  macroscopic  appearance  of 
hgemoglobinuria  is  almost  constant."     (Peterson.) 

In  a  fatal  case  recorded  by  other  writers  the  chief 
symptom  was  hsemoglobinuria,  which  progressively  in- 
creased until  the  functions  of  the  kidney  became  so  much 
interfered  with  by  deposits  of  haemoglobin  or  damaged 
corpuscles  that  the  patient  died  with  suppression  of  urine 
and  all  the  signs  of  uraemia  (25). 

In  other  cases  a  slighter  and  transient  hsemoglobinuria 
has  been  noticed,  showing  that  some  destruction  of  red 
cells  has  taken  place  without  producing  any  further  effects. 
This  symptom  is,  of  course,  due  to  haemolysis  following 
reactions  between  the  serum  and  corpuscles  as  explained 
above.  The  variation  in  degree  of  the  reaction  is  to  be 
partly  explained  by  the  fact  that  there  are  three  possibili- 
ties :  (1)  The  donor's  corpuscles  may  be  haemolysed  by 
the  recipient's  serum  ;  this  will  result  in  the  transient 
haemoglobinuria  and  wastage  of  the  transfused  blood  ;  (2) 
the  recipient's  corpuscles  may  be  haemolysed  by  the  donor's 
serum,  or  (3)  serum  of  each  may  haemolyse  the  other's 
corpuscles.  Either  of  the  latter  events  will  be  extremely 
serious.  As  already  mentioned,  haemolysis  is  always  pre- 
ceded by  agglutination,  and  it  seems  that  the  agglutination 
may  be  the  more  rapidly  fatal  of  the  two.  It  was  probably 
this  that  was  chiefly  responsible  for  the  suppression  of  urine 


DANGERS   OF  BLOOD  TRANSFUSION        77 

in  the  case  referred  to,  and  a  case  has  been  recorded  in 
which  it  appeared  to  be  the  only  cause  of  immediate  death 
or,  as  an  American  writer  expresses  it,  "  sudden  exitus  took 
out,  out  of  a  clear  sky,"  owing  to  the  presence  of  multiple 
emboli. 

In  addition  to  the  evidence  of  haemolysis  the  patient 
may  exhibit  the  symptoms  described  above.  Sometimes 
the  urticarial  rash  has  been  accompanied  by  vomiting  and 
headache.  This  group  of  symptoms  suggests  that  the 
condition  is  analogous  to  the  anaphylactic  shock  which 
may  follow  the  intravenous  injection  of  any  foreign  protein. 
The  symptoms  in  a  mild  degree  do  occasionally  follow  the 
transfusion  of  blood  which  has  been  shown  to  belong  to  a 
compatible  group,  and  it  had  been  foimd  to  develop  even 
to  an  alarming  extent  after  the  later  transfusions,  when  a 
series  was  being  given  for  a  condition  such  as  pernicious 
anaemia  (34).  In  such  cases,  however,  as  is  suggested  else- 
where, this  may,  perhaps,  be  regarded  as  true  anaphylactic 
shock.  The  symptoms  which  may  accompany  a  first 
transfusion  cannot  be  identical  with  this  since  true  anaphy- 
laxis must  have  been  preceded  by  sensitization  with  a 
minimal  dose  of  foreign  protein  introduced  into  the  circu- 
lation. 

It  was  formerly  thought  that  possibly  the  products  of 
haemolysis  were  themselves  toxic  and  capable  of  producing 
the  symptoms  described.  This  seems,  however,  to  have 
been  disproved  by  Bayliss,  who  has  shown  that  in  the  dog 
and  cat  the  haemolysed  blood  of  the  same  species  is,  with 
extremely  rare  exceptions,  innocuous. 

Another  possible  cause  of  similar  symptoms  is  the  sodium 
citrate  used  as  an  anticoagulant  in  one  of  the  methods 
of  transfusion  subsequently  to  be  described.  But  the 
symptoms,  if  due  to  this  cause,  will  not  be  accompanied  by 
any  signs  of  haemolysis,  are  usually  not  severe,  and  are 
always  very  transient.  This  will  be  referred  to  again 
later  on. 

The  symptoms  of  incompatibility  begin  to  be  apparent 


78  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

so  quickly  that  the  worst  results  can  be  avoided  by  the 
exercise  of  caution.  If  for  any  reason  it  has  been 
necessary  to  use  an  untested  blood  donor,  the  first  100  cc. 
of  blood  should  be  injected  very  slowly.  If  no  untoward 
symptoms  result,  the  remainder  of  the  blood  can  be 
injected  with  greater  confidence.  Little  can  be  said  as  to 
the  treatment  of  this  condition,  for  prevention  is  far  better 
than  cure.  When  the  symptoms  have  developed,  the 
damage  has  been  done,  and  cannot  be  imdone.  The  ordin- 
ary measures  for  combating  severe  collapse  may  be  used. 

A  lesser  danger  of  transfusion  is  that  of  administering 
the  blood  too  rapidly.  Sometimes  during  a  transfusion 
the  patient  complains  of  difficulty  in  breathing  and  a 
sensation  of  tightness  in  the  chest ;  this  should  always  be 
regarded  as  a  warning  that  the  blood  must  be  given  more 
slowly  or  perhaps  that  enough  has  been  given  and  that  the 
transfusion  should  be  discontinued.  Usually  the  symptom 
amounts  to  nothing  more  than  disconlfort,  and  will  dis- 
appear if  caution  be  exercised.  The  explanation  is  to  be 
found  in  the  too  rapid  filling  of  the  venous  side  of  an  im- 
paired circulation  with  overloading,  and  perhaps  temporary 
dilatation,  of  the  right  side  of  the  heart.  I  have  never  seen 
these  symptoms  occur  to  an  alarming  degree,  but  actual 
loss  of  consciousness  with  a  very  rapid  and  feeble  pulse 
has  been  recorded  by  other  writers.  Directions  as  to  the 
amount  of  blood  which  should  be  given  and  the  rate  at 
which  it  should  be  injected  so  that  these  symptoms  may 
be  avoided  will  be  found  under  the  description  of  methods 
given  in  a  later  chapter. 


CHAPTER  V 

PHYSIOLOGY   AND    PATHOLOGY    OF   BLOOD    GROUPS 

In  the  foregoing  chapter  the  reactions  between  the  blood 
groups  and  the  morbid  symptoms  which  may  follow  the 
injection  of  incompatible  blood  have  been  described.  In 
the  present  chapter  some  account  will  be  given  of  the  more 
general  physiology  and  pathology  of  the  groups. 

It  seems  to  be  clear  that  iso -agglutinins  and  iso-haemoly- 
sins,  that  is  to  say,  serum  reactions  among  the  individuals 
of  a  species,  are  to  be  found  distributed  widely  through  the 
animal  kingdom.  The  phenomenon  is,  however,  weak  in 
operation  compared  with  that  found  among  human  beings, 
and  it  is  very  much  more  difficult  to  demonstrate.  The 
facts  have  not  been  investigated  for  very  many  species  of 
animals. 

Some  of  the  earliest  attempts  to  investigate  the  distribu- 
tion of  iso -agglutinins  among  animals  were  made  by  Hek- 
toen  in  1907.  He  tested  the  blood  of  rabbits,  guinea-pigs, 
dogs,  horses,  and  cattle  ;  his  results  were  negative  in  every 
case,  but  probably  his  technique  was  imperfect  or  an  in- 
sufficient number  of  animals  was  tested.  Grouping  has 
been  found  among  goats  by  Ehrlich.  Ottenberg  and  others 
believe  that  they  have  demonstrated  the  existence  of  three 
groups  among  steers,  and  of  four  groups  among  rabbits. 
Von  Dungernhas  shown  that  there  are  four  groups  among 
dogs.  Agglutination  reactions  were  found  by  Ingebrigtsen 
and  by  Ottenberg  among  cats,  but  they  were  not  constant, 
and  it  was  not  found  possible  to  distinguish  any  grouping. 
The  same  was  found  to  be  true  of  rats.  I  have  not  been 
able  to  discover  any  record  of  research  upon  iso -agglutinins 

79 


80  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

in  birds  or  reptiles.  The  phenomenon  of  blood  groups  has 
a  possible  bearing  on  the  success  or  failure  of  experimental 
transplantations  of  tissue,  whether  healthy  or  diseased, 
from  one  animal  to  another  of  the  same  species.  From 
this  point  of  view  an  investigation  of  the  blood  reactions 
among  mice  was  carried  out  by  B.  R.  G.  Russell  in  the 
laboratories  of  the  Imperial  Cancer  Research  Fund,  but  he 
was  unable  to  find  any  sort  of  grouping.  Ingebrigtsen  has 
made  an  attempt  to  correlate  the  results  of  the  transplanta- 
tion of  arteries  in  cats  with  their  serum  reactions,  but  he 
was  unable  to  do  so.  His  results  were  equally  bad  whether 
iso-agglutinins  were  present  or  not.  Nevertheless,  it  is 
highly  probable  that  the  success  of  tissue  transplantation 
in  man  will  be  found  to  be  largely  dependent  upon  com- 
patibility of  blood  groups  in  donor  and  recipient.  The 
problem  is  one  that  cannot  easily  be  investigated  by  experi- 
ment on  animals,  among  which  natural  incompatibility  is 
evidently  much  less  well  marked  than  it  is  in  man.  A 
method  of  overcoming  this  unsuitability  is  suggested  by 
the  experiments  of  Ottenberg  and  Thalimer.  These 
observers,  as  already  mentioned,  found  that  in  cats  iso- 
agglutinins  were  present,  though  inconstant ;  on  the  other 
hand,  iso-haemolysins  were  seldom  if  ever  found  in  normal 
cats,  though  they  often  appeared  in  the  recipients  of  trans- 
fusions. Grafting  experiments  might  therefore  be  preceded 
by  transfusions  designed  to  stimulate  artificially  incom- 
patibility of  the  tissue  fluids. 

The  incompatibility  of  blood  is  essentially  a  phenomenon 
which  distinguishes  different  species  of  animals,  since  in  no 
case  can  the  blood  of  one  species  circulate  unaltered  in  the 
blood-vessels  of  another  kind  of  animal.  This  serological 
specificity  may  be  in  some  way  related  to  the  sterility  of 
one  kind  of  animal  with  another,  though  not  actually 
causing  it,  and  so  be  merely  an  incidental  phenomenon. 
It  cannot  be  in  any  sense  protective,  since  it  never  happens 
in  the  course  of  nature  that  blood  is  transferred  from  one 
animal  to  another.     In  the  same  way  it  is  difficult  to  see 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF  BLOOD   GROUPS  81 

how  there  can  be  any  biological  "  purpose  "  in  similar 
differences  between  individuals  of  the  same  species,  and, 
so  far  as  is  at  present  known,  the  possession  of  a  particular 
group  does  not  confer  upon  its  owner  any  advantage  over 
the  individuals  of  other  groups,  such  as  a  relatively  greater 
immunity  from  disease,  longevity,  or  fertility.  It  is  quite 
clear  that  there  is  no  connexion  between  incompatible 
blood  groups  and  sterility  between  individuals. 

An  investigation  of  a  possible  relation  between  blood 
groups  and  disease  has  been  begun  by  W.  Alexander  at  St. 
Andrews  University.  In  a  preliminary  communication 
concerning  the  blood  groups  found  among  fifty  patients 
suffering  from  "  malignant  disease  "  of  all  forms,  including 
leukaemia,  he  has  found  that  there  is  a  considerably  higher 
proportion  of  Groups  I  and  III  than  among  healthy  people. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  groups  are  found  in  the  normal 
proportions  among  people  suffering  from  tuberculosis, 
syphilis,  and  tetanus.  It  would,  however,  be  premature 
to  assume  that  individuals  of  Groups  I  and  III  are  more 
liable  to  suffer  from  "  malignant  disease  "  than  other 
people,  as  the  numbers  tested  are,  at  present,  too  small  for 
definite  conclusions  to  be  formulated.  Also  it  remains  to 
be  proved  that  the  presence  of  malignant  disease  does  not 
produce  an  alteration  in  the  agglutinating  reactions  by 
which  the  groups  are  determined. 

It  seems  probable  that  the  differences  between  the  groups 
have  arisen  incidentally  in  the  evolution  of  mankind, 
possibly  as  the  result  of  the  parallel  descent  of  two  or 
more  original  stocks  from  different  sources,  which  after- 
wards converged  and  mingled,  with  the  production  of 
serological  hybrids.  In  view  of  this  it  ic  of  interest  to  find 
that  some  investigation  of  the  racial  incidence  of  blood 
groups  has  already  been  carried  out.  On  the  Macedonian 
front  during  the  war  a  large  number  of  men  of  many 
different  races  were  gathered  together,  and  scientific 
advantage  of  this  opportunity  was  taken  by  L.  and  H. 
Hirschfeld.  The  blood  groups  were  determined  in 
C 


82  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

approximately  8,000  individuals,  including  French,  Eng- 
lish, Italians,  Germans,  Austrians,  Serbs,  Greeks,  Bul- 
garians, Arabs,  Turks,  Russians,  Jews,  Malagasies,  Senegal 
Negroes,  Annamese,  and  Indians.  According  to  the 
results  obtained  by  the  Hirschfelds,  the  groups  designated 
II  and  III  show  a  definite  variation  in  their  distribution 
among  different  races.  As  will  be  seen  hereafter.  Group  I 
is  compounded  of  the  two  factors  producing  Groups  II 
and  III,  while  Group  IV  results  from  their  absence.  It  is 
therefore  necessary  only  to  consider  the  incidence  of 
Groups  II  and  III  in  calculating  the  racial  differences.  For 
the  statistical  tables  and  diagrams  the  reader  must  be 
referred  to  the  original  paper  published  in  1919,  but  the 
results  may  be  roughly  summarized  as  follows.  It  was 
found  that  the  factor  producing  Group  II  is  prevalent 
among  European  peoples,  whereas  the  factor  producing 
Group  III  is  characteristic  of  men  from  Asia  and  Africa. 
Thus  the  Group  II  factor  was  found  in  not  less  than  45 
per  cent,  among  most  European  peoples.  It  gradually 
diminishes  in  the  countries  lying  between  Asia  and  Central 
Europe,  being  present  in  Arabs  37  per  cent.,  in  Russians 
37  per  cent.,  in  Jews  38  per  cent.  In  Asiatics  and  Africans 
it  falls  considerably,  being  in  Malagasies  30  per  cent.,  in 
Negroes  27  per  cent.,  in  Annamese  29  per  cent.,  in  Indians 
27  per  cent.  On  the  other  hand,  the  factor  producing 
Group  III  shows  exactly  the  opposite  variation.  Among 
the  English,  the  most  Western  people  of  Europe,  it  is  rare, 
being  found  by  these  observers  to  be  present  in  only  10 
per  cent.  ;  it  rises  to  14  per  cent,  in  French  and  Italians, 
to  18  per  cent,  in  German  Austrians,  and  to  20  per  cent,  in 
the  Balkan  peoples.  In  Africa  and  Asia  the  Group  III 
factor  rises  considerably,  being  present  in  Malagasies  28 
per  cent.,  in  Negroes  34  per  cent.,  in  Annamese  35  per 
cent.,  and  in  Indians  49  per  cent. 

We  may  still  be  far  from  elucidating  the  anthropological 
meaning  of  these  facts,  for  the  mingling  of  the  hypothetical 
stocks  of  which  mankind  is  made  no  doubt  began  in  a 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF  BLOOD   GROUPS 


83 


remote  antiquity,  and  it  is  possible  that  a  serologically  pure 
race  does  not  exist.  The  investigation,  however,  of  the 
more  isolated  peoples  might  throw  much  light  on  the 
problems  of  anthropology. 

Interesting  as  the  wider  questions  may  be,  we  are  here 
more  immediately  concerned  with  the  distribution  of  the 
blood  groups  amongst  our  own  population.  The  percen- 
tages in  which  the  four  groups  occur  have  been  estimated 
by  various  observers,  and,  as  will  be  readily  understood 
from  the  foregoing  remarks,  the  numbers  show  some 
variation.  The  approximate  figures  as  worked  out  by 
three  observers  in  America  are  as  follows  : 


Bernheim 

Moss 

Culpepper 

(1,600  tests) 

(5,000  tests) 

I 

2 

10 

3  per  cent. 

II 

40 

40 

38     „       „ 

III 

15 

7 

18     „       „ 

IV 

43 

43 

41     „       „ 

The  percentages  found  among  the  first  hundred  men 
whom  I  tested  in  the  British  Army  in  1917  conformed 
almost  exactly  to  the  first  of  these  series  of  figures,  and 
they  may  be  taken  as  an  average  result  for  Western  peoples. 
It  will  now  be  seen  upon  what  grounds  it  was  stated  in  the 
last  chapter  that  the  chances  were  in  favour  of  the  blood 
of  a  donor  chosen  at  random  being  compatible  with  that 
of  the  recipient.  If  the  patient  belong  to  Group  II,  then 
83  per  cent,  of  other  bloods  will  be  compatible.  If  he 
belong  to  Group  III,  58  per  cent,  will  be  compatible.  Only 
if  he  belong  to  Group  IV  will  the  chance  in  favour  of  com- 
patibility fall  below  50  per  cent. 

This  statement  of  the  facts  concerning  distribution  of 
the  blood  groups  will  serve  to  emphasize  the  absolute 
necessity  for  the  careful  testing  of  a  donor  before  his  blood 
is  used  for  transfusion.  But,  further  than  this,  it  is 
necessary  to  clear  away  several  widely  spread  misappre- 


84  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

hensions  as  to  the  group  relations  between  an  infant  and 
its  mother  and  between  the  various  members  of  a  family. 
It  has  several  times  been  stated  in  print  that  a  mother's 
blood  must  be  compatible  with  that  of  her  child,  or  some- 
times that  a  baby  has  no  blood  group,  so  that  it  may  be 
safely  transfused  with  blood  taken  from  its  mother  or  its 
father  without  preliminary  testing.  On  other  occasions 
the  statement  has  been  made  that  the  brother  or  sister  of 
a  patient  is  more  likely  than  other  people  to  belong  to  the 
same  or  a  compatible  blood  group,  so  that  imtested  blood 
may  be  transfused  from  one  member  of  a  family  to  another 
with  little  risk.  Knowledge  of  the  existence  of  blood 
groups  has  become  somehow  mixed  up  with  vague  popular 
beliefs  concerning  "  affinities "  and  "  blood  relations." 
Such  confusions  must,  however,  be  dissipated,  for  none  of 
these  statements  are  more  than  partially  true,  and  they 
may  lead  to  a  false  sense  of  security  and  to  disaster. 

The  assertion  that  an  infant  has  no  blood  group  was 
tested  by  the  writer  some  time  ago  and  shown  to  be  false. 
On  several  occasions  a  newly  born  infant  was  tested  and 
found  to  show  well-marked  agglutination  reactions  in- 
dicating Groups  II  or  III  as  the  case  might  be.  Even  in 
1905  it  had  been  shown  by  Martin  that  reactions  could 
often  be  demonstrated  between  an  infant's  corpuscles  and 
the  maternal  serum,  and  sometimes  between  the  infant's 
serum  and  the  maternal  corpuscles.  More  recently  (March 
1920)  the  results  of  a  full  investigation  into  the  reactions 
found  in  infants  and  children  have  been  published  by  W.  M. 
Happ  in  America.  These  researches  began  with  the  testing 
of  blood  from  the  umbilical  cord,  and  this  was  seldom  found 
to  show  the  blood  reactions  as  given  by  the  adult.  So  far 
the  statement  quoted  above  was  justified.  It  is  even  true 
that  the  serum  of  an  infant's  blood  will  usually  not  give  any 
reaction  at  birth  or  during  the  first  month.  The  percen- 
tage in  which  it  does  give  a  reaction  increases  with  the  age 
of  the  child  ;  after  one  year  it  is  usually,  and  after  two  years 
always,  established.     On  the  other  hand,  the  agglutination 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   BLOOD    GROUPS  85 

reaction  in  the  corpuscles  appears  before  that  in  the  serum, 
so  that  the  grouping  tested  in  this  way  may  be  present 
immediately  after  birth,  as  I  found  to  be  the  case.  It  is 
possible  that  the  grouping  which  first  appears  may  after- 
wards be  modified,  but  any  change  which  occurs  is  always 
by  the  addition  of  factors  and  not  by  their  subtraction  ; 
thus  an  apparent  Group  IV  may  become  a  Group  II  or  III, 
or  an  apparent  Group  II  or  III  may  become  a  Group  I. 
It  is  found  that  when  a  reaction  is  present  in  both  the 
corpuscles  and  the  serum,  the  group  does  not  afterwards 
change.  Happ's  conclusion,  based  on  his  investigations, 
was  that  it  is  unsafe  to  transfuse  an  infant  with  its  mother's 
blood  without  first  making  the  usual  tests,  and  the  reasons 
for  this  will  now  be  evident.  In  the  first  place  an  infant 
may  be  possessed  of  its  final  blood  reactions  very  shortly 
after  birth,  and  should  therefore  be  treated  in  the  same  way 
as  if  it  were  an  adult.  In  the  second  place,  although  its 
serum  may  be  without  agglutinating  powers,  so  that 
transfused  corpuscles  will  not  be  attacked,  yet  its  corpuscles 
may  be  possessed  of  pronounced  agglutinophilic  properties, 
so  that  they  may  be  seriously  affected  by  the  serum  of 
transfused  blood  from  an  incompatible  group.  In  the 
third  place,  as  will  presently  be  seen,  it  is  by  no  means  the 
rule  that  an  infant  should  belong  to  the  same  group  as  its 
mother,  whatever  its  blood  reactions  may  be. 

Another  set  of  observations,  leading  to  precisely  the 
same  conclusions,  have  been  made  by  F.  B.  Chavasse  of 
Liverpool.  He  terms  the  potential  agglutination  of  the 
foetal  corpuscles  by  the  mother's  serum,  and  of  the  maternal 
corpuscles  by  the  serum  of  the  foetus,  the  "  maternal 
threat  "  and  the  "  foetal  threat  "  respectively,  and  states 
that  there  is  no  obvious  relationship  between  the  "  foetal 
threat  "  and  eclampsia  or  the  toxaemias  of  pregnancy. 
The  inference  is  therefore  justified  that  there  is  no  trans- 
ference of  the  agglutinating  substances  in  either  direction 
across  the  placental  membranes.  No  chemical  "im- 
munity "  is  acquired,  therefore,  on  either  side,  since  the 


86  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

protection  is  mechanical.  This  agrees  with  the  fact  ob- 
served by  Happ  that  the  mother's  milk  contains  the  same 
agglutinins  as  the  serum  of  her  blood  ;  but  these  do  not 
have  any  deleterious  effect  upon  the  infant,  and  are  there- 
fore either  not  absorbed  at  all  or  are  destroyed  in  the 
process  of  digestion. 

The  statement  that  the  blood  group  of  an  infant  is  not 
necessarily  the  same  as  that  ot  its  mother  can  be  amplified, 
for  it  has  been  found  that  blood  groups  are  inherited  on  a 
definite  plan,  so  that  if  the  groups  of  the  parents  be  known, 
certain  predictions  can  be  made  as  to  the  possible  groups 
that  may  be  found  among  their  offspring.  Many  characters 
in  animals  and  plants  have  been  shown  during  the  last 
twenty  years  to  be  transmitted  according  to  the  Mendelian 
plan  of  inheritance,  but  up  to  the  present  time  very  few 
normal  characters  in  man  have  been  isolated,  and  their 
manner  of  inheritance  demonstrated,  though  a  number  of 
pathological  conditions  have  been  shown  to  conform  to  the 
theory.  It  is  therefore  of  much  interest  to  find  that  the 
inheritance  of  blood  groups  in  man  can  be  quite  satisfac- 
torily and  consistently  explained  in  Mendelian  terms. 

According  to  this  theory,  each  quality  in  an  organism 
which  can  be  isolated  and  investigated  independently  of 
other  qualities,  is  termed  a  "unit  character,"  and  the 
appearance  of  each  such  unit  character  is  determined  by 
the  presence  of  something  called  a  "  factor  "  in  the  sexual 
cells  or  "  gametes,"  male  and  female,  by  the  union  of  which 
the  individual  is  formed.  Further,  these  unit  characters  are 
believed  to  occur  in  alternative  pairs,  and  at  first  it  was 
supposed  that  each  alternative  pair  consisted  of  "  domi- 
nant "  and  "  recessive  "  characters,  the  second  of  which 
could  only  make  its  presence  apparent  in  the  individual 
if  the  dominant  character  were  absent.  Subsequently  it 
was  seen  that  the  dominant  and  recessive  characters  need 
not  necessarily  consist  of  two  positive,  though  opposite, 
qualities,  but  might  better  be  regarded  as  consisting  of  the 
presence  of  a  character  and  its  absence.     To  use  a  classical 


r 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   BLOOD    GROUPS  87 


illustration  of  this  view,  sweet  peas  may  be  classified  into 
tall  peas  and  dwarf  peas.  At  first  the  unit  characters  were 
taken  to  be  tallness  (dominant)  and  dwarfness  (recessive). 
Later  this  idea  was  modified,  and  it  was  said  that 
potentially  all  peas  are  dwarf,  but  to  some  is  added  a 
factor  producing  tallness,  this  factor  being  absent  in  those 
that  are  dwarf.  To  represent  this  idea  more  simply  a  con- 
ventional notation  has  been  used,  according  to  which  the 
large  letters  of  the  alphabet  indicate  the  presence,  and  the 
small  letters  the  absence,  of  each  factor. 

In  order  to  apply  this  theory  to  the  case  under  considera- 
tion, it  has  been  suggested  that  two  pairs  of  factors  are 
concerned  : 

A  the  presence  of  the  character  producing  Group  II. 
a  the  absence  of  the  character  producing  Group  II. 
B  the  presence  of  the  character  producing  Group  III. 
b  the  absence  of  the  character  producing  Group  III. 

Each  pair  of  factors  is  transmitted  independently  of  the 
other.  Both  A  and  B  may  be  absent,  in  which  case  the 
individual  belongs  to  Group  IV  ;  or  both  may  be  present, 
and  in  this  case  the  individual  gives  the  reactions  of 
Group  I. 

It  must  be  understood  that  the  term  "  character  pro- 
ducing Group  II  "  is  here  used  as  a  convenient  way  of 
expressing  the  obscure  and  probably  complicated  set  of 
properties  responsible  for  the  reactions  manifested  by  in- 
dividuals of  Group  II.  It  includes  not  only  the  agglutinin 
or  haemolysin  of  the  serum  which  reacts  with  corpuscles  of 
Group  III,  but  also  the  complementary  iso -agglutinin  or 
iso-hsemolysin  by  virtue  of  which  the  corpuscles  react 
with  serum  of  Group  III. 

The  appearance  of  the  different  groups  can  now  be 
further  explained  in  terms  of  the  Mendelian  theory. 
According  to  the  conception  of  the  individual  formulated 
by  Mendel,  each  cell  of  the  body  contains  an  ingredient 
derived  from  each  of  the  sexual  cells  or  gametes  which 


88  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

united  at  the  moment  of  fertilization  of  the  ovum  by  the 
spermatozoon  to  form  the  individual.  But  when  the  adult 
in  his  or  her  turn  forms  sexual  cells  or  gametes,  these 
ingredients  separate  again,  half  the  gametes  containing 
one  of  the  pair  of  factors,  half  containing  the  other.  This 
process  certainly  takes  place  during  the  rearrangement 
of  the  nuclear  substance  or  chromosomes  at  the  cell 
divisions  which  result  in  the  formation  of  the  ripe  sexual 
cells.     It  is  called  the  "  segregation  of  the  gametes." 

In  the  present  case  the  unit  character  producing  Group 
II  will  be  first  considered.  As  already  explained,  the 
factors  concerned  may  be  called  A  and  a,  and  the  individual 
of  Group  II  may  be  constituted  by  AA  or  Aa,  and  the 
gametes,  therefore,  may  contain  either  A  or  a,  but  not  both. 
The  individuals  resulting  from  the  union  of  the  gametes 
derived  from  Aa  adults  may  then  be  constituted  in  three 
ways — AA,  Aa,  or  aa.  Similarly  for  the  unit  character 
producing  Group  III,  the  factors  concerned  may  be  called 
B  and  b,  and  the  individual  of  this  group  may  contain  BB 
or  Bb.  The  gametes  then  contain  either  B  or  b,  and  the 
individual  resulting  from  their  luiion  may  again  be  con- 
stituted in  three  ways — BB,  Bb,  or  bb. 

In  computing  the  results,  however,  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  most,  or  perhaps  all,  people  are  hybrids,  so  that 
both  unit  characters  are  present  simultaneously,  and  all  the 
factors  must  be  taken  into  account.  It  is  easily  seen  that 
the  gametes  derived  from  a  hybrid  individual  must  contain 
one  of  the  following  combinations  : 

AB,  Ab,  aB,  or  ab, 
and  consequently  the  individuals  formed  from  them  must 
have  one  of  the  following  constitutions  ; 

AB— Ab,   Ab— aB,    aB— ab,    ab— ab,   AB— AB,- 

AB— aB,    Ab— ab,    aB— aB, 

AB-ab,     Ab-Ab. 
This  includes  all  the  possible  combinations  that  can  result 
from  the  chance  union  of  the  gametes,  and  it  is  now  clear 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF   BLOOD    GROUPS  89 

which  blood  groups  result  from  which  combinations,  if  it 
be  remembered  that 

A  is  dominant  to  a, 

JJ    fi  99  JJ      D) 

and  that 

Group  I  results  from  the  presence  of  both  A  and  B. 
,,    II       »  „       9,  99         „     A   only. 

>5    ll-l-  >>  JJ  JJ  JJ  JJ  -t>  JJ 

„    IV     „  „       ,,    absence     ,,    both  A  and  B. 

Thus  Group  I  may  be  constituted  by  AB— AB. 

AB-aB. 

AB-Ab. 

AB-ab. 

Ab-aB. 
Group  II  may  be  constituted  by  Ab— Ab.  i 

Ab— ab. 
>>     III    j>     5>  >j  JJ    ^b     aB. 

aB-aB. 
J,     IV    „     „  „  „    ab— ab. 

It  now  becomes  evident  what  offspring  may  result  from 
the  union  of  parents  who  have  any  of  the  above  constitu- 
tions. Thus  parents  both  of  Group  I  may  have  off- 
spring belonging  to  any  group  according  to  which  of  the 
five  possible  constitutions  they  possess.  If  the  union  be 
represented  by 

AB-AB  X  AB-AB, 

then  only  offspring  of  Group  I  can  result,  since  every 
gamete  contains  both  A  and  B.  The  other  possibilities 
may  be  worked  out  by  the  reader  if  he  desire. 

Similarly,  a  union  of  Groups  I  X  II,  I  X  III,  or  II  X  III 
may  produce  any  of  the  groups,  definite  limitations  being 
imposed  by  the  detailed  constitution  of  the  parents.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  remaining  group  unions  that  are 
possible  can  only  produce  a  more  limited  variety  of  off- 
spring.    Thus    II  X  II    or    II  X  IV    can    only    produce 


90  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

Groups  II  or  IV  ;  III  X  III  or  III  X  IV  can  only  produce 
Groups  III  or  IV  ;    IV  X  IV  can  only  produce  Group  IV. 

The  Mendelian  theory  of  inheritance  in  general  has  been 
subjected  to  a  prolonged  and  widely  ramifying  series  of 
tests,  and  it  seems  in  the  present  state  of  knowledge  to 
present  a  satisfactory  and  consistent  explanation  of  the 
facts.  For  a  more  extended  accoimt  of  it  the  reader  must 
be  referred  to  the  standard  works  on  the  subject.^  As 
regards  its  application  to  the  present  case,  the  test  of 
actual  experiment  has  not  yet  been  carried  out  on  a  large 
scale.  A  series  of  observations  has,  however,  been  pub- 
lished by  J.  R.  Learmonth,  who,  taking  forty  families  at 
random,  determined  the  blood  groups  of  both  parents  and 
the  children  in  each  family.  In  this  way  he  tested  most 
of  the  possible  group  matings,  and,  with  a  single  exception, 
the  group  inheritance  conformed  to  the  theory  as  set  out 
above.  Additional  confirmation  of  the  truth  of  the  theory 
is  afforded  by  the  pedigree  given  on  the  page  opposite. 
I  have  recently  collected  this  pedigree,  which  includes  fifty- 
nine  individuals  belonging  to  four  generations,  and  it  has 
not  been  published  before.  It  will  give,  perhaps,  a  more 
graphic  representation  of  the  facts  than  has  been  conveyed 
by  the  brief  summary  contained  in  the  foregoing  pages. 
It  does  not  show  any  variation  from  the  results  that  were 
to  be  anticipated  according  to  the  theory. 

The  exceptional  result  obtained  by  Learmonth  in  one 
of  his  forty  families  serves  to  emphasize  the  clarity  of  the 
theoretical  considerations.  In  this  family  parents  both 
belonging  to  Group  IV  had  a  child  showing  the  reactions 
of  Group  I.     There  are  three  possible  explanations  of  this  : 

(1)  The  observations  were  at  fault. 

(2)  The  putative  father  was  not  the  real  father. 

(3)  The  Mendelian  theory  of  inheritance  is  wrong. 

The  Mendelian  theory  is  established  on  so  firm  a  basis 
that,  in  the  absence  of  more  numerous  exceptions,  (3)  may 
be  rejected.     There  is  no  reason  for  supposing  that  the 

1  Mendelism,  R.  C.  Punnett,  5th  ed.,  Macmillan,  1919. 


go 

o  < 

OS 

a  w 
^  15 


2  ^ 


^■« 

0  o 

*    Hi 

1  w 


pt. 


91 


92  BLOOD    TRANSFUSION 

observations  were  inaccurate,  and  we  are  therefore  brought 
to  the  conclusion  that  in  such  a  case  the  child  is  illegitimate. 

The  conclusions  which  emerge  from  this  structure  of 
theory  and  fact  are  obviously  of  very  great  clinical  im- 
portance. It  is  now  clearly  demonstrated  that  a  mother 
belonging,  say,  to  Group  I,  may  give  birth  to  a  child  belong- 
ing to  any  one  of  Groups  I,  II,  III,  or  IV  ;  her  blood  may 
not  be  used  for  transfusing  her  child  without  a  grave  risk 
that  the  "  maternal  threat  "  may  culminate  in  the  death 
of  the  child.  The  same  applies  to  the  possible  relations 
between  a  father  and  his  child.  Two  brothers,  again,  may 
belong  to  Groups  II  and  III  respectively.  Even  the  blood 
of  twins  may  be  mutually  incompatible,  except  in  the  rare 
case  of  "  identical  twins,"  who,  it  may  be  supposed  on 
theoretical  grounds,  would  certainly  belong  to  the  same 
group,  though  I  am  not  aware  of  a  case  in  which  this  has 
been  put  to  the  test.  As  much  care,  therefore,  must  be 
exercised  in  testing  the  blood  groups  of  members  of  the 
same  family  before  performing  a  transfusion  as  would  be 
taken  before  using  a  donor  who  is  not  related  to  the  patient. 

The  medico-legal  importance  of  the  facts  concerning  the 
inheritance  of  blood  groups  is  also  evident,  and,  although 
this  test  has  not  yet  been  used  as  a  test  of  legitimacy,  there 
can  be  little  doubt  but  that  it  will  be  so  used  in  the  near 
future.  The  information  to  be  derived  from  it  is  of  a 
negative  rather  than  a  positive  character.  Thus  the 
occurrence  of  Group  III  blood  in  a  child  whose  mother  is  of 
Group  II  and  putative  father  of  Group  I  cannot  be  taken 
as  a  proof  either  of  legitimacy  or  the  reverse.  But  if,  as 
in  Learmonth's  case,  parents  both  of  Group  IV  have  a 
child  of  Group  I,  or  if  parents  both  of  Group  II  have  a 
child  of  Group  I  or  III,  then  this  may  be  taken  as  a  proof 
of  illegitimacy. 

There  is  not  much  experimental  evidence  concerning  the 
effect  of  various  pathological  conditions  on  the  agglutina- 
tion reactions  of  the  blood  and  serum.  It  has  already  been 
mentioned  that  there  is  no  proof  that  the  possession  of  any 


PATHOLOGY   OF  BLOOD   GROUPS  93 

particular  blood  group  confers  upon  its  owner  any  special 
immunity  from,  or  liability  to,  disease.  The  numbers, 
investigated  by  Alexander  in  the  communication  referred 
to  on  p.  81,  are  too  small  for  the  observation  to  be  of  much 
value  ;  it  is  also  necessary,  as  a  preliminary  to  any  such 
research,  to  demonstrate  that  there  is  no  abnormal  altera- 
tion in  the  reactions  of  the  blood  of  these  patients.  It  is 
probable,  indeed,  that  evidence  of  this  alteration  in  malig- 
nant disease  already  exists,  for  a  reference  to  it  is  to  be 
found  in  Kolmer's  work  on  serum-therapy,^  but  I  have  been 
unable  to  find  a  record  of  the  investigation. 

I  possess,  on  the  other  hand,  evidence  that  an  alteration 
may  take  place  in  some  other  diseases,  such  as  pernicious 
anaemia  and  familial,  or  acholuric,  jaundice.  Evidence 
for  the  former  was  provided  recently  by  a  patient  whose 
condition  was  typical,  clinically,  of  the  last  stages  of  the 
disease.  Her  corpuscles,  tested  with  stock  sera,  belonged 
to  Group  II,  but  her  serum,  tested  directly  with  the 
corpuscles  of  prospective  donors  known  to  belong  to  Group 
IV,  agglutinated  these  vigorously,  so  that  a  transfusion 
could  not  safely  be  performed.  The  same  phenomenon  has 
been  found  by  other  observers.  In  acholuric  jaundice 
there  is  a  progressive  destruction  of  red  corpuscles  in  the 
patient's  circulation.  This  appears  to  be  connected  in 
some  way  with  an  abnormal  functioning  of  the  greatly 
enlarged  spleen,  since  the  destruction  of  corpuscles  ceases 
almost  at  once  when  this  organ  is  removed.  There  seems 
to  be,  in  addition,  an  alteration  in  the  blood  reactions.  In  a 
case  which  I  tested  recently,  the  patient's  corpuscles  were 
quickly  agglutinated  by  serum  of  Group  III,  and  he  there- 
fore nominally  belonged  to  Group  II.  His  serum,  however, 
when  separated  and  tested  against  other  bloods  of  known 

1  J.  A.  Kolmer,  Injection,  Immunity ,  and  Specific  Therapy,  ed.  2,  Saunders 
Co.,  1917,  p.  287  :  "  With  the  increasing  number  of  blood  transfusions 
the  phenomena  of  iso-agglutination  and  iso-haemolysis  are  of  consider- 
able practical  importance,  especially  if  the  patient  is  suffering  from 
cancer,  when  the  serum  is  likely  to  be  actively  haemolytic  for  the  donor's 
corpuscles."     No  authority  is  given. 


94  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

groups  gave,  in  addition  to  a  rapid  agglutination  of  cor- 
puscles belonging  to  Group  III,  a  definite,  though  slower, 
agglutination  of  corpuscles  belonging  to  Groups  II  and  IV, 
showing  that  it  had  acquired  abnormal  properties. 

It  is  possible  that  there  are  similar  alterations  of  reactions 
in  other  pathological  conditions.  The  instances  mentioned 
above  suggest  that  the  serum  is  affected  rather  than  the 
corpuscles,  but  further  investigations  are  needed.  It  is  an 
observed  fact  that  blood  outside  the  body  soon  develops 
the  property  of  auto -haemolysis.  If  blood  is  drawn  from  a 
vein,  put  into  a  test-tube,  and  allowed  to  clot,  then  after 
twenty-four  hours  or  more  the  serum  which  has  separated 
from  the  clot  begins  to  be  tinged  with  haemoglobin,  even 
though  it  has  remained  absolutely  sterile.  It  appears, 
therefore,  that  the  serum  develops  a  haemolysin  and  the 
corpuscles  the  corresponding  iso-haemolysin,  the  interaction 
of  which  results  in  the  breaking  up  of  corpuscles.  If  this 
process  takes  place  in  normal  blood  outside  the  body,  it 
would  not  be  surprising  to  find  that  it  may  also  occur 
abnormally  inside  the  body.  This  actually  happens  in 
the  condition  known  as  paroxysmal  haemoglobinuria.  The 
pathology  of  the  disease  is  obscure,  but  it  seems  that  a 
haemolysin  develops  in  the  serum  as  the  result  of  cooling 
in  the  extremities  and  haemolysis  takes  place  when  the 
cooled  serum  is  again  warmed  by  being  restored  to  the 
general  circulation.  The  presence  of  this  haemolysin  in 
addition  to  the  normal  haemolysins  has  been  demonstrated 
by  Moss.  It  is  possible  that  a  similar  though  less  acute 
change  takes  place  in  acholuric  jaundice.  Blood  trans- 
fusion, therefore,  is  not  likely  to  be  efficacious  in  such 
conditions,  since  the  transfused  corpuscles  may  be 
destroyed  whatever  the  apparent  blood  group  of  the 
patient.  Some  of  the  facts  of  auto -haemolysis  have  been 
recently  investigated  by  Bond,  but  it  is  not  necessary  to 
give  the  details  here.  He  concludes  that  the  development 
of  auto-haemolysins,  which  are  non-specific  and  independent 
of  the   specific   haemolysins   of  the   blood   groups,   has   a 


PATHOLOGY   OF   BLOOD    GROUPS  95 

biological  significance  in  the  history  of  the  red  corpuscle, 
and  is  a  product  of  ageing.  The  biochemistry,  however, 
of  the  process  remains  at  present  entirely  unknown. 

The  necessity  for  careful  blood  grouping  in  every  case 
before  performing  a  transfusion  has  now  been  sufficiently 
emphasized,  but  before  proceeding  to  the  description  of 
the  methods  of  choosing  a  donor  and  of  grouping,  a 
possible  danger  must  be  mentioned  which  may  arise  even 
when  the  blood  groups  are  known.  In  the  preceding 
chapters  references  were  made  to  the  effects  which  have 
been  observed  to  follow  repeated  transfusions  given  in  the 
treatment  of  a  condition  such  as  pernicious  anaemia.  In 
such  cases,  although  the  groups  were  ascertained,  and  the 
bloods  were  also  tested  directly  against  one  another  with- 
out any  incompatibility  being  detected,  yet  when  the  third 
or  fourth  transfusion  was  given,  symptoms  of  toxaemia 
followed,  sometimes  with  haemolysis.  The  death  of  the 
patient  has  even  been  hastened  in  this  way.  A  very 
striking  instance  of  this  phenomenon,  which  has  been 
recently  reported  (278),  will  serve  to  bring  home  the  reality 
of  the  danger.  A  boy  was  transfused  by  the  citrate  method 
with  blood  from  his  father,  and  this  was  followed  only  by 
a  mild  febrile  reaction  such  as  is  often  observed.  Eighteen 
days  later  a  second  transfusion  with  blood  from  the  same 
donor  was  performed,  and  after  150  cc.  had  been  given,  a 
severe  reaction  resulted,  which  was  followed  later  by  pro- 
nounced haemoglobinuria.  In  this  case  the  bloods  of  donor 
and  recipient  had  been  tested  against  one  another  directly, 
but  this  was  not  repeated,  and  the  groups  were  not  ascer- 
tained until  afterwards.  Probably  there  was  some  error 
in  the  original  test,  for  it  afterwards  appeared  that  the  boy 
belonged  to  Group  I  and  his  father  to  Group  III,  so  that 
there  should  have  been  agglutination  of  the  boy's  corpuscles 
by  his  father's  serum  outside  the  body.  Nevertheless, 
Group  I  individuals  have  been  called  the  "  universal 
recipients,"  and  no  ill  effects  are  usually  observed  whatever 
blood  be  used  for  transfusing  them.     In  the  other  cases 


96  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

already  mentioned  a  reaction  followed  the  later  transfusions, 
even  when  the  donor  and  recipient  belonged  to  the  same 
group.  It  appears  that  by  repeated  transfusions  the 
recipient  becomes  as  it  were  sensitized  to  the  blood  of 
another  individual  even  of  the  same  group,  and  conse- 
quently great  caution  must  be  used  in  giving  the  later 
transfusions  of  a  series.  Some  light  is  thrown  on  this 
question  by  the  observations  of  Ottenberg,  already  referred 
to,  concerning  the  artificial  production  of  iso-hsemolysins 
in  cats.  In  these  animals  iso-agglutinins  are  found,  but 
iso-haemolysins  seldom  or  never.  The  reaction  is,  however, 
found  to  become  ha^molytic  in  the  recipients  of  transfusions, 
and  it  is  then  selective.  It  seems,  therefore,  that  the 
group  reactions  may  not  be  as  clearly  defined  as  was  at 
one  time  supposed.  Probably  there  are  slight  incom- 
patibilities of  an  unknown  nature  between  individuals  of 
the  same  or  compatible  groups.  These  are  very  seldom 
of  any  consequence  in  a  first  transfusion,  but  become 
accentuated  as  the  result  of  "  sensitization,"  and  in  later 
transfusions  have  a  pronounced  influence.  This  "  over- 
lapping "  of  groups  has  been  mentioned  on  another  page. 
It  must  not  be  supposed  that  any  untoward  results  follow 
repeated  transfusions  as  a  general  rule,  for  usually  no  such 
effect  is  observed.  In  order,  however,  to  minimize  the  risk, 
it  may  be  suggested  that  the  following  precautions  should 
be  taken  :  (1)  The  donor  should  be  actually  of  the  same 
group  as  the  recipient,  and  not  merely  of  a  theoretically 
compatible  group  ;  a  patient,  for  instance,  of  Group  II 
should  receive  blood  of  Group  II  rather  than  of  Group  IV. 
(2)  The  same  donor  should  not  be  used  for  the  later 
transfusions  of  a  series,  on  the  grounds  that  the  sensitiza- 
tion appears  to  be  an  individual  rather  than  a  group 
phenomenon.  (3)  In  performing  the  later  transfusions, 
the  blood  should  be  given  at  first  very  slowly,  so  that  it 
may  be  discontinued  at  the  first  appearance  of  any  signs 
of  a  reaction. 


CHAPTER  VI 

THE    CHOICE    OF   BLOOD    DONOR 

The  physiology  of  blood  groups  having  been  examined,  the 
principles  governing  the  choice  of  a  blood  donor  can  be 
more  readily  understood.  It  is  evident  that  this  choice  is 
determined  largely  by  blood  groups,  and  in  the  present 
chapter  therefore  the  clinical  methods  of  testing  for  the 
groups  will  be  described. 

Before,  however,  the  bloods  can  be  tested,  a  willing 
donor  must  be  found,  and  this  is  not  always  an  easy  matter. 
During  the  war,  even  when  transfusion  was  being  practised 
on  a  large  scale,  there  was  never  any  difficulty  in  finding 
volunteers  among  the  men  that  were  more  lightly  woimded. 
In  addition  to  the  genuine  and  ready  response  which  many 
men  would  make  at  once  to  a  call  for  help  in  a  matter  of 
life  and  death,  there  was  the  glamour  of  novelty  and  the 
feeling  of  satisfaction  following  an  act  of  conscious  heroism 
— for  such  the  sacrifice  of  blood  was  held  to  be,  the  days 
having  long  been  forgotten  when  as  much  blood  was  "  let  '* 
in  the  treatment  of  almost  any  ailment.  In  the  Ex- 
peditionary Force,  too,  the  unofficial  reward  of  a  fortnight's 
leave  in  England  proved  a  potent  inducement,  and  the 
rejection  of  a  volunteer  on  the  ground  of  incompatibility 
was  regarded  almost  as  an  injustice  or  as  a  reflection  upon 
the  physical  condition  of  the  candidate.  In  civilian  life, 
however,  such  inducements  cannot  be  held  out,  and  it  will 
be  found  that  many  a  man  "  does  not  like  the  idea  "  of 
parting  with  a  pint  of  blood,  even  though  the  sacrifice  may 
save  another's  life.  Often,  however,  a  near  relative  of  the 
patient  may  happen  to  be  willing  and  suitable,  or,  failing 

7  97 


98  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

this,  in  a  hospital  ward  there  will  usually  be  some  young 
man  who  has  been  admitted  for  a  slight  operation,  such 
as  the  radical  cure  of  a  hernia,  and  will  accede  to  a  request 
for  blood  if  the  procedure,  its  object,  and  its  harmlessness 
to  himself  be  briefly  explained.  Notoriety  is  fortunately 
seldom  a  motive  for  volunteering,  and  though  paragraphs 
have  occasionally  appeared  in  the  daily  press  with  head- 
ings such  as  "  Police  Inspector's  Sacrifice,"  this  has 
probably  not  been  done  by  the  donor's  own  wish.  It  is, 
after  all,  natural  that  to  the  mind  of  a  layman  the  giving 
to  another  of  so  personal  a  possession  as  his  blood  should 
seem  to  be  an  act  of  heroism,  and  it  is  also  natural  that 
occasionally  a  man  should  feel  some  repugnance  to  taking 
part  in  a  strange  performance  which  he  but  dimly  under- 
stands. To  the  young,  on  the  other  hand,  the  procedure 
may  appeal  by  its  faint  flavour  of  adventure. 

Occasionally  during  the  last  two  years  advertisements 
for  blood  donors  have  appeared  in  newspapers,  probably 
not  in  vain.  If  the  demand  for  blood  donors  becomes 
greater  than  it  has  been  as  yet,  it  will  certainly  result  in 
the  creation  of  a  class  of  "  professional  blood  donors,"  who 
already  exist  in  some  numbers  in  the  United  States  of 
America,  where  blood  transfusion  is  a  more  widely  recog- 
nized form  of  therapeutics  than  it  is  in  this  country. 
These  professionals  have  even  formed  a  Trade  Union,  so 
that  as  high  a  fee  as  possible  may  be  obtained  from  those 
who  need  their  blood.  Apart  from  this,  some  of  the 
advantages  of  having  these  professionals  available  have 
already  been  explained  in  the  chapter  on  the  dangers  of 
blood  transfusion.  It  is  evident  that  certain  sources  of 
danger  can  be  eliminated  in  advance,  and  in  an  emergency 
it  is  obviously  better  to  have  donors  of  known  groups 
available,  so  that  no  time  is  lost  in  testing  the  prospective 
donors  of  whom  several  in  succession  may  be  found  un- 
suitable. Probably  it  will  be  easier  for  practitioners  to 
arrange  for  such  professionals  to  be  available  at  the 
shortest  notice  than  for  necessary  arrangements  to  be  made 


THE   CHOICE   OF   BLOOD   DONOR  99 

in  a  hospital.  Even  in  large  institutions  it  is  usually 
difficult  for  any  of  the  men  employed  in  them  to  be  spared 
from  their  work  for  twenty-four  hours,  so  that,  although 
suitable  men  of  known  groups  are  always  within  call,  it 
may  be  impossible  to  use  them.  This,  however,  is  not  the 
place  to  discuss  the  organization  that  is  necessary  to  make 
a  blood  transfusion  a  really  efficient  form  of  emergency 
treatment  in  a  hospital.  It  may  merely  be  observed  that 
in  every  hospital  it  should  be  possible  to  give  a  blood  trans- 
fusion to  a  patient  suffering  from  urgent  haemorrhage 
within  fifteen  minutes  of  his  arrival  on  the  premises. 

Whether  the  donor  be  a  "  professional "  or  an 
"  amateur,"  it  may  be  useful  to  mention  a  few  points  to 
be  observed  in  choosing  him.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that 
the  most  satisfactory  individuals  for  the  purpose  are  young 
men  between  the  ages  of  eighteen  and  twenty-five.  The 
younger  the  donor,  the  less  likely  is  he  to  be  suffering  from 
certain  of  the  diseases  mentioned  in  the  chapter  on  the 
dangers,  the  less  will  be  the  immediate  effect  of  the  with- 
drawal of  circulating  fluid,  and  the  more  quickly  will  he 
recuperate  from  the  loss  of  blood. 

It  must  not  be  supposed,  however,  that  the  withdrawal  of 
even  1,000  cc.  of  blood  will  usually  have  an  appreciable  effect 
upon  a  healthy  man.  It  is  impossible  to  predict  from  the 
donor's  appearance  what  immediate  effect  the  loss  of  blood 
will  have  upon  him.  It  sometimes  happens  that  the  most 
robust-looking  individual  becomes  faint  after  losing  a  few 
hundred  cubic  centimetres,  whereas  another,  to  all 
appearances  pallid  and  much  less  satisfactory,  will  not 
evince  the  slightest  discomfort  from  the  loss  of  750  cc.  or 
even  more.  Normally  a  man  should  be  able,  by  his 
physiological  mechanisms,  to  compensate  reflexly  and  at 
once  for  the  removal  of  this  amount  of  fluid  from  his 
circulation.  In  any  case,  the  worst  effect  that  is  seen  in  a 
well-chosen  donor  is  a  transient  faintness  ;  it  is  usually 
wise  to  keep  him  on  his  back  for  two  or  three  hours  after 
the  operation,  and  he  should  not,  if  it  can  be  avoided, 


100  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

return  to  his  work  on  the  same  day.  During  the  late  war 
a  medical  officer  of  my  own  acquaintance  gave  750  cc.  of 
blood  for  a  severely  wounded  friend  and  continued  his 
arduous  duties  as  Surgical  Specialist  in  a  Casualty  Clearing 
Station  immediately  afterwards.  In  this  case,  however, 
the  donor  was  solely  responsible  for  his  own  welfare  ; 
usually  this  responsibility  rests  upon  another,  and  greater 
care  must  be  exercised.  The  effect,  indeed,  of  a  trans- 
fusion upon  the  donor  seems  to  depend  more  upon  psycholo- 
gical than  upon  physiological  factors.  A  nervous  and 
excitable  donor  is  more  likely  to  suffer  than  one  who 
approaches  the  operation  without  apprehension.  This  is 
another  point  in  favour  of  employing  a  professional  donor, 
who  soon  becomes  familiar  with  the  whole  procedure  and 
will  lose  all  symptoms  of  fear. 

The  same  considerations  may  be  applied  to  the  use  of 
women  as  blood  donors.  In  them  the  spirit  of  self-sacrifice 
is  commonly  more  highly  developed  than  it  is  in  men,  and 
some  of  the  most  eager  donors  will  be  found  among  them. 
The  disability  of  nervousness  will,  however,  occur  more 
often  in  women,  and  another  consideration  of  importance 
is  that  the  veins  of  a  woman  are  usually  much  less  easily 
accessible  than  those  of  a  man.  Not  only  is  the  abundant 
subcutaneous  fat  an  impediment  in  women,  but  usually  the 
superficial  veins  are  all  of  small  size.  The  method  of 
choice  for  performing  a  blood  transfusion  will  be  presently 
described,  and  it  will  then  be  seen  that  the  operation  is 
easier  and  that  much  less  damage  is  inflicted  on  the  donor 
if  a  large  superficial  vein  can  be  tapped.  In  women  this 
will  very  often  be  difficult  or  even  impossible.  In  general, 
therefore,  it  may  be  stated  that  the  use  of  women  as  blood 
donors  is  to  be  avoided.  The  fallacies  concerning  the 
indiscriminate  transfusion  of  an  infant  with  its  mother's 
blood  and  of  any  patient  with  the  blood  of  a  near  relation 
have  already  been  explained. 


THE  CHOICE   OF   BLOOD   DONOR         101 


Testing  for  Blood  Groups 

Reference  to  the  table  of  blood  reactions  given  on  p.  71 
will  show  that  in  order  to  discover  the  blood  group  of  any- 
individual  it  is  only  necessary  to  test  his  corpuscles  against 
the  serum  of  Groups  II  and  III.  These  reactions  may  be 
recapitulated  as  follows  : 

(i)  If  he  be  Group  I,  his  corpuscles  will  be  agglutinated 
by  the  serum  of  Groups  II  and  III. 

(ii)  If  he  be  Group  II,  his  corpuscles  will  be  agglutinated 
by  the  serum  of  Group  III  only. 

(iii)  If  he  be  Group  III,  his  corpuscles  will  be  agglu- 
tinated by  the  serum  of  Group  II  only. 

(iv)  If  he  be  Group  IV,  his  corpuscles  will  be  agglutinated 
by  neither  serum. 

Only  the  serum,  therefore,  collected  from  people  known 
to  belong  to  Groups  II  and  III  need  be  kept  in  stock. 
This  can  generally  be  obtained  from  the  Lister  Institute, 
and  if  kept  sterile  will  retain  its  agglutinating  properties 
for  some  months,  but  under  no  circumstances  should  serum 
more  than  six  months  old  be  used,  since  the  consequences 
of  a  failure  to  agglutinate  may  be  very  serious.  Neverthe- 
less, the  agglutinins  contained  in  serum  are  very  resistant 
to  physical  and  chemical  changes  in  their  environment. 
Dried  serum  has  been  successfully  used  for  testing  purposes, 
and  Culpepper  has  shown  that  the  reactions  are  not  inter- 
fered with  by  cold  or  by  heat  until  actual  coagulation  of 
the  serum  takes  place.  Bacterial  contamination  does  not 
affect  the  reactions,  so  that  the  serum  is  still  active  even 
when  putrid.  Various  methods  have  been  used  for  pre- 
serving the  serum.  Its  properties  are  not  affected  by  the 
addition  of  dilute  cresol  (1  :  250)  or  of  chloroform. 

In  the  absence  of  any  stock  sera,  the  agglutinating  test 
may  be  applied  directly.  A  few  cubic  centimetres  of  blood 
are  taken  from  the  patient,  and  the  serum  as  soon  as  it  has 


102  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

separated  is  tested  against  the  corpuscles  of  the  prospective 
donor.  If  agglutination  occurs,  this  donor  is  at  once 
excluded.  If  no  agglutination  occurs,  he  is  either  of  the 
same  group  as  the  patient  or  belongs  to  a  compatible  group. 
Supposing  that  a  donor  actually  of  the  same  group  as  the 
patient  is  wanted,  then  the  reverse  test  must  be  performed 
in  addition,  that  is  to  say,  the  corpuscles  of  the  patient 
must  be  tested  against  the  serum  of  the  donor.  If  both 
tests  are  negative,  then  donor  and  patient  are  proved  to 
be  of  the  same  group.  The  method  of  direct  test  cannot 
be  applied  in  an  emergency  owing  to  the  loss  of  time 
involved  ;  it  is  better,  therefore,  that  anyone  who  intends 
to  be  ready  to  perform  a  blood  transfusion  should  always 
have  serum  of  Groups  II  and  III  immediately  available. 

The  collection  of  stock  sera  is  not  a  matter  of  any  diffi- 
culty. With  strict  aseptic  precautions  20  cc.  of  blood  are 
withdrawn  in  a  syringe  from  persons  known  to  belong  to 
Groups  II  and  III ;  the  bloods  are  put  into  a  sterile  test- 
tube  and  allowed  to  clot.  As  soon  as  the  serum  has 
separated  it  is  drawn  up  into  sterile  glass  bulbs  of  suitable 
capacity,  which  are  sealed  off  at  each  end.  The  most 
convenient  form  of  storage  for  actual  use  is  a  capillary  glass 
tube  sealed  at  each  end.  Each  tube  may  be  made  to  hold 
a  single  drop,  which  is  the  amount  used  for  a  test.  There 
is  then  no  wastage  of  serum,  and  no  chance  of  contaminat- 
ing the  remaining  stock.  When  the  blood  has  been  with- 
drawn and  has  clotted,  the  complete  settling  of  the 
corpuscles  can  be  hastened  by  the  use  of  the  centrifuge. 
If  the  serum  be  left  in  contact  with  the  corpuscles  for  more 
than  twelve  hours,  some  auto -haemolysis  may  take  place, 
so  that  the  serum  will  become  tinged  with  haemoglobin. 
It  is  exceedingly  important  that  the  two  stock  sera  should 
not  become  confused,  and  this  may  easily  happen  unless 
each  tube  has  some  distinguishing  mark. 

The  methods  of  testing  for  blood  groups  have  been 
simplified  by  successive  observers  since  the  existence  of  the 
groups  was  first  demonstrated   in  1907.     Moss  used  an 


THE   CHOICE    OF   BLOOD   DONOR  103 

elaborate  technique  such  as  was  essential  for  putting  a 
new  discovery  upon  a  secure  scientific  basis.  In  order  to 
obtain  a  suspension  of  corpuscles,  blood  was  drawn  into  a 
syringe  containing  a  solution  of  sodium  citrate  to  prevent 
clotting.  The  corpuscles  w^ere  collected  by  means  of  the 
centrifuge,  and  were  thoroughly  washed  twice  in  normal 
saline  solution  so  that  they  were  finally  collected  free  from 
serum  and  from  citrate.  Serum  was  collected  in  the 
manner  already  described.  A  series  of  small  tubes  was 
then  filled  with  equal  quantities  of  serum  and  the  sus- 
pension of  corpuscles,  and  was  incubated  for  two  hours  at 
37-5°  C.  At  the  end  of  this  time  observations  were  made 
and  again  after  the  tubes  had  stood  for  twelve  hours  in 
an  ice  chest.  Varying  degrees  of  agglutination  and 
haemolysis  were  then  accurately  recorded,  and  far-reaching 
results  were  obtained. 

Later  workers  had  the  advantage  of  using  stock  sera 
belonging  to  known  groups,  so  that  the  number  of  observa- 
tions to  be  made  was  very  greatly  reduced.  Brem  intro- 
duced in  1916  a  method  of  testing  in  which  he  mixed  the 
serum  and  suspension  of  washed  corpuscles  in  very  small 
quantities  on  a  coverslip,  which  was  inverted  over  an 
ordinary  cell  slide  rimmed  with  petroleum  jelly.  The 
results  could  then  be  observed  macroscopically  or  under  the 
microscope,  and  the  presence  or  absence  of  agglutination 
could  be  determined  within  fifteen  minutes.  The  detection 
of  haemolysis  by  the  hanging  drop  method  requires  that 
the  cells  should  be  incubated  and  observed  at  intervals 
for  several  hours,  but  it  is  not  always  easy  to  see  the 
disintegrated  corpuscles  xmless  the  process  has  taken 
place  extensively.  The  diagram  on  p.  105  gives  in  a 
tabulated  form  some  idea  of  the  appearances  presented 
by  the  corpuscles  of  the  different  groups  when  mixed  with 
the  stock  sera  and  observed  in  a  hanging  drop  imder  a 
microscope.  Agglutination  must  be  distinguished  from 
the  formation  of  rouleaux,  which  may  be  seen  in  any  of 
the  mixtures. 


104  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

For  scientific  purposes  these  very  careful  tests  are 
necessary,  but  it  seems  to  be  clear  that  for  clinical  pur- 
poses a  much  rougher  and  quicker  test  is  adequate.  In 
the  clinical  determination  of  blood  groups  it  is  superfluous 
to  carry  the  test  to  the  point  of  watching  for  haemolysis,  for 
it  is  upon  the  presence  of  agglutinins  in  the  serum  and  the 
corresponding  iso-agglutinins  in  the  corpuscles  that  the 
determination  of  the  groups  depends.  Further,  no  error 
is  introduced  by  neglecting  the  haemolysis,  since  it  has 
been  shown  that  haemolysis  is  invariably  preceded  by 
agglutination.  It  is  the  occurrence  of  agglutination  there- 
fore that  is  of  prime  clinical  importance.  If  that  is 
excluded,  haemolysis  is  necessarily  excluded  also,  and  the 
prolonging  of  the  test  is  seen  to  be  only  of  academic  interest. 
In  the  methods  described  above  the  corpuscles  were  always 
tested  in  the  form  of  a  washed  suspension.  This  precaution 
was  taken  on  the  supposition  that  the  presence  of  any  of  the 
serum  belonging  to  the  corpuscles  might  interfere  with  the 
reaction.  If,  however,  the  amount  of  this  serum  be  small 
relatively  to  the  amount  of  the  test  serum,  then  no  such 
interference  takes  place. 

The  ordinary  clinical  method  of  testing  may  therefore 
be  greatly  simplified,  and  the  one  commonly  used  at  the 
present  time  is  as  follows  :  A  single  drop  of  each  of  the 
stock  sera  is  placed  on  two  glass  slides,  or,  better,  side  by 
side  upon  a  white  glazed  tile  or  plate,  the  numbers  of  the 
groups,  II  and  III,  being  written  above  the  respective 
drops.  The  lobe  of  the  ear  of  the  person  to  be  tested  is 
then  washed  with  ether  and  pricked  with  a  sterile  surgical 
needle.  A  small  quantity  of  the  blood  which  exudes  is 
taken  up  on  the  end  of  a  blunt  metal  or  glass  rod,  and  is 
intimately  mixed  with  the  drop  of  serum  under  the  number 
II.  The  end  of  the  rod  is  then  carefully  wiped  clean,  and 
a  similar  small  quantity  of  blood  is  mixed  with  the  drop  of 
serum  marked  III.  The  amount  of  blood  to  be  used  should 
not  be  so  great  as  to  make  the  drop  of  too  deep  a  colour, 
which  may  interfere  with  observation  of  the  reaction,  but 


GROUP    II. 
SERUM 


CROUP    III. 
SERUM 


GROUP  I. 
CORPUSCLES 


AGGLUTIhlATIOM 


AGGLUTItNATIOH 


GROUP  II. 
CORPUXLtS 


NO    AGGLUTIMATIOrs 


AGGLUTirSATIOM 


GROUP  III. 
CORPUSCLES 


AGGLUTirSATIOM 


NO    AGGLUTIINATION 


no   AGGLUTIMATIOM 


GROUP  nil. 
CORPUSCLE.5 


no  AGGLUTIMATlOn 


Fig.  7. — Tabulation  of  Serum  Reactions  as  seen  in  Hanging  Drops. 

105 


106  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

it  should  be  enough  to  impart  to  it  a  very  definite  red  tint. 
The  slide  or  tile  is  then  gently  rocked,  so  that  some  slight 
movement  is  imparted  to  the  drops,  which  are  at  the  same 
time  closely  watched  in  a  good  light.  The  agglutinating 
reaction  is  readily  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  especially 
against  the  white  background  provided  by  the  tile.  If 
the  serum  be  properly  active,  the  agglutination  of  the 
corpuscles  begins  to  be  apparent  as  a  definite  granular 
appearance  resembling  brick  dust  within  a  minute  of 
mixing.  With  a  little  practice  this  appearance  is  easily 
recognized,  but  it  must  be  distinguished  from  the  appear- 
ance produced  by  a  mechanical  gravitation  of  the  corpuscles 
towards  the  centre  of  the  drop.  If  agglutination  is  taking 
place,  the  granulation  appears  simultaneously  throughout 
the  drop,  and  not  only  in  the  centre.  With  an  active  serum 
the  process  may  proceed  rapidly,  so  that  in  less  than  five 
minutes  the  corpuscles  have  been  aggregated  into  a  few 
irregular  masses  ;  often  it  stops  short  of  this,  but  the  drop 
presents,  nevertheless,  a  coarsely  granular  appearance  which 
is  quite  unmistakable.  If  no  granulation  can  be  seen  at 
the  end  of  five  minutes,  it  can  be  assumed  that  the  test  is 
negative  for  the  serum  of  that  group,  and  the  group  of  the 
corpuscles  may  be  deduced  upon  the  principles  already 
explained. 

The  test  carried  out  in  this  way  is  admittedly  not 
susceptible  of  the  same  finesse  as  if  it  were  done  with  the 
assistance  of  the  hanging  drop,  the  incubator,  and  the 
microscope  ;  nevertheless,  my  own  experience  in  a  large 
number  of  cases  has  shown  that,  clinically,  this  test  may 
be  relied  upon,  and  the  same  view  has  been  expressed  by 
other  writers  on  the  subject.  Very  seldom  is  there  any 
doubt  as  to  the  presence  or  absence  of  agglutination. 
When  doubt  exists,  it  is  easy  to  repeat  the  test  and  obtain 
a  confirmation  of  the  result.  It  may  perhaps  be  urged 
that  this  test  is  quite  insufficient  for  eliminating  the 
slighter  degrees  of  incompatibility  which  have  produced 
serious  results  when  the  transfusion  has  been  repeated 


THE   CHOICE   OF   BLOOD   DONOR  107 

several  times.  But  in  the  cases  reported,  the  blood  that 
was  used  had  not  shown  any  agglutination  even  when  most 
carefully  observed  under  the  microscope.  It  seems,  there- 
fore, that  the  results  were  probably  due  to  another 
factor,  as  already  suggested  (see  p.  57),  which  the  more 
elaborate  test  failed  to  eliminate.  The  efficiency  of  the 
rapid  test  is  therefore  not  invalidated.  It  is,  nevertheless, 
in  the  present  state  of  knowledge,  a  wise  precaution  to 
perform  the  direct  test  between  patient  and  donor  in 
addition  to  the  group  test  when  circumstances  permit.  It 
is  essential  when  the  patient  is  suffering  from  any  form  of 
blood  disease.  It  is  unnecessary  when  the  transfusion  is 
to  be  performed  as  a  life-saving  operation  in  haemorrhage 
or  shock. 


CHAPTER  VII 

THE    METHODS    OF   BLOOD    TRANSFUSION 

Some  reference  has  already  been  made  in  the  first 
chapter  to  the  rapid  development  in  recent  years  of  the 
technique  of  performing  a  blood  transfusion.  The  earlier 
operators,  owing  to  the  difficulties  introduced  by  the 
coagulation  of  blood  outside  the  body,  were  constrained 
to  make  use  of  some  method  of  direct  transfusion,  the  blood 
flowing  directly  from  an  artery  of  the  donor  into  the 
patient's  veins.  This  has  now  been  largely  replaced  by  one 
of  the  methods  of  indirect  transfusion,  the  blood  being 
withdrawn  from  the  donor  into  a  vessel  in  which  clotting 
is  delayed  or  prevented,  and  then  injected  or  allowed 
to  run  into  the  patient's  circulation. 

Direct  Transfusion. — The  obvious  method  of  performing 
a  direct  transfusion  is  by  making  an  end-to-end  anasto- 
mosis between  an  artery  of  the  donor  and  a  vein  of  the 
recipient.  The  most  readily  accessible  artery  is  the  radial 
at  the  wrist,  and  this  is  indeed  almost  the  only  artery  that 
is  available.  The  most  accessible  vein  is  the  median  basilic 
or  the  median  cephalic  at  the  elbow.  The  operation  of 
end-to-end  anastomosis,  using  an  artery  of  so  small  a 
calibre  as  the  radial  artery  at  the  wrist  is  usually  found  to 
be,  is  one  of  great  technical  difficulty ;  this  effectually 
prevented  transfusion  from  being  used  at  all  frequently. 
A  modification  has  been  used  by  Sauerbruch  and  others, 
in  which  the  end  of  the  radial  artery  is  drawn  into  the 
lumen  of  the  vein  through  a  slit  in  its  wall.  A  suture  is 
passed  through  the  radial  artery  close  to  its  cut  end,  and 
the  needle  is  then  passed  through  the  slit  in  the  vein  and 

108 


METHODS   OF  BLOOD  TRANSFUSION      109 

out  again  through  the  wall  of  the  vein  an  inch  or  so  higher 
up.  Traction  on  the  suture  then  pulls  the  artery  into  the 
vein.  The  artery  has  meanwhile  been  temporarily  occluded 
by  a  clip,  which  is  removed  when  the  artery  is  inside  the 
vein,  so  that  the  blood  can  then  flow  from  one  to  the  other. 
This  is  easier  to  do  than  the  anastomosis,  but,  in  addition 
to  the  other  objections  to  direct  transfusion  to  be  mentioned 
presently,  the  difficulty  occurs  of  occlusion  of  the  artery  by 
the  physiological  process  of  inversion  of  its  coats  at  the 
cut  end.  This  is  likely  to  happen  before  much  blood  has 
passed,  so  that  apparent  success  at  first  is  often  not 
maintained.  Sauerbruch  claimed  that  the  amount  of 
blood  that  had  passed  could  be  estimated  by  measuring 
the  time  taken  for  1  cc.  of  blood  to  flow  from  the  artery 
before  it  was  introduced  into  the  vein  ;  but  there  is  no 
proof  that  the  rate  of  flow  remains  constant. 

If  direct  transfusion  be  desired,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
that  Crile's  method,  introduced  some  fifteen  years  ago,  is 
the  best  to  employ.  After  much  patient  work  Crile  per- 
fected a  method  of  anastomosis  which  ensures  that  no 
occlusion  of  the  vessels  can  take  place  at  the  site  of  junction. 
This  depends  on  the  use  of  a  short  silver  tube,  through 
which  the  end  of  the  artery  is  threaded.  The  artery  is 
then  pulled  back  again  outside  the  tube  in  the  form  of  a 
cuff  and  fixed  in  position.  The  end  of  the  artery  has  thus 
been  made  rigid,  and  over  this  the  vein  is  pulled  in  its  turn 
and  fixed  by  a  ligature.  A  watertight  junction  is  thus 
made,  and  blood  can  flow  through  it  without  interruption — 
unless  clotting  takes  place  in  the  vessels  as  the  result  of 
handling  and  injury  to  their  walls.  This  method  has  been 
extensively  used  in  America,  and  it  was  the  first  to  render 
the  operation  of  transfusion  a  comparatively  popular  one. 

Various  other  devices  for  achieving  the  same  result  have 
been  elaborated  by  other  workers,  and  attention  may  be 
drawn  to  those  of  Elsberg  and  Bernheim,  both  of  which  are 
described  in  the  book  by  the  latter  on  "  Blood  Trans- 
fusion."    During  the  war  a  simpler  method  was  introduced 


110  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

by  Colonel  Andrew  Fullerton,  who,  working  at  a  Base 
Hospital  in  France,  found  that  he  could  get  good  results  by 
employing  a  thin  rubber  tube  with  a  small  silver  cannula 
at  either  end.  The  apparatus  was  first  coated  on  the 
inside  with  a  thin  layer  of  paraffin  wax,  in  order  to  dis- 
courage clotting  within  the  tube,  and  the  cannulas  were 
introduced  into  the  donor's  artery  and  the  recipient's  vein 
respectively.  The  blood  could  then  flow  freely  from  one 
to  the  other.  The  fact  that  blood  was  being  transmitted 
was  taken  to  be  proved  by  the  visible  pulsation  of  the  thin 
rubber  connecting-tube  synchronously  with  the  arterial 
pulsations.  The  disappearance  of  this  was  assumed  to  be 
evidence  that  clotting  had  occurred.  This  method  was 
described  by  Colonel  Fullerton  to  the  surgeons  working  at 
the  Casualty  Clearing  Stations,  where  blood  transfusion 
was  likely  to  be  of  most  service,  but  it  was  never  used 
extensively.  The  coating  of  the  inside  of  the  tube  with 
paraffin  is  in  itself  an  operation  of  some  difficulty.  Under 
conditions  in  which  any  loss  of  time  could  not  be  permitted, 
success  by  this  method  was  not  attained  with  sufficient 
certainty,  and  it  was  shortly  afterwards  replaced  by  the 
more  satisfactory  methods  described  below.  The  most 
recent  work  on  direct  transfusion  has  been  done  by  J.  M. 
Graham  at  Edinburgh,  who  has  however  reached  the  con- 
clusion that  the  technique  is  always  more  difficult  than 
that  of  indirect  transfusion. 

It  can  easily  be  seen,  therefore,  that  all  the  known 
methods  of  direct  blood  transfusion  present  great  technical 
difficulty,  which  renders  the  method  unsuitable  for  general 
use.  There  are,  in  addition,  certain  other  objections  to  it 
of  an  obvious  nature.  It  is,  in  the  first  place,  impossible 
to  measure  the  amount  of  blood  which  has  passed  from  the 
donor  to  the  recipient.  Sometimes  an  indication  may  be 
obtained  from  the  evident  improvement  in  the  condition 
of  the  patient,  accompanied  by  the  signs  of  loss  of  blood 
in  the  donor.  More  often  clotting  takes  place,  unknown 
to  the  operator,  at  some  point,  with  the  result  that  blood 


METHODS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       111 

ceases  to  pass  a  considerable  time  before  the  end  of  the 
operation,  and  the  patient  has  consequently  received  very 
much  less  blood  than  is  supposed.  It  has  been  claimed  by 
Libman  and  Ottenberg  that  the  amount  of  blood  trans- 
ferred may  be  estimated  by  weighing  the  donor  before  and 
after  the  operation.  This  presupposes  that  a  very  accurate 
weighing  machine  is  easily  available,  which  usually  is  not 
the  case. 

A  second  objection  is  the  extent  of  the  injury  which  is 
necessarily  inflicted  on  the  donor.  His  radial  artery  must 
be  exposed  through  an  incision  of  considerable  length,  and 
must  be  ligatured  at  the  conclusion  of  the  process.  The 
operation  becomes,  therefore,  a  matter  of  some  moment  to 
the  donor,  who  will  be  permanently  scarred,  and  can  under 
no  circumstances  be  used  for  transfusion  more  than  twice. 
A  third  objection  is  that  the  transfusion  cannot  be  done 
with  due  regard  to  the  condition  of  the  patient.  A  delicate 
and  difficult  operation  has  to  be  performed  with  the  donor 
and  recipient  lying  side  by  side,  their  arms  close  together. 
It  is  therefore  almost  imperative  that  both  should  be  on 
operating-tables  of  a  convenient  height.  Often,  however, 
with  an  exsanguinated  patient  it  is  very  important  that  he 
should  not  be  moved  from  his  bed,  but  as  a  bedside  opera- 
tion direct  transfusion  becomes  difficult  indeed  ! 

A  final  objection  is  that  in  some  people  the  radial  artery 
is  of  very  small  calibre,  so  that  when  all  preparations  have 
been  made,  and  the  artery  exposed,  it  is  found  to  be  quite 
impossible  to  proceed.  Another  element  of  uncertainty  is 
thus  introduced. 

There  is,  therefore,  little  to  be  said  in  favour  of  direct 
transfusion,  and  much  to  be  urged  against  it.  This  method 
has,  indeed,  in  my  own  opinion,  come  to  be  of  historical 
interest  only.  For  this  reason  the  different  methods  have 
only  been  very  briefly  described.  For  more  detailed 
information,  reference  must  be  made  to  the  various  original 
communications,  which  will  be  found  in  the  Bibliography. 
Indirect    Transfusion.  —  The    methods    of    indirect 


112  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

transfusion  may  be  divided  into  those  which  depend  upon 
the  use  of  an  anticoagulant  mixed  with  the  blood  and  those 
in  which  the  blood  is  given  unaltered.  The  technique  of 
either  process  is  simple  compared  with  that  of  direct 
transfusion,  though  any  method  which  makes  use  of  whole 
blood  can  never  be  quite  as  free  from  uncertainty  or 
difficulty  as  one  which  introduces  the  use  of  an  anticoagu- 
lant. If  the  blood  is  prevented  from  clotting,  the  chief 
cause  of  failure  in  performing  blood  transfusions  is  removed. 
"With  any  whole-blood  method  of  transfusion  speed  is 
exceedingly  important,  frequent  practice  is  a  very  great 
advantage,  and  it  is  essential,  as  with  direct  transfusion, 
that  the  donor  and  recipient  should  be  in  close  proximity 
to  one  another,  if  not  actually  side  by  side. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  use  of  an  anticoagulant  renders 
speed  and  frequent  practice  of  less  account.  The  blood 
can  be  drawn,  and  can  then  be  put  on  one  side  until  the 
best  moment  for  giving  it  has  arrived.  Due  regard  may 
be  had  to  the  patient's  condition,  since  the  blood  can  be 
carried  about  and  can  be  given  at  leisure  to  the  patient  in 
his  bed  without  disturbing  him  and  almost  without  his 
knowing  it.  The  donor,  too,  is  not  exposed  to  the  mental 
shock  of  lying  for  some  time  side  by  side  with  a  patient  who 
may  be  in  extremis,  or  may  even  expire  during  the  operation. 

There  are,  however,  those  who  consider  that  the  use  of 
whole  blood,  instead  of  blood  which  has  been  chemically 
treated,  has  advantages  which  outweigh  the  possible  dis- 
advantages mentioned  above.  Two  methods  of  using 
whole  blood  are,  therefore,  described  first ;  the  use  of 
anticoagulants  is  then  described  in  detail,  and  their 
advantages  and  possible  dangers  are  enlarged  upon. 

Whole  Blood  Transfusion  with  Syringes. — It  is 
obvious  that,  if  blood  can  be  drawn  from  the  donor's  vein 
into  a  glass  syringe  and  injected  into  the  recipient  so 
rapidly  that  clotting  has  no  time  to  occur,  then  a  trans- 
fusion of  any  quantity  of  blood  that  may  be  wished  can  be 
given  by  this  simple  means.     The  measure  of  the  amount 


METHODS   OF  BLOOD  TRANSFUSION      113 

of  blood  transfused  is  given  by  the  number  of  syringes  that 
have  been  filled  and  emptied.  This  method  has  been 
successfully  used  by  several  workers,  and  it  has  the 
advantage  that  no  very  special  apparatus  is  necessary. 
It  does,  however,  require  that  several  syringes,  and  more 
than  one  assistant,  should  be  available,  since  clotting  will 
take  place  in  the  syringes,  unless  they  be  frequently  washed 
out.  There  is  also  the  possibility  that  clotting  may  take 
place  in  the  needle  which  is  introduced  into  the  donor's 
vein,  since  this  cannot  be  withdrawn  and  replaced  for  each 
syringeful  of  blood  that  is  transferred.  With  practice, 
however,  and  with  good  assistants,  the  process  can  be  done 
quickly  enough  to  avoid  this.  Wide -bore  needles  with 
short  rubber  connexions  are  introduced  into  the  veins  of 
donor  and  recipient ;  if,  as  often  happens,  this  is  difficult 
to  do  through  the  skin  in  the  case  of  the  recipient,  his  vein 
must  first  be  exposed  through  an  incision  and  a  glass  or 
metal  cannula  introduced  into  it.  The  operator  then  fills 
the  syringes  with  blood  in  quick  succession  and  hands  them 
to  his  first  assistant,  who  injects  the  blood  into  the  recipient. 
Blood  is  prevented  from  escaping  from  the  needles  when 
the  syringes  are  disconnected  by  nipping  the  rubber  con- 
nexions with  the  fingers.  The  first  assistant  passes  the 
empty  syringes  to  the  second  assistant,  who  washes  them 
out  with  normal  saline,  and  hands  them  back  if  needed  to 
the  operator.  This  can  be  done  with  six  20  cc.  syringes 
used  in  rotation,  possibly  with  only  four. 

The  most  recent  description  of  this  method  has  been 
published  by  J.  M.  Graham  of  Edinburgh,  who  has  intro- 
duced an  improved  form  of  needle.  This  consists  of  a 
double  tube  ;  the  inner  tube  has  a  needle  point  which  is 
used  for  puncturing  the  vein,  and  can  be  withdrawn  into 
the  blunt  outer  tube  when  the  vein  has  been  entered. 
Any  further  wounding  of  the  vein  is  thus  avoided.  In 
addition,  movement  of  the  needle-cannula  is  prevented  by 
a  bull-dog  forceps  attachment,  which  is  clipped  to  the  skin. 
Graham  finds  it  advisable  to  lubricate  the  cannulae  and 
8 


114  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

syringes  with  vaseline  before  being  used.  He  also  states 
that :  "As  the  absence  of  clotting  depends  upon  the 
rapidity  with  which  the  syringes  are  filled  and  emptied, 
a  series  of  syringes  should  be  used  in  strict  rotation,  and 
all  trace  of  blood  must  be  washed  out  with  saline  before 
the  syringes  are  used  again.  One  or  two  additional 
assistants  are  necessary  for  this  method."  The  dis- 
advantages are  evident,  and  it  is  not  suitable  for  general  use. 

A  modification  of  the  method  has  been  described  by 
Unger,  in  which  only  one  syringe  is  used.  The  barrel  of 
this  is  cooled  by  an  ether  spray  so  that  clotting  is  dis- 
couraged or  prevented. 

Whole  Blood  Transfusion  with  Kimpton's  Tube. — The 
principle  of  this  method  depends  upon  the  use  of  paraffin 
wax  as  a  coating  for  the  vessel  into  which  the  blood  is 
drawn,  so  that  clotting  is  prevented  or  greatly  delayed. 
The  form  of  the  vessel  has  been  modified  by  different 
workers,  but  the  essentials  are  the  same  in  each.  One 
form  of  the  apparatus,  known  as  the  Kimpton-Brown  tube, 
is  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  diagram.  It  consists 
of  a  graduated  glass  cylinder,  of  about  700  cc.  capacity,  the 
lower  end  of  which  is  drawn  out  into  a  cannula  point  at  an 
acute  angle  with  the  body  of  the  cylinder  ;  the  point  is  of 
a  size  convenient  for  introducing  into  a  vein  and  its  bore 
large  enough  to  allow  of  a  free  flow  of  blood  through  it. 
Near  the  upper  end  is  a  side  tube  to  which  a  rubber  tube 
can  be  attached,  and  an  opening  at  the  top  is  closed  by  a 
rubber  bung.  An  ordinary  rubber  double-bulb  bellows 
is  the  only  other  apparatus  that  is  needed. 

The  glass  vessel  is  first  sterilized  in  the  autoclave,  and 
then  it  must  be  coated  on  the  inside  with  a  thin  layer  of 
paraffin  wax.  The  whole  success  of  this  method  depends 
upon  this  wax  coating  being  absolutely  complete  right  up 
to  the  tip  of  the  cannula  at  the  bottom.  If  the  tiniest  area 
of  glass  be  left  exposed  in  the  cannula,  the  process  will  fail. 
The  production  of  this  perfect  wax  coating  used  to  be 
exceedingly  difficult  of  attainment  without  very  frequent 


Fig.  8. — Kimpton-Brown  Tube 


115 


116  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

practice.  The  apparatus  was  first  raised  to  exactly  the 
right  temperature  ;  sterile,  melted  paraffin  was  then  put 
into  it,  and  distributed  evenly  over  the  surface,  excess  being 
allowed  to  run  out.  The  apparatus  was  then  cooled  down, 
and  could  be  put  away  in  a  sterile  towel  ready  for  use, 
great  care  being  taken  that  the  lumen  of  the  cannula  was 
patent  and  not  blocked  with  excess  of  wax.  A  simplifica- 
tion of  the  process  was  introduced  by  the  use  of  a  saturated 
solution  of  wax  in  ether.  This  solution  is  put  into  the 
vessel,  which  must  not  be  heated,  and  is  made  to  rim  all 
over  the  surface,  excess  as  before  being  allowed  to  escape 
through  the  lower  opening.  The  ether  quickly  evaporates, 
leaving  a  very  thin  and  perfect  film  of  wax  over  the  surface 
of  the  glass.  As  before,  it  must  be  ascertained  that  the 
lumen  of  the  cannula  is  patent.  The  apparatus  is  then 
ready  for  use. 

The  donor  and  recipient  need  not  be  lying  close  together, 
but  they  must  be  in  the  same  room.  A  vein  is  exposed  in 
the  arm  of  each  by  dissection  under  a  local  anaesthetic. 
The  operator  then  picks  up  the  vein  with  a  pair  of  dissect- 
ing forceps,  and  makes  an  oblique  cut  into  the  lumen  as 
in  the  diagram  on  p.  131.  A  flap  is  thus  made  which  is 
held  in  the  dissecting  forceps  in  the  left  hand  or  is  picked 
up  with  a  fine-pointed  pair  of  artery  forceps.  The  Kimp- 
ton's  tube  is  taken  in  the  right  hand,  and  the  point  of  the 
cannula  is  introduced  into  the  vein  ;  that  part  of  the 
lumen  lying  opposite  the  flap  serves  as  a  gutter  which 
guides  the  cannula  directly  into  the  lumen,  so  that  it  is 
introduced  without  any  fumbling  or  delay.  The  cannula 
is  pushed  on  so  that  its  widest  part  engages  the  whole 
circumference  of  the  vein,  forming  a  joint  through  which 
blood  does  not  leak.  The  cannula  having  been  pushed  well 
up  into  the  vein,  the  forceps  holding  the  venous  flap  may  be 
let  go.  At  the  same  time  an  assistant  grips  the  donor's 
upper  arm,  or  some  form  of  tourniquet  of  the  necessary 
degree  of  tightness  is  applied,  so  that  the  veins  become 
congested  without  obliteration  of  the  arterial  pulse.     Blood 


METHODS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       117 

now  flows  rapidly  into  the  tube,  and  the  venous  pressure 
is  always  sufficient  to  overcome  the  counter-pressure  of  the 
increasing  head  of  fluid  in  the  tube.  It  is  imnecessary, 
therefore,  to  produce  any  negative  pressure  within  the  tube 
with  a  reversed  Higginson's  syringe  or  an  exhaustion 
pump,  which  has  been  used  by  some  workers.  Blood  is 
allowed  to  flow  into  the  tube  until  the  requisite  amount 
has  been  obtained.  The  venous  congestion  is  then  released, 
and  at  the  same  time  the  tube  and  cannula,  held  at  the 
lower  end  with  the  right  hand  in  such  manner  that  the 
index  finger  is  free,  is  withdrawn  from  the  vein.  At  the 
moment  of  withdrawal  the  end  of  the  cannula  is  closed  with 
the  right  index  finger.  To  prevent  haemorrhage  from  the 
donor's  vein,  a  ligature  previously  put  round  it  is  tied  by 
an  assistant,  or  pressure  on  it  is  maintained  with  a  sterile 
swab.  The  operator  must  now,  without  a  moment's  delay, 
carry  the  tube  filled  with  blood  over  to  the  recipient.  An 
opening  in  his  vein  is  made  by  an  assistant  in  the  same 
manner  as  already  described,  the  finger  is  removed  from 
the  cannula,  and  its  point  is  instantly  introduced  into  the 
vein.  It  is  now  necessary  to  produce  some  degree  of 
positive  pressure  in  the  tube  to  ensure  that  the  blood  shall 
at  once  begin  to  flow  steadily  into  the  vein.  This  is  done 
with  a  rubber  bellows,  attached  by  an  assistant  to  the 
upper  side  tube,  and  the  level  of  the  blood  in  the  tube 
should  at  once  begin  to  fall.  Great  care  must  be  taken 
that  the  positive  pressure  is  released  before  the  tube  is 
completely  emptied  of  blood  in  order  to  avoid  the  obvious 
danger  of  the  entry  of  air  into  the  patient's  vein.  When 
the  tube  is  nearly  empty  it  is  withdrawn,  the  vein  is 
ligatured,  and  the  wounds  in  donor  and  recipient  are 
sutured.  The  most  convenient  pattern  of  Kimpton-Brown 
tube  holds  only  about  500  cc.  of  blood,  so  that  if  more  is 
needed,  the  process  must  be  repeated. 

There  is  virtually  only  one  cause  of  failure  in  transfusion 
by  this  method,  and  that  is  the  occurrence  of  clotting  in 
the  cannula  or  at  the  bottom  of  the  tube.     If  it  does  occur 


118  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

at  any  stage  of  the  operation,  it  cannot  be  remedied.  It 
may  happen  when  the  tube  is  nearly  full ;  if  so,  the  blood 
that  has  been  withdrawn  cannot  be  used.  Clotting  may 
be  due  to  an  imperfection  in  the  paraffin  coating  on  the 
glass,  but  if  there  is  any  delay  from  any  cause,  it  may  take 
place  independently  of  this.  The  method  is  therefore 
never  absolutely  certain  of  success  even  in  the  hands  of  an 
expert,  and  for  general  use  it  is  certainly  unsuitable.  It 
was  introduced  into  the  British  Army  by  some  of  the 
American  surgeons  in  1917,  and  was  used  by  the  writer 
under  the  guidance  of  Major  Alton  of  the  Harvard  Medical 
Unit  during  the  first  battle  of  Cambrai  with  good  results. 
Many  of  the  English  surgeons,  however,  soon  abandoned 
it  as  a  routine  method  in  favour  of  anticoagulants.  There 
are  other  objections  to  it  besides  its  uncertainty.  A  vein 
must  be  exposed  by  dissection  in  both  donor  and  recipient, 
so  that  avoidable  injury  is  inflicted  on  the  former.  It  is 
not  a  perfectly  clean  method,  some  blood  necessarily 
escaping  at  each  successive  stage  in  the  process,  though  an 
expert  can  reduce  this  to  a  minimum.  In  the  hands  of  a 
novice  it  may  occasion  a  very  bloody  scene.  The  whole 
operation  is  one  of  urgency,  and  the  best  interests  of  donor 
and  recipient  cannot  always  be  considered. 

Modifications  have  been  introduced,  such  as  that  of 
Vincent,  who  uses  an  attachment  with  a  needle  instead  of 
the  glass  cannula  point.  This  obviates  some  of  the 
objections,  but  introduces  other  difficulties,  such  as  the 
necessity  for  coating  the  inside  of  the  needle  with  paraffin 
wax.  The  technique  can  certainly  be  acquired,  and  the 
method  has  rendered  excellent  service  in  the  past,  but  it 
has  no  obvious  advantages  except  the  uncertain  one  of 
avoiding  chemical  treatment  of  the  blood. 

Transfusion  with  Anticoagulants. — It  will  have 
become  evident  from  the  descriptions  of  the  transfusion  of 
whole  blood  already  given,  how  great  a  difficulty  is 
introduced  into  the  technique  of  these  methods  by  the 
physiological  process  of  clotting  in  blood  outside  the  body. 


METHODS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       119 

It  is  clear  how  much  the  process  of  transfusion  would  be 
simplified  if  the  clotting  were  to  be  prevented.  Something 
has  already  been  said  in  the  historical  sketch  of  the  various 
means  by  which  this  problem  was  attacked,  and  it  need 
only  be  stated  here  that  the  most  suitable  substance  for 
this  purpose  has  been  found  to  be  sodium  citrate.  This 
method  was  introduced  by  Lewisohn  as  recently  as  1915, 
and  it  soon  became  the  method  of  choice  among  most  of 
those  who  tried  it. 

The  process  of  the  formation  of  a  blood  clot  has  always 
been  one  of  the  great  problems  of  physiology,  and  numerous 
theories  have  been  propounded  to  explain  it.  The  theory 
accepted  at  the  present  time  regards  the  process  as  a 
complicated  one  depending  on  the  presence  in  the  blood  of 
a  number  of  different  factors.  This  theoretical  explana- 
tion may  be  represented  diagrammatically  as  follows : 

Plasma  TtsQues    and  piabeiebQ 

Prothrombtn         Ca  salts  Thromboklnase 

Fibrinogen  ^Thrombin 


FLbrlrt 


The  clot  consists  of  fibrin  in  which  blood  corpuscles  are 
entangled.  It  is  clear  that  if  any  one  of  the  reacting  agents 
can  be  removed  or  rendered  inert  the  clotting  cannot  take 
place.  There  is  only  one  inorganic  substance  taking  part 
in  the  reaction,  and  it  is  this  factor  that  is  more  easily 
removed  than  any  of  the  others.  Calcium  is  precipitated 
in  an  insoluble  form  by  various  chemical  reagents,  but  it  is 
obvious  that  for  purposes  of  transfusion  the  formation  of 
an  insoluble  precipitate  is  not  permissible.  It  is  therefore 
necessary  to  use  a  substance  which  will  form  a  soluble 


120  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

compound  with  the  calcium  and  which  is  at  the  same  time 
harmless  when  introduced  into  the  circulation.  The  only 
substance  which  has  been  found  at  present  to  possess  both 
these  properties  is  citrate  of  sodium.  This  forms  with 
calcium  a  soluble  double  salt,  in  which  calcium  is  rendered 
inert.  It  is  usually  held  that  the  calcium  to  be  active  must 
be  present  in  the  ionized  form,  but  recent  investigations  by 
Vines  into  the  role  of  calcium  tend  to  modify  slightly 
the  accepted  view  of  its  action.  He  has  shown  that  calcium 
is  present  in  the  blood  in  two  forms,  ionized  and  combined, 
and  that  both  take  part  in  the  coagulation  reaction.  He 
has,  in  addition,  demonstrated  that  a  quantity  of  anticoagu- 
lant sufficient  to  combine  with  the  whole  of  the  calcium 
present  in  a  given  quantity  of  blood  is  not  enough  to 
prevent  coagulation.  It  seems,  therefore,  that  the  anti- 
coagulant acts  by  combining  with  a  large  organic  molecule 
of  which  calcium  is  only  one  constituent,  and  not  merely 
by  combining  with  ionized  calcium.  The  organic  complex 
with  which  the  calcium  is  associated  possibly  corresponds 
to  the  thrombokinase  of  the  theory. 

About  the  time  that  the  use  of  the  citrated  blood  was 
introduced  by  Lewisohn,  some  investigations  upon  animals 
were  carried  out  by  Salant  and  Wise  in  order  to  determine 
how  sodium  citrate  was  dealt  with  and  eliminated  by  the 
body.  These  observers  found  that  it  very  quickly  dis- 
appeared from  the  circulation,  nearly  90  per  cent,  of  the 
salt  having  been  got  rid  of  within  ten  minutes  of  its 
intravenous  injection.  Part  of  the  citrate  is  destroyed  by 
oxidation,  and  the  rest,  30  to  40  per  cent.,  is  eliminated  by 
the  kidneys,  the  urine  being  rendered  alkaline.  It  was 
also  shown  that  if  a  very  large  dose  was  ^iven,  so  large  that 
toxic  symptoms  resulted,  the  effect  was  rapidly  obtained  ; 
but  that  if  the  toxic  dose  were  not  fatal,  no  remote  effects 
followed.     Its  injection  never  resulted  in  any  albuminuria. 

Lewisohn  showed  by  experiment  on  the  human  subject 
that  up  to  5  grammes  of  sodium  citrate  in  the  form  of  a 
0-2  per  cent,  solution  could  be  injected  intravenously  with- 


METHODS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       121 

out  any  harmful  results.  It  was  also  shown  that  this  con- 
centration of  the  salt  was  sufficient  to  prevent  clotting 
outside  the  body,  and  that  the  microscopic  appearance  of 
the  blood  cells  was  not  altered  by  the  admixture  of  this 
solution. 

Theoretically,  therefore,  the  amount  of  citrate  that 
should  be  used  as  an  anticoagulant  should  be  2  grammes 
for  1,000  cc.  of  blood,  or  100  cc.  of  2  per  cent,  solution  for 
900  cc.  of  blood.  In  practice  it  is  better  to  err  on  the  side 
of  safety  and  to  use  a  slight  excess  of  citrate.  This  amount 
of  citrate  should  be  used  for  the  750  cc.  of  blood  which 
constitutes  the  ordinary  maximum  amount  of  blood  used 
in  a  transfusion.  For  smaller  quantities  of  blood  the 
amount  of  citrate  may  be  correspondingly  reduced. 

The  use  of  citrated  blood  was  introduced  to  the  British 
Army  in  France  in  1917  by  Oswald  Robertson,  who  re- 
commended the  use  of  a  larger  amoimt  of  citrate  than  this. 
His  object  in  increasing  the  amount  was  to  produce  a 
solution  which,  when  diluted  with  the  correct  amount  of 
blood,  would  be  isotonic  with  it.  It  was  thought  that  a 
hypotonic  solution  might  result  in  some  damage  to  the 
red  corpuscles  by  osmosis,  and  Robertson  therefore  re- 
commended the  use  of  160  cc.  of  a  3-8  per  cent,  solution  of 
citrate,  which,  when  mixed  with  750  cc.  of  blood,  will  give 
a  solution  of  which  the  osmotic  pressure  equals  that  of 
0*9  per  cent,  saline  solution.  It  may  be  doubted,  however, 
whether  this  consideration  is  of  more  than  theoretical 
importance.  There  can  be  little  doubt  that  in  practice 
the  effect  of  a  slightly  hypotonic  solution,  such  as  is  given 
by  the  100  cc.  of  2  per  cent,  solution  of  citrate,  is  negligible 
as  regards  destruction  of  corpuscles.  If,  however,  it  be 
thought  necessary,  an  isotonic  solution  may  be  produced 
by  the  addition  of  sodium  chloride.  Other  considerations, 
as  will  be  seen  shortly,  weigh  in  favour  of  giving  the 
smaller  amount  of  citrate.  The  dosage  to  be  recommended, 
therefore,  on  practical  and  experimental  grounds  is  2 
grammes  of  citrate  in  100  cc.  of  water  for  900  cc.  of  blood. 


122  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

or  1  gramme  of  citrate  in  50  ec.  of  water  for  450  cc.  of  blood 
or  less.  These  proportions  need  not  be  observed  very 
accurately.  Latitude  may  be  used  in  either  direction 
without  harming  either  the  transfused  blood  or  the 
patient. 

It  has  been  stated  above  that  sodium  citrate  introduced 
into  the  circulation  in  small  quantities,  such  as  are  sufficient 
for  anticoagulant  purposes,  is  non -toxic  to  man.  In  the 
light,  however,  of  the  extended  experience  of  the  last  four 
years,  it  is  seen  to  be  possible  that  this  statement  may  not 
be  quite  literally  true.  Probably  there  is  an  individual 
variation  in  the  tolerance  of  different  people  to  sodium 
citrate.  Certainly  in  some  cases  a  reaction  follows  the 
injection  of  citrated  blood.  The  symptoms  of  this  reaction 
are  a  slight  headache,  a  rise  in  temperature  to  two  or  three 
degrees  above  normal,  sometimes  accompanied  by  a  rigor 
or  a  sensation  of  chill,  and  an  increase  in  the  pulse  rate. 
The  effect  is,  however,  always  very  transitory,  lasting  only 
two  or  three  hours,  and  is  never,  in  my  own  experience, 
attended  by  any  symptoms  which  need  give  rise  to  anxiety 
for  the  patient's  welfare  ;  nor  does  it  in  any  way  prejudice 
the  therapeutic  results  of  the  transfusion. 

That  the  reaction  is  caused  by  the  citrate  and  not  by 
another  constituent  of  the  transfused  blood  has  been 
believed  by  several  observers.  In  a  case  seen  by  the  writer 
a  slight  citrate  reaction  occurred  in  a  youth  who  acted  as 
blood  donor.  The  transfusion  was  carried  out  by  a  modi- 
fication of  the  syringe  method,  which  involved  the  injection 
at  intervals  of  a  syringeful  of  citrate  solution  into  the 
donor's  circulation.  The  possibility  that  the  reaction  was 
produced  by  another  factor  was  therefore  not  present  in 
this  instance. 

Nevertheless,  it  must  be  admitted  that  citrate  has  not 
yet  been  absolutely  proved  to  be  the  cause  of  this  slight 
reaction  in  all  the  cases  in  which  it  occurs.  Evidence  has, 
indeed,  been  brought  forward  by  Lewisohn  and  by  Meleney 
to  show  that  citrate  is  definitely  not  responsible  for  the 


METHODS   OF  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       123 

reaction.  The  statement  is  made  that  some  reaction  occurs 
after  10  per  cent,  of  all  transfusions, and  that  this  percentage 
is  unaffected  whether  whole  blood  or  citrated  blood  is  used. 
Lewisohn  has  himself  investigated  the  effects  in  a  long 
series  of  parallel  cases  in  which  different  methods  were 
employed,  and  he  reports  that  the  results  following  the  use 
of  citrated  blood  were  as  good  as  with  any  other  method. 
Drinker  states  that  reactions  follow  the  use  of  citrated 
blood  slightly  more  often  than  they  do  that  of  whole  blood, 
but  this  has  not  been  confirmed.  He  was  unable  to  find  any 
impurity  in  the  citrate  that  might  be  held  responsible.  It 
is  quite  possible  that  all  the  reactions  observed  are  in 
reality  caused  by  the  "  minor  agglutinins  "  mentioned  on 
p.  73.  Meleney  has  noticed  that  the  blood  of  some 
donors  is  more  likely  to  produce  a  reaction  than  that  of 
others  ;  this  suggests  that  the  responsibility  rests  with  the 
blood  and  not  with  the  citrate.  The  occurrence  of  a  toxic 
reaction  constitutes  the  only  real  objection  to  the  use  of 
citrated  blood  that  has  yet  been  brought  forward,  but  even 
this  has  not  yet  been  fully  substantiated  ;  in  any  case,  the 
reaction  is  of  so  little  importance  that  it  is  greatly  out- 
weighed by  the  numerous  advantages  that  are  conferred 
by  the  use  of  citrate.  The  possibility  that  a  citrate  reaction 
does  sometimes  occur  may  be  taken  as  an  indication  in 
favour  of  using  the  smaller  amount  recommended  by 
Lewisohn  rather  than  the  larger  dose  used  by  Robertson. 
The  experience  of  a  great  many  observers  has  established 
the  fact  that  citrated  blood  is  quite  as  effective  as  whole 
blood  in  its  therapeutic  effects. 

It  is  convenient  to  have  the  sodium  citrate  in  a  form 
ready  for  immediate  use.  I  have  therefore  been  in  the 
habit  of  keeping  it  in  the  solid  form  in  small  stoppered 
bottles,  each  containing  1  gramme  of  the  salt.  These  are 
sterilized  at  130°  C,  and  can  be  kept  indefinitely  until 
wanted.  If  450  cc.  of  blood  or  less  are  to  be  drawn,  the 
contents  of  one  bottle  is  shaken  into  the  transfusion  flask  ; 
50  cc.  (approximately  2  oz.)  of  sterile  warm  water  are 


124  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

added,  in  which  the  citrate  will  rapidly  dissolve.  If  more 
than  450  cc.  of  blood  is  to  be  used,  the  contents  of  two 
bottles  must  be  dissolved  in  100  cc.  or  4  ozs.  of  water. 
Alternatively  a  concentrated  solution  of  citrate  may  be 
kept  in  sealed  ampoules,  but  the  salt  is  less  stable  in 
solution,  and  I  prefer  to  keep  it  in  the  solid  form. 

The  ideal  method  of  blood  transfusion  seems  to  me  to 
require  that  it  shall  be  absolutely  certain  of  success,  that 
the  blood  shall  not  necessarily  be  injected  into  the  patient 
immediately  it  has  been  drawn,  so  that  other  circum- 
stances besides  the  demands  of  the  transfusion  operation 
can  be  considered,  and  that  no  injury  shall  be  done  to  the 
donor  beyond  the  puncturing  of  a  vein.  In  addition  to  this, 
the  method  should  be  so  simple  and  free  from  special 
apparatus  that  it  can  be  easily  learnt  and  carried  out  by 
one  operator  without  skilled  assistance.  All  these  require- 
ments are  fulfilled  by  the  citrate  method,  and  a  satisfactory 
method  of  performing  this  will  next  be  described.  As  will 
be  seen,  the  blood  can  be  drawn  with  the  minimum  amount 
of  injury  to  the  donor  ;  when  drawn,  it  can  be  put  on  one 
side,  for  several  hours  if  necessary,  and  then  given  to  the 
patient  at  whatever  may  be  judged  to  be  the  most  favour- 
able moment ;  the  whole  process  can  be  carried  out  by 
a  single  operator  without  any  assistance  ;  and  finally,  but 
little  practice  is  needed  to  make  success  certain  every  time. 

The  transfusion  apparatus  known  as  "  Robertson's 
bottle,"  first  described  by  Oswald  Robertson  in  1918,  is 
the  basis  of  most  citrate  methods.  This  could  be  easily 
improvised  in  a  field  laboratory,  and  was  extensively  used 
during  the  last  year  of  the  war.  The  apparatus  consisted 
of  a  glass  bottle  of  about  a  litre  capacity,  the  mouth  of 
which  was  closed  by  a  rubber  bung.  Through  the  bung 
three  glass  tubes  passed.  One,  connected  by  a  short 
rubber  tube  with  a  wide-bore  needle,  ended  about  an  inch 
from  the  bottom  of  the  bottle;  through  this  the  blood 
flowed  into  the  bottle.  A  second  tube,  which  reached  to 
the  angle  between  the  side  and  the  bottom  of  the  bottle. 


METHODS   OF  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       125 

was  connected  by  a  rubber  tube  with  a  cannula  ;  through 
this  the  blood  was  injected  into  the  patient.  The  third 
tube  reached  only  just  beyond  the  bung,  and  to  this  was 
attached  a  Higginson's  syringe,  by  means  of  which  either 
negative  or  positive  pressure  would  be  produced  inside  the 
bottle,  according  to  which  end  of  the  syringe  was  attached. 
It  is  unnecessary  to  describe  this  apparatus  any  further, 
for  it  was  found  by  myself  and  others  that  it  could  be  with 
advantage  modified  in  the  direction  of  simplicity.  It  is 
in  the  first  place  unnecessary  in  drawing  the  blood  to 
create  any  negative  pressure  if  a  needle  of  a  large  enough 
bore  (  2  or  3  mm.)  be  used,  and,  further,  it  is  an  advantage 
not  to  have  the  needle  attached  in  any  way  to  the  bottle, 
which,  as  the  blood  flows  into  it,  has  to  be  freely  agitated 
in  order  to  mix  the  blood  quickly  with  the  citrate.  The 
needle  may,  therefore,  be  attached  to  a  rubber  tube  of 
suitable  length  which  hangs  freely  into  the  collecting 
vessel  as  shown  in  the  diagram  on  p.  127.  The  third  tube 
of  "  Robertson's  bottle  "  may  be  dispensed  with  by  using 
a  conical  flask  provided  with  a  side  tube  to  which  a  rubber 
bellows  can  be  attached.  The  delivery  tube  is  therefore 
the  only  one  that  need  pass  through  the  rubber  bung. 
This  tube  should  have  an  angle  in  it  inside  the  flask  so  that 
its  lower  end  reaches  into  the  corner,  and  the  extremity 
should  be  groimd  down  obliquely  so  that,  although  it 
reaches  right  into  the  corner,  it  does  not  become  occluded 
by  too  accurate  contact  with  the  surface  of  the  vessel. 
By  this  means  any  wastage  of  blood  is  prevented.  I  have 
found  it  a  very  great  convenience  to  introduce  into  the 
delivery  tube  just  outside  the  flask  an  air-lock,^  the  value 
of  which  will  be  seen  shortly.  To  the  barrel  of  this  air-lock 
a  rubber  tube  with  a  cannula  is  attached.  Close  to  the 
cannula  is  some  form  of  clip.  The  whole  apparatus  is 
illustrated  in  the  figure  on  p.  133,  and  with  the  help  of  this 
its  use  may  be  readily  understood. 

^  This  embodies  the  same  principle  as  the  "  dropper  "  designed  by  R.  D, 
Laurie. 


126  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

The  particular  form  of  needle  which  I  have  been  in  the 
habit  of  using  is  shown  in  the  figure.  Its  lumen  has  a 
diameter  of  2  mm.,  and  the  steel  tube  ends  off  flush  with 
the  wide  shoulder  to  which  the  rubber  tube  is  attached. 
This  avoids  any  recess  within  the  needle  in  which  clotting 
may  begin.  The  point  of  the  needle  should  not  be  too  long, 
in  order  that  it  may  not  wound  the  opposite  side  of  the  vein 
when  it  has  been  introduced.     For  ease  of  introduction, 


Fig.  9. — Tbansfusion  Needle  (Actual  Size) 

however,  the  extremity  should  be  very  sharp  and  should 
have  cutting  edges.  The  point  and  edges  should  be  touched 
up  on  a  bevelled  hone  each  time  before  the  needle  is  used. 
The  needle  should  be  kept  ready  for  immediate  use  in 
liquid  paraffin.  I  have  found  that  the  most  convenient 
way  of  keeping  it  is  to  put  it  into  a  test-tube  containing 
paraffin,  which  is  plugged  with  cotton-wool  and  sterilized 
at  130°  C.  in  the  hot  air  oven  or  by  careful  heating  over 
a  flame.  In  this  way  the  needle  may  be  kept  ready  for  an 
indefinite  time  without  any  chance  of  its  rusting.  When 
it  is  taken  out  of  the  test-tube,  a  sterile  rubber  tube  is 
slipped  on  to  it  and  it  is  then  ready  for  use.  As  an  addi- 
tional precaution,  a  small  quantity  of  paraffin  may  be 
drawn  up  into  the  rubber  tube,  which  is  thus  lubricated  on 
the  inside,  but  this  is  not  absolutely  necessary.  The  tube 
must  be  sterilized  with  the  rest  of  the  apparatus,  as  rubber 
is  destroyed  by  liquid  paraffin. 

When  the  donor's  arm  has  been  congested  by  gripping 
it  above  the  elbow,  or  better  by  the  application  of  a 
tourniquet  ^  drawn  to  the  requisite  degree  of  tightness,  a 
suitable  vein,  usually  the  median  basilic,  is  chosen.     The 

1  A  very  convenient  form  of  tourniquet  is  that  designed  by  R.  G.  Canti. 
It  is  sold  by  Messrs.  Maw  &  Sons,  and  by  Messrs.  Allen  &  Hanburys. 


METHODS   OF  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       127 

area  of  puncture  is  washed  with  ether  and  a  very  small 
quantity,  2  to  3  minims,  of  2  per  cent,  novocain  is  intro- 
duced over  the  vein  with  a  hypodermic  syringe.  If  a  larger 
quantity  is  used,  the  vein  may  become  obscured,  but  this 


Fig.  10. — Drawing  Blood  for  Transfusion 

small  amount  may  be  dispersed  by  a  few  moments'  pressure 
with  the  finger,  and  is  usually  enough  to  anaesthetize  the 
very  small  area  of  skin  that  is  to  be  operated  upon.  A  tiny 
cut  in  the  skin  is  then  made  with  the  point  of  a  scalpel,  and 
the  needle  is  pushed  through  into  the  vein.  If  the  donor's 
vein  is  a  large  one,  such  as  is  usually  found  in  the  type  of 


128  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

donor  recommended  in  a  previous  chapter,  this  is  quite 
easy  to  do.  To  make  it  equally  easy  if  the  vein  be  smaller, 
it  has  been  suggested  by  Watson  that  the  vein  may  be 
fixed  by  pushing  an  ordinary  fine  sewing-needle  through 
the  skin  at  right  angles  to  the  line  of  the  vein,  into  the 
vein,  and  out  again  through  the  skin.  This  needle  is  held 
with  the  forefinger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  while  the 
right  hand  pushes  the  transfusion  needle  into  the  lumen 
of  the  vein  just  below  it.  When  the  needle  is  in  the  vein, 
the  blood  flows  out  rapidly  through  the  tube  which  hangs 
into  the  flask  containing  the  citrate,  as  illustrated.  This 
flask  is  held  by  an  assistant,  who  mixes  the  blood  with  the 
citrate  by  gently  swinging  it.  If  a  properly  adjusted 
tourniquet  is  kept  on  the  donor's  arm  while  he  works  his 
forearm  muscles  by  clasping  and  unclasping  his  hand,  a 
flow  of  blood  is  obtained  which  is  fast  enough  to  prevent 
clotting  in  the  needle,  and  indeed  is  quite  as  fast  as  most 
donors  can  tolerate.  Blood  up  to  1,000  cc.  may  be  col- 
lected in  this  way  in  ten  to  twenty  minutes.  If  the  vein 
be  of  a  good  size,  it  makes  no  difference  whether  the  needle 
be  inserted  towards  the  heart  or  away  from  it.  When 
enough  blood  has  been  collected,  the  tourniquet  is  removed, 
the  needle  is  withdrawn,  and  pressure  is  maintained  with 
a  sterile  swab  over  the  site  of  puncture  for  a  few  minutes. 
No  further  bleeding  will  take  place  after  this,  and  no  suture 
is  needed.  The  donor's  part  in  the  operation  is  then 
finished.  He  should  be  made  to  lie  on  his  back  for  a  few 
hours  afterwards,  and  given  plenty  of  fluids,  but  beyond 
this  no  special  precautions  are  necessary. 

When  the  blood  has  been  drawn,  and  has  been  satis- 
factorily mixed  with  the  citrate,  the  flask  may  be  put  on 
one  side  until  it  is  wanted,  its  mouth  having  been  closed 
with  a  cotton-wool  stopper.  If  the  blood  is  wanted  at 
once,  the  flask  may  be  stood  in  a  basin  of  warm  water  to 
keep  it  at  body  temperature.  Otherwise  it  may  be  allowed 
to  cool,  and  can  be  warmed  up  again  when  it  is  to  be 
administered.     The  citrated  blood  may  be  kept  for  a  con- 


METHODS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       129 

siderable  time  without  undergoing  any  appreciable  change 
in  its  therapeutic  value.  It  has  been  given  twelve  hours 
or  more  after  being  taken  with  the  same  good  effects  as  if 
it  had  been  newly  drawn.  During  the  war  advantage  was 
taken  of  this  fact  to  anticipate  during  quiet  times  the 
necessity  for  many  transfusions  during  times  of  stress. 
The  blood  was  drawn  in  some  quantity  and  kept  for 
several  hours  in  an  ice  chest,  so  that  it  was  readily  available 
during  the  expected  battle.  Recently  I  have  administered 
to  a  woman  who  had  been  operated  upon  for  a  ruptured 
ectopic  gestation  600  cc.  of  citrated  blood  which  had  been 
kept  for  twenty-seven  hours  at  room  temperature  after 
it  was  drawn.  The  effect  was  in  every  way  as  satisfactory 
as  if  it  had  been  freshly  drawn,  and  there  was  no  sign  of 
any  toxic  reaction.  So  far  as  I  know,  blood  had  not  ever 
been  kept  so  long  as  this  before  being  used,  but  there  does 
not  seem  to  be  any  objection  to  so  doing. 

When  the  blood  is  to  be  given,  the  delivery  tube  with  the 
rubber  bung  is  inserted  in  the  flask,  and  the  corpuscles 
which  have  gravitated  to  the  bottom  are  distributed  again 
through  the  fluid  by  gently  shaking  it.  In  administering 
the  blood,  it  is  very  often  advisable  to  inject  it  through  a 
cannula  which  is  tied  into  a  vein.  If  the  patient  is  a  woman, 
it  will  usually  be  found  that  the  veins  are  small  and  buried 
in  fat.  Also  many  transfusions  will  be  given  to  combat 
the  collapse  due  to  shock  and  haemorrhage,  in  which  case 
the  veins  will  be  empty  and  the  use  of  a  cannula  will  be 
found  essential.  Sometimes,  however,  the  patient  will 
have  large  veins  which  can  be  readily  distended  ;  this  may 
sometimes  be  encouraged  by  keeping  the  arm  for  half  an 
hour  beforehand  in  a  bath  of  hot  water.  Under  these 
circumstances  the  blood  can  be  given  through  a  needle 
introduced  in  exactly  the  same  way  as  has  already  been 
described  in  the  case  of  the  donor.  In  the  following 
account  of  the  process  it  will  be  assumed  that  the  use  of  a 
cannula  is  necessary. 

When  choosing  a  vein  in  the  patient, the  operator  must  be 
9 


130  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

guided  by  circumstances.  Usually  the  median  basilic  will 
be  the  most  convenient,  and  if,  in  a  collapsed  patient,  this 
is  invisible,  previous  knowledge  of  the  position  of  the  vein 
must  determine  the  site  of  the  incision.  If  another  opera- 
tion is  being  done  simultaneously  upon  the  upper  part  of 
the  patient's  body,  it  may  be  more  convenient  to  use  the 
internal  saphenous  vein  in  Scarpa's  triangle,  or  even  one 
of  the  superficial  veins  about  the  ankle.  In  administering 
blood  to  an  infant,  several  methods  have  been  used.  These 
are  described  separately  at  the  end  of  the  present  chapter. 
Whatever  vein  be  chosen,  the  line  of  the  incision  is  first 
infiltrated  with  a  small  quantity  of  a  2  per  cent,  solution  of 
novocain.     The  vein  is  then  dissected  out,  and  is  ligatured 


Fig.   11. — Transfusion  Cakkula  (Actual  Size) 

near  the  lower  end  of  the  incision.  A  ligature  is  also  put 
loosely  round  the  upper  part.  The  operator  now  takes  the 
barrel  of  the  air-lock,  which,  together  with  the  attached 
rubber  tube  and  cannula,  is  filled  with  0-9  per  cent,  saline 
solution,  all  air  bubbles  being  carefully  excluded.  The 
tube  is  clipped  near  the  cannula,  so  that  the  whole  system, 
including  the  cannula,  remains  filled  with  the  fluid.  The 
form  of  the  cannula  used  will  depend  upon  the  operator's 
particular  preference,  but  a  type  which  I  have  found  very 
convenient  is  shown  in  the  accompanying  figure.  It  is 
made  of  glass,  and  its  extremity  is  ground  down  at  an  angle, 
which  makes  it  very  easy  to  introduce  into  the  vein.  The 
slight  constriction  near  this  end  ensures  that  it  can  be 
securely  tied  into  the  vein  and  that  no  leakage  round  it 
shall  occur.  This  is  very  necessary,  because  there  is  some- 
times a  considerable  pressure  to  be  overcome,  due  to  veno- 
spasm  in  a  collapsed  patient,  before  the  blood  begins  to 
flow. 

An  oblique  cut  is  now  made  in  the  vein,  as  shown  in  the 


METHODS  OF  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION      131 

illustration,   the   cannula   is   introduced,    and   the   upper 
ligature  is  tied. 

The  barrel  of  the  air-lock,  with  its  contained  saline 
solution,  is  then  fixed  firmly  on  to  the  rubber  bung,  so  that 
the  nozzle  of  the  delivery  tube  projects  into  the  saline 
solution.  Meanwhile,  an  assistant  has  fixed  a  rubber 
bellows  on  to  the  side  tube  of  the  flask  ;  a  short  piece  of 
glass  tubing  loosely  packed  with  cotton-wool  should  be 
interposed  between  the  bellows  and  the  flask  to  prevent 
any  particles  of  dust  being  blown  over  into  the  flask  from 


Fig.   12. — Insertion  of  the  Cannula  in  a  Vein 

the  bellows,  which  is  not  sterilized.  The  clip  near  the 
cannula  is  released,  and  some  positive  pressure  is  produced 
inside  the  flask  by  means  of  the  bellows.  The  citrated 
blood  then  rises  in  the  delivery  tube,  and  a  corresponding 
quantity  of  saline  solution  is  displaced  from  the  air-lock 
into  the  patient's  circulation.  The  blood  then  flows  from 
the  nozzle  of  the  delivery  tube  into  the  air-lock,  and  the 
remainder  of  the  saline  solution  is  driven  on  into  the 
patient.  Finally  the  blood  flows  steadily  through  the 
cannula,  and  the  rate  at  which  it  is  flowing  can  be  observed 
in  the  air-lock. 

The  presence  of  this  air-lock  facilitates,  as  has  been  seen, 
the  introduction  of  the  cannula  into  the  vein,  since  there 
is  no  leakage  of  blood  to  obscure  the  operation.  In  addi- 
tion, the  operator  can  see  at  a  glance  whether  the  blood  is 


132  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

flowing  in  properly,  and  can  regulate  the  rate  of  flow  to  a 
nicety  by  varying  the  pressure  in  the  flask  by  means  of  the 
bellows.  If  a  very  slow  injection  is  required,  the  blood  can 
even  be  made  to  run  drop  by  drop.  If  the  patient  is 
suffering  from  acute  anaemia,  the  blood  can  be  pumped  in 
rapidly,  750  cc.  of  blood  being  given  in  the  course  of 
twenty  minutes.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  patient  has  a 
plethora  of  fluids,  such  as  is  seen  in  some  cases  of  secondary 
anaemia,  the  blood  must  be  given  very  much  more  slowly 
than  this,  since  it  is  dangerous  rapidly  to  increase  the  blood 
volume.  A  half  to  three-quarters  of  an  hour  must  be 
occupied  in  giving  500  cc,  and  even  then  the  patient  may 
complain  of  a  sensation  of  tightness  in  the  chest  and  of 
dyspnoea,  due  to  embarrassment  of  the  right  heart  during 
the  transfusion.  This  complaint,  however,  is  usually 
transient,  and  will  disappear  quickly  if  the  injection  be 
stopped  for  a  few  minutes. 

It  has  been  said  that  the  lower  end  of  the  delivery  tube 
reaches  into  the  angle  between  the  side  and  the  bottom 
of  the  flask.  When  therefore  the  flask  is  nearly  empty,  it 
should  be  tilted  so  that  very  nearly  the  whole  of  the  blood 
can  be  forced  up  the  tube.  When  the  flask  is  quite  empty, 
the  blood  in  the  barrel  of  the  air-lock  must  be  carefully 
watched,  and  when  its  level  has  fallen  to  the  bottom  of 
this,  the  clip  must  be  applied  to  the  tube  above  the  cannula. 
By  this  means  no  blood  is  wasted  except  the  small 
quantity  which  remains  in  the  tube  below  the  air-lock. 
As  soon  as  the  tube  has  been  clipped  the  cannula  is  with- 
drawn, the  vein  is  ligatured  above  the  opening  into  its 
lumen,  and  the  edges  of  the  skin  incision  are  sutured. 

Transfusions  carried  out  in  this  way  can  be  performed 
with  uniform  success.  The  technique  is  simple  and 
straightforward  at  every  stage,  and  can  be  easily  demon- 
strated and  learnt.  It  is,  in  addition,  a  perfectly  clean 
process,  and  not  a  single  drop  of  blood  need  be  spilt.  Any 
method  which  involves  the  injection  of  blood  under 
pressure  is  open  to  the  objection  that  it  is  possible  to  over- 


METHODS    OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       133 

look  the  fact  that  the  flask  has  been  emptied  and  to  kill 
the  patient  by  injecting  air  into  his  veins.  This  can,  how- 
ever, only  happen  as  the  result  of  great  carelessness  on  the 
part  of  the  operator.     The  presence  of  the  air-lock  affords 


Fig.   13. — Injection  of  the  Blood,  showing  use  of  Air-lock 


an  additional  safeguard,  as  it  can  hardly  escape  the 
operator's  notice  that  blood  has  ceased  to  flow  from  the 
nozzle  of  the  delivery  tube. 

The  method  may  also  be  criticized  on  the  ground  that 
some  damage  is  caused  to  the  corpuscles  of  the  donor's 
blood  by  the  shaking  which  is  necessary  to  mix  it  with  the 


134  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

citrate  solution.  This  objection  is,  in  my  opinion,  theoreti- 
cal rather  than  practical.  If,  however,  it  be  desired  to 
avoid  any  such  shaking,  the  apparatus  designed  by  A.  E. 
Stansfeld  and  described  by  him  in  1918  may  be  used. 
This  ensures  that  the  citrate  and  the  blood  flow  into  the 
containing  vessel  together,  so  that  no  further  mixing 
is  needed.  The  apparatus  is  more  cumbrous,  more 
fragile,  and  less  easy  to  clean  and  to  sterilize  than 
that  described  above.  In  the  hands  of  an  expert  it  will 
give  excellent  results,  but  its  use  requires  some  little 
practice,  and  it  is  therefore  not  so  well  adapted  for 
general  use. 

The  whole  of  my  own  apparatus,  as  described  above, 
may  be  obtained  from  Messrs.  Allen  &  Hanburys,  Wigmore 
Street,  London,  W.l,  who  also  provide  a  convenient  box 
for  carrying  it. 

Transfusion  of  Infants. — The  technique  of  transfusions 
performed  upon  children  over  the  age  of  about  four  years 
docs  not  differ  from  that  used  for  adults,  except  that  less 
blood  is  to  be  given.  The  antecubital  veins  are  much 
smaller  and  a  finer  cannula  may  have  to  be  used,  but  this 
is  the  only  source  of  trouble.  The  transfusion  of  infants 
and  very  young  children  may,  however,  be  found  to  be 
much  more  difficult.  The  operation  will  have  to  be  done 
for  conditions  such  as  melaena  neonatorum,  which  was 
discussed  on  p.  48  of  the  present  work,  or  for  post- 
operative collapse,  such  as  may  follow  an  operation  for 
congenital  hypertrophic  stenosis  of  the  pylorus,  for  in- 
tussusception, or  for  some  of  the  more  extreme  cases  of 
harelip  and  cleft  palate.  In  all  such  instances  the  trans- 
fusion will  be  a  matter  of  some  urgency.  Speed  and 
certainty  will  depend  on  previous  knowledge  of  the  best 
method  to  be  employed. 

In  the  case  of  melsena  neonatorum  treated  by  R.  D. 
Laurie,  which  has  been  already  referred  to,  a  needle  was 
introduced  into  one  of  the  antecubital  veins,  and  20  cc.  of 
citrated  blood  were  injected  with  a  syringe.     This  method, 


METHODS   OF   BLOOD   TRANSFUSION       135 

however,  is  not  to  be  recommended,  on  account  of  its  great 
difficulty. 

The  method  used  by  Helmholtz  and  also  by  Howard 
depends  on  the  introduction  of  a  syringe  needle  into 
the  superior  longitudinal  sinus  through  the  anterior 
fontanelle.  A  needle  two  to  three  inches  long  attached  to 
a  20  cc.  syringe  is  inserted  near  the  upper  angle  of  the 
fontanelle  at  an  angle  of  about  25°  with  the  scalp.  As  the 
needle  pierces  the  wall  of  the  sinus,  a  sensation  of  resistance 
is  experienced,  similar  to  that  given  by  the  piercing  of  the 
dura  mater  in  doing  a  lumbar  puncture.  Blood  should 
then  be  allowed  to  enter  the  syringe  in  order  to  demon- 
strate that  the  point  of  the  needle  really  is  lying  in  the 
sinus.  Abnormalities  have  occasionally  been  met  with, 
in  which  the  sinus  was  situated  to  one  side  of  the  middle 
line  or  was  very  much  smaller  than  usual.  The  danger  of 
injecting  the  blood  in  such  a  case  into  the  brain  or  the 
subdural  space  need  not  be  emphasized.  Difficulty  may 
also  be  caused  by  restlessness  on  the  part  of  the  child,  and 
to  overcome  this  Helmholtz  has  devised  an  apparatus 
which  grips  and  fixes  the  child's  head  at  a  suitable  angle. 
All  this,  however,  makes  the  process  unnecessarily  elabor- 
ate. As  an  alternative,  Vincent  has  exposed  one  of  the 
internal  jugular  veins  into  which  he  introduces  a  cannula. 
This  again  is  a  comparatively  difficult  operation,  which 
may  leave  a  permanent  scar  in  a  conspicuous  place.  Vin- 
cent had  previously  used  the  femoral  vein,  but  he  found  this 
difficult  to  approach,  and  the  wound  was  apt  to  become 
contaminated  afterwards. 

The  method  of  choice  is  undoubtedly  that  used  by  Bruce 
Robertson,  who  has  performed  a  much  larger  number  of 
transfusions  upon  infants  and  children  than  any  other 
worker  in  this  field  of  surgery.  He  has  found  that  the 
internal  saphenous  vein  near  the  ankle  is  a  vessel  possessing 
a  fairly  wide  lumen  and  thick  walls  even  in  infants,  so  that 
a  needle  or  cannula  can  be  introduced  into  it  with  com- 
parative  ease   and   rapidity.     The  vein  must,  of  course, 


136  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

be  freely  exposed  through  an  incision,  but  its  situation 
removes  any  objection  there  might  otherwise  be  to  this 
operation.  Robertson  has  usually  employed  the  syringe- 
cannula  method  described  earlier  in  the  present  chapter, 
but  there  is  no  objection  to  the  use  of  an  anticoagulant. 
The  small  amount  of  blood  to  be  given,  15  cc.  per  pound 
of  body  weight,  makes  the  use  of  the  transfusion  flask 
unnecessary.  It  is  better  to  use  a  20  cc.  syringe,  into 
which  2  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  citrate  is 
drawn  as  a  preliminary.  The  needle  in  the  donor's  vein 
and  the  cannula  in  the  infant's  saphena  should  each  be 
provided  with  a  rubber  connexion,  which  can  be  clipped,  or 
pinched  by  an  assistant,  when  the  syringe  is  not  attached. 
The  syringe  containing  the  citrate  is  filled  with  blood  and 
injected  into  the  infant  as  often  as  may  be  necessary  until 
the  total  amount  decided  upon  has  been  given. 

Robertson  has  used  this  method  for  complete  replace- 
ment of  the  circulating  blood  in  treating  streptococcal 
septicaemia  following  erysipelas,  and  for  shock  in  children 
due  to  burns.  The  infant's  blood  is  removed  through  the 
anterior  fontanelle,  while  a  fresh  supply  is  injected  into 
the  saphenous  vein.  Complete  replacement  has  not,  so 
far  as  I  know,  ever  been  performed  upon  an  adult,  but  the 
process  is  feasible,  given  a  large  enough  assemblage  of 
donors.  In  this  way  some  vieillard  might  attempt  the 
rejuvenation,  which  at  present,  as  we  are  told,  has  only  been 
obtained  from  the  transplantation  of  "  monkey  glands  " 
by  Viennese  professors. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

1.  ADDIS,    T.  :     "The   effect  of  intravenous   injections   of 

fresh  human  serum  and  of  phosphated  blood  on  the 
coagulation  time  of  the  blood  in  hereditary  haemophilia." 
Proc.  Soc.  Exp.  Biol,  and  Med.,  1916,  xiv.  19. 

2.  AGOTE,  L.  :    "  Nuevo  procedimiento  para  la  transfusion 

del  sangre."  Anales  del  Inst,  modelo  de  clin.  med. 
Buenos  Ayres,  Jan.  1915. 

3.  ALBINI :   "  R^lazione  sulla  trasfusione  diretta  di  sangue 

d'agnello,"     Naples,  1873. 

4.  ALEXANDER,  W.  :    "  An  enquiry  into  the  distribution 

of  the  blood  groups  in  patients  suffering  from  malignant 
disease."     Brit.  Journ.  Exp.  Path.,  1921,  ii.  QQ. 

5.  ANDERS,  J.   M.  :     "  Transfusion  of  blood  in  pernicious 

anaemia."     Am.  Journ.  Med.  Sci.,  1919,  clviii.  659. 

6.  ARCHIBALD,   A.  :     "  The   transfusion   of  blood   in   the 

treatment  of  pernicious  anaemia."  St.  Paul  Med.  Journ., 
1917,  xix.  43. 

7.  ASHBY,  W.  :    "  The  determination  of  the  length  of  life 

of  transfused  blood  corpuscles  in  man."  Journ.  Exp. 
Med.,  1919,  xxix.  267.  (Also  in  Collected  Papers  of  the 
Mayo  Clinic,  xi.,  1919.) 

8.  AVELING,  J.  H.  :   "  An  improved  apparatus  for  immediate 

transfusion."     Med.  Rec,  1874,  ix.  190. 

9.  B ARRIS,  J.,  &  DONALDSON,  M.  :    "  Acute  inversion  of 

the  uterus.     Treatment  by  blood  transfusion  and  late 

replacement."  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Med.,  Obstet.  Sect., 
1921,  xiv.  207. 

10.  BAYLISS,   W.    M.  :     "  Intravenous  injection    in    wound 

shock."     Longmans,  Green  &  Co.,  1918. 

11.  BAYLISS,  W.   M.  :     "  Intravenous  injections  to  replace 

blood."     Rep.  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  i.,  1919,  11. 

12.  BAYLISS,  W.  M.  :    "  The  toxicity  of  haemolysed  blood." 

Brit.  Journ.  Exp.  Path.,  1920,  i.  1. 
137 


138  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

13.  BAYLISS,  W.  M.,  and  others  :    "  Acidosis  and    shock." 

Rep.  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  vii.,  1919,  245. 

14.  BAZETT,  M.  C.  :    "  The  value  of  haemoglobin  and  blood 

pressure  observations  in  surgical  cases."     Rep.   of  the 
Med.  Res.  Com.,  v.,  1919,  181. 

15.  BELINA,  DE  :     "  De  la  transfusion  du  sang  defibrine." 

Paris,  1873. 

16.  BELKNAP,  R.  W.  :    "  Suggestions  for  identification  of 

blood  groups."     Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1921,  Ixxvi. 
724. 

17.  BELL,  W.  B.  ;    "  The  treatment  of  eclampsia  by  trans- 

fusion of  blood."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1920,  i.  625. 

18.  BENEDICT,  N.   B.  :     "  On  the  operation  of  transfusion 

— being    the    report    of    a    committee."     Nezv    Orleans 
Med.  and  Surg.  Journ.,  1853,  July. 

19.  BERARD,  L.,  &  LUMIERE,  A.  :    ''  Technique  for  trans- 

fusion of  blood."     Presse  Med.,  1915,  xxiii.     No.  41. 

20.  BERNHEIM,  B.  M.  :    "An  emergency  cannula."     Journ, 

Am.  Med.  Assoc.,  1912,  Iviii.  1007. 

21.  BERNHEIM,  B.  M.  :    "  Therapeutic  possibilities  of  trans- 

fusion."    Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1913,  Ixi.  268. 

22.  BERNHEIM,  B.  M.  :    "  Hemolysis  following  transfusion 

of  blood  ;    a  study."     Lancet-Clinic,  1915,  cxiii.  259. 

23.  BERNHEIM,    B.    M.  :     "  A    simple    instrument   for    the 

indirect    transfusion    of    blood."     Journ.    Am.     Med, 
Assoc,  1915,  Ixv.  1278. 

24.  BERNHEIM,  B.  M.  :    "  The  limits  of  bleeding  considered 

from     the     clinical     standpoint."     Am.     Journ.     Med. 
ScL,  1917,  cliii.  575. 

25.  BERNHEIM,    B.    M.  :    "  Blood  transfusion,  haemorrhage 

and  the  anaemias."     Lippincott  Co.,  1917. 

26.  BERNHEIM,    B.    M.  :     "  Whole    blood    transfusion    and 

citrated  blood  transfusion.     Possible  differentiation  of 
cases."     Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1921,  Ixxvii.  275. 

27.  BISCHOFF,   T.    L.   W.  :    "  Beitrage  zur  Lehre  von  dem 

Blute  und  der  Transfusion  desselben."     Arch,  f  Anat. 
Physiol,  u.  wissensch.  Med.,  1835,  347. 

28.  BLASIUS :      "  Statistik     der     Transfusion   des    Blutes." 

Monatsbl.  f.   med.   Statist,   u.   off.   Gsndhtspleg.     Berlin, 
1863,  77. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  139 

29.  BLOOMFIELD,  A.  :    "  The  results  of  treatment  in  per- 

nicious anaemia."  Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  Bull.,  1918, 
xxix.  101. 

30.  BLUNDELL,   J.  :     "  Experiments  on  the  transfusion  of 

blood  by  the  syringe."  Med.  Chirurg.  Trans.,  1818, 
ix.  56. 

31.  BLUNDELL,  J.  :    "  Some  account  of  a  case  of  obstinate 

vomiting,  in  which  an  attempt  was  made  to  prolong 
life  by  the  injection  of  blood  into  the  veins."  Med. 
Chirurg.  Trans.,  1819,  x.  296. 

32.  BLUNDELL,  J.  :     "  Some  remarks  on  the  operation  of 

transfusion."  Researches  Physiological  and  Pathological. 
London,  1824. 

33.  BOND,     C.     J.  :      ''  On     auto-haemagglutination."     Brit. 

Med.  Journ.,  1920,  ii.  925,  973. 

34.  BOWCOCK,    H.    M.  :     "  Serious    reactions    to    repeated 

transfusions  in  pernicious  anaemia."  Johns  Hopkins 
Hosp.  Bull,  1921,  xxxii.  83. 

35.  BREM,  W.  V.  :    "  Blood  transfusion  with  special  reference 

to  group  tests."     Journ.  Am.  Med,  Assoc,  1916,  Ixvii.  190. 

36.  BREWER,  G.  E.,  &  LEGGETT,  N.  B.  :    ''  Direct  blood 

transfusion  by  means  of  paraffin-coated  glass  tubes." 
Surg.  Gynec.  and  Ohstet.,  1909,  ix.  293. 

37.  BRINTON,  J.  H.  :    "  The  transfusion  of  blood  and  the 

intravenous  injection  of  milk."  Med.  Rec,  1878, 
xiv.  344. 

38.  BUCHSER,    J.  :      "A    successful    case    of    transfusion." 

Med.  Rec,  1869-70,  iv.  337. 

39.  BUERGER,  L.  :    "A  modified  Crile  transfusion  cannula." 

Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1908,  li.  1233. 

40.  BULGER,  H.  A.  :    "  Blood  changes  in  a  case  of  haemo- 

philia after  transfusion."  Journ.  Lab.  and  Clin.  Med.^ 
1920,  vi.  102. 

41.  BULLIARD,  H.  :   "  Modifications  sanguines  apres  trans- 

fusions." Journ,  de  Physiol,  et  de  Path.  Gen.,  1921, 
xix.  80. 

42.  BURMEISTER,   W.   H.  :     "  Resuscitation   by  means   of 

preserved  living  erythrocytes  in  experimental  illumi- 
nating gas  asphyxia."  Journ.  Am,  Med.  Assoc,  1916, 
Ixvi.  164. 


140  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

43.  CANNON,  W.  B.  :    "  Shock  and  its  control."     Am.  Joiirn. 

Physiol,  1918,  xlv.  544. 

44.  CANNON,  W.  B.  :    "  Acidosis  in  cases  of  shock,  hfemor- 

rhage,  and  gas  infection."  Report  of  the  Med.  Res. 
Com.,  ii.  (3),  1919,  85. 

45.  CANNON,   W.    B.  :     "A   consideration  of  the   nature   of 

wound  shock."  Report  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  ii.  (5), 
1919,  109. 

46.  CANNON,   W.   B.,   FRASER,   J.,   &   COWELL,   E.   M.  : 

"  The  preventive  treatment  of  wound  shock."  Report 
of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  ii.  (6),  1919,  125. 

47.  CANNON,  W.   B.,   FRASER,   J.,   &  HOOPER,   A.   N.  : 

"  Some  alterations  in  the  distribution  and  character  of 
the  blood."  Report  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  ii.  (2),  1919, 
72. 

48.  CARTER,  W.  S.  :    "  An  experimental  study  of  the  use  of 

sodium  citrate  in  the  transfusion  of  blood  by  direct 
and  indirect  methods."  South.  Med.  Journ.,  1916, 
ix.  427. 

49.  CHARLES,   R.,   &   SLADDEN,   A.   F.  :     "  Resuscitation 

work  at  a  casualty  clearing  station."  Brit.  Med.  Journ., 
1919,  i.  402. 

50.  CHAVASSE,  F.  B.  :     "  The  blood  group  in  mother  and 

child."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1921,  i.  641. 

51.  CHERRY,  T.  H.,  &  LANGROCK,  E.  G.  :    "  The  relation 

of  haemolysis  in  the  transfusion  of  babies  with  the 
mothers  as  donors."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.,  1916, 
Ixvi.  626. 

52.  CLOUGH,  P.  W.  &  M.  C.  :    "  Study  of  reactions  following 

transfusion  of  blood."  South.  Med.  Journ.,  1^21,  xiv. 
104. 

53.  COLE,  H.  P.  :    "  Transfusion  and  pellagra."     Journ.  Am. 

Med.  Assoc,  1911,  Ivi.  584. 

54.  COOLEY,    T.    B.,    &   VAUGHAN,   J.    W.  :     "A   simple 

method  of  blood  transfusion."  Jour^i.  Am.  Med.  Assoc., 
1913,  435. 

55.  COWELL,    E.    M.  :     "  The   initiation   of  wound   shock." 

Report  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  ii.  (4),  1919,  99. 
5Q.  COX,  R.  :   "  Blood  transfusion  in  the  seventeenth  century." 
Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1914,  Ixii.  222. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  141 

57.  COX,  T.  :    "An  account  of  another  experiment  of  trans- 

fusion,  viz.  of  bleeding  a  mangy  into  a  sound  dog." 
Philosophical  Trans.,  1667,  ii.  451. 

58.  CRILE,  G.  W.  :  '*  The  technique  of  direct  transfusion  of 

blood."     Ann.  Surg.,  1907,  xlvi.  329. 

59.  CRILE,  G.  W.  :   "  Haemorrhage  and  transfusion."     Apple- 

ton  &  Co.,  N.Y.,  1909. 

60.  CROTTI,   A.  :     "  Indirect   transfusion   of  blood."     Surg. 

Gynec.  and  Obstet.,  1914,  xviii.  236. 

61.  CULPEPPER,  W.  L.  :    "  Report  on  five  thousand  bloods 

typed,  using  Moss's  grouping."  Journ.  Lab.  and  Clin. 
Med.,  1921,  vi.  276. 

62.  CURCHOD,    H.  :     "  Transfusion   of   blood."     Rev.    med, 

de  la  Suisse.     Rome,  1920,  xl.  666. 

63.  CURTIS,    A.    H.,    &   DAVID,    V.    C.  :     "  Transfusion   of 

blood  by  a  new  method,  allowing  accurate  measure- 
ment."    Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.,  1911,  Ivi.  35. 

64.  DALE,  H.  H.,   and  others  :     "  Surgical  shock  and  some 

allied  conditions."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1917,  i.  381. 

65.  DALE,  H.  H.,  and  others  :     "  Traumatic   toxaemia   as  a 

factor  in  shock."  Rep.  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  viii., 
March  1919. 

66.  DARWIN,  ERASMUS  :    Zoonomia  ;    or  the  Laws  of  Life. 

London,  1794.  2  vols.,  4°.  Vol.  i.  p.  373;  vol.  ii. 
pp.  120,  605,  676. 

67.  DAVID,  V.  C,  &  CURTIS,  A.  H.  :    "  Experiments  in  the 

treatment  of  acute  anaemia  by  blood  transfusion  and 
by  intravenous  saline  infusion."  Surg.  Gyn.  and 
Obstet.,  1912,  XV.  476. 

68.  DAVID,  V.  C,  &  CURTIS,  A.  H.  :    "  Recent  experiences 

with  blood  transfusion."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc, 
1914,  Ixii.  775. 

69.  DAWSON,  P.  M.  :    "  The  changes  in  the  heart  rate  and 

blood  pressures  resulting  from  severe  haemorrhage  and 
subsequent  infusion  of  sodium  bicarbonate."  Journ. 
Exp.  Med.,  1905,  vii.  1. 

70.  DENYS,  J.  :    "A  letter  concerning  a  new  way  of  curing 

sundry  diseases  by  transfusion  of  blood."  Philosophical 
Trans.,  1667,  ii.  489. 

71.  DENYS,   J.  :     "An  extract  of  a  letter  touching  a  late 


142  BLOOD  TRANSFUSION 

cure  of  an  inveterate  phrensy  by  the  transfusion  of 
blood."     Philosophical  Trans.,  1667,  ii.  617. 

72.  DIEFFENBACH,   J.    F.  :     "  Die   Transfusion  des  Blutes 

und  die  Infusion  der  Arzneien  in  Blutgefasse."  Berlin, 
1828. 

73.  DIJK,   H.   VAN :     "  Malaria   induced   by   convalescent's 

serum."     Nederl.  Tijdschr.  v.  Geneesk.,  1920,  ii.  1181. 

74.  DORRANCE,  G.  M.  :    "  Indications  for  blood  transfusion." 

Am.  Journ.  Med.  Sci.,  1917,  cliv.  216. 

75.  DORRANCE,  G.  M.,  &  GINSBURG,  N.  :    "  Transfusion  : 

history,  development,  present  status  and  technique  of 
operation."     N.Y.  Med.  Journ.,  1908,  Ixxxvii.  941. 

76.  DRINKER,  C.  R.,  &  BRITTINGHAM,  H.  H.  :     "  The 

cause  of  the  reactions  following  transfusion  of  citrated 
blood."     Arch.  Int.  Med.,  1919,  xxiii.  133. 

77.  DRUMMOND,   H.,   &   TAYLOR,   E.    S.  :     "  The   use   of 

intravenous  injections  of  gum  acacia  in  surgical  shock." 
Rep.  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  iii.,  1919,  135. 

"  Observations  on  the  blood  pressure  in  gas  gangrene 
infection."     Ibid.,  v.  1919,  199. 

78.  DUKE,    W.    W.  :     "  Variation    in    the    platelet    count." 

Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1915,  Ixv.  1600. 

79.  DUNGERN,   E.   VON,   &  HIRSCHFELD,   L.  :     "  Ueber 

Nachweis  und  Vererbung  biochemischer  strukturen." 
Zeitschr.  f.  Immunitdtsfschng.,  1910,  iv.  531  ;  1911, 
viii.  526. 

80.  DUNGERN,   E.   VON,   &  HIRSCHFELD,   L.  :     ''  Ueber 

Vererbung  gruppenspezifischer  strukturen  des  Blutes." 
Ibid.,  1910,  vi.  284. 

81.  DUNGERN,   E.   VON,   &  HIRSCHFELD,   L.  :     "Ueber 

die  Giftigkeit  des  Blutes  nach  der  Injektion  protoplas- 
matischen  Substanzen  und  wahrend  der  Schwangerschaft, 
und  iiber  passive  Allergic  gegeniiber  Hodensubstanzen." 
'    Ibid.,  1911,  viii.  332. 

82.  EBERLE,  D.  :     "  Transfusion  and  reinfusion  of  blood." 

Schweiz.  med.  Wchnschr.,  1920,  1.  961. 

83.  ELSBERG,   C.   A.  :     "A   simple   cannula  for  the   direct 

transfusion  of  blood."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1909, 
hi.  887. 

84.  ELY,  A.  H.,  &  LINDEMAN,  E.  :    "  Acidosis  complicating 


r 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  143 


pregnancy.  Report  of  a  case  cured  by  transfusion." 
Am.  Journ.  Obstet.  and  Dis.  Worn,  and  Child.,  July, 
1916,  Ixxiv.  42. 

85.  EMSHEIMER,    H.    W.  :     "  Intramuscular    injections    of 

whole  blood  in  the  treatment  of  purpura  hsemorrhagica." 
Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1916,  Ixvi.  20. 

86.  EPSTEIN,   A.   A.,   &   OTTENBERG,   R.  :     ''A   method 

for  agglutination  tests."     Arch.  Int.  Med.,  1909,  iii.  286. 

87.  ERLANGER,  J.,  &  GASSER,  H.  S.  :    "  Hypertonic  gum 

acacia  and  glucose  in  the  treatment  of  secondary  trau- 
matic shock."     Ann.  Surg.,  1919,  Ixix.  389. 

88.  FLEMING,  A.,  &  PORTEOUS,  A.  B.  :     "  Blood  trans- 

fusion by  the  citrate  method."     Lancet,  1919,  i.  973. 

89.  FLORCKEN,  H.  :    "  Zur  Frage  der  direkten   Bluttrans- 

fusion  durch  Gefassnaht."  Zentrbl.  f.  Chir.  Leipzic, 
1911,  xxxviii.  305. 

90.  FOLLI,   FRANCESCO  :     "  Stadera  medica,   nella    quale 

oltre  la  medicina  infusoria,  ed  altre  novita,  si  bilanciano 
le  ragioni  favore  voli  e  le  contrarie  alia  trasfusione  del 
sangue."     Florence,  1680. 

91.  FORSIUS,  R.  :   "  Severe  haemophilic  intestinal  haemorrhage 

treated  with  transfusion  of  blood."  Finska  Lakaresdll- 
skapets  Handl.,  1915,  Ivii.     No.  3. 

92.  FRANK,  R.  T.,  &  BAEHR,  G.  :    "A  new  method  for  the 

transfusion  of  blood.  An  experimental  study."  Journ. 
A7n.  Med.  Assoc,  1909,  Iii.  1746. 

93.  ERASER,  J.,  &  COWELL,  E.  M.  :   ''A  clinical  study  of  the 

blood  pressure  in  wound  conditions."  Report  of  the 
Med.  Res.  Com.,  ii.  (1),  1919,  49. 

94.  FREILICH,  E.  B.,  and  others  :     "  Blood  transfusion  in 

treatment  of  pulmonary  tuberculosis."  Illin.  Med. 
Journ.,  1921,  xxxix.  32. 

95.  FREUND,  H.  A.  :    "A  method  for  the  transfusion  of  fresh 

normal  blood."  Journ.  Michigan  Med.  Soc,  1913,  xii.  459. 

96.  FRY,  H.  J.  B.  :     "  The  use  of  immunized  blood  donors 

in  the  treatment  of  pyogenic  infections  by  whole  blood 
transfusions."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1920,  i.  290. 

97.  FRYER,  B.  E.  :    "A  few  remarks  on  the  transfusion  of 

blood,  with  a  modification  of  the  apparatus  of  Aveling." 
Med.  Rec,  1874,  ix.  201. 


144  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

98.  FULLERTON,  A.,  DREYER,  G.,  &  BAZETT,  H.  C.  : 

"  Direct  transfusion  of  blood,  with  a  description  of  a 
simple  method."     Lancet,  1917,  i.  715. 

99.  GARB  AT,  A.    L.  :    "  Intravenous    injections    of   sodium 

citrate."     Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.,  1916,  Ixvi.  1543. 

100.  GESELLIUS,  F.  :      "  Die  Transfusion  des  Blutes."     St. 

Petersburg,  1873. 

101.  GESELLIUS,    F.  :      "  Zur    Thierblut-Transfusion    beim 

Menschen."     St.  Petersburg,  1874. 

102.  GETTLER,  A.  O.,  &  LINDEMAN,  E.  :    "A  new  method 

of  acidosis  therapy.  Blood  transfusion  from  an  alkali- 
nized  donor,  with  report  of  case."  Journ.  Am.  Med. 
Assoc,  1917,  Ixviii.  594. 

103.  GIFFIN,  H.  Z.  :   "A  report  on  the  treatment  of  pernicious 

anaemia  by  transfusion  and  splenectomy."  Journ. 
Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1917,  Ixviii.  429. 

104.  GRAHAM,  J.  M.  :    "  Observations  on  the  technique  of 

blood  transfusion."     Edin.  Med.  Journ.,  1919,  xxiii.  358. 

105.  GRAHAM,   J.   M.  :     "  Transfusion  of  blood  in  cases  of 

haemorrhage."     Edinb.  Med.  Journ.,  1920,  xxiv.  142. 

106.  GRAHAM,  J.  M.  :    "  Transfusion  of  blood  in  pernicious 

anaemia."     Edinb.  Med.  Journ.,  1920,  xxiv.  282. 

107.  GRUTZ,  O,  :    "  Bluttransfusion    bei    Morbus  maculosus 

Werlhofi."     Berl.  Klin.  Wchnschr.,  1921,  Iviii.  53. 

108.  GUIOU,  N.  M.  :    "  Blood  transfusion  in  a  field  ambul- 

ance."    Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1918,  i.  695. 

109.  GURYE,  G.  DE  :    "An  account  of  more  tryals  of  trans- 

fusion, accompanied  with  some  considerations  thereon, 
chiefly  in  reference  to  its  cautious  practice  on  Man  ; 
together  with  a  farther  vindication  of  this  invention  from 
usurpers."     Philosophical  Trans.,  1667,  ii.  517. 

110.  HAHN,    M.  :      "  Haemophilia    treated    by    transfusion." 

Med.  Rec,  1910,  Ixxviii.  624. 

111.  HALSTED,  W.  S.  :    "  Refusion  in  the  treatment  of  car- 

bonic oxide  poisoning."  Ann.  of  Anat.  and  Surg.,  1884, 
Jan. 

112.  HAPP,  W.  M.  :    "  Appearance  of  iso -agglutinins  in  infants 

and  children."     Journ.  Exp.  Med.,  1920,  xxxi.  313. 

113.  HARDING,  M.  E.  :    "  The  toxaemic  stage  of  diphtheria." 

Lancet,  1921,  i.  737. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  145 

114.  HARRIS,  D.  T.  :    "  The  value  of  the  vital-red  method 

as  a  clinical  means  for  the  estimation  of  the  volume  of 
the  blood."     Brit.  Journ.  Exp.  Path.,  1920,  i.  142. 

115.  HARTWELL,  J.  A.  :    "A  simple  method  of  blood  trans- 

fusion with  cannula."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Ass.,  1909, 
lii.  297. 

116.  HARTWELL,  J.  A.  :    "A  consideration  of  the  various 

methods  of  blood  transfusion  and  its  value."  N.Y. 
State  Journ.  Med.,  1914,  xiv.  535. 

117.  HASSE,  O.  :    "  Report  on  twelve  cases  of  the  direct  trans- 

fusion of  lamb's  blood."  Allgem.  Wiener  Medizin, 
Zeit.,  Dec.  1873.  (Abstracted  in  the  Lond.  Med.  Rec, 
Dec.  31,  1873.) 

118.  HEDON,  E.  :    "  Note  complementaire  sur  la  transfusion 

du  sang  citrate."     Presse  med.,  1918,  xxvi.  57. 

119.  HEKTOEN,    L.  :      "  Iso-agglutination    of    human    cor- 

puscles."    Journ.  Infect.  Dis.,  1907,  iv.  297. 

120.  HELMHOLZ,   H.   F.  :     "  The  longitudinal  sinus   as  the 

place  of  preference  in  infancy  for  intravenous  aspira- 
tions and  injections,  including  transfusion."  Am. 
Journ.  Dis.  of  Children,  1915,  x.  194. 

121.  HICKS,  J.  BRAXTON  :    "  Cases  of  transfusion,  with  some 

remarks  on  a  new  method  of  performing  the  operation." 
Guy's  Hosp.  Rep.,  1869,  3rd  s.,  xiv.  1. 

122.  HIGGINSON,  A.  :    "  Report  of  seven  cases  of  transfusion 

of  blood,  with  a  description  of  the  instrument  invented 
by  the  author."  Liverpool  Med.  Chir.  Journ.,  1857,  i. 
102. 

123.  HINDSE-NIELSEN  :     "  Nitro-benzol  poisoning  treated 

with  blood  transfusion."  Ugeskift  f.  Laeger,  1920, 
Sept.  9. 

124.  HIRSCHFELD,  L.,  &  HIRSCHFELD,  H.  :    "  Serological 

differences  between  the  blood  of  different  races."  Lancet, 
1919,  ii.  675. 

125.  HOFFMAN,  M.  H.,  &  HABEIN,  H.  C.  :   "  Transfusion  of 

citrated  blood."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1921,  Ixxvi. 
358. 

126.  HOOKER,   R.   S.  :     "  The  treatment  of  staphylococcus 

septicaemia  by  transfusion  of  immune  blood."  A^m. 
Surg.,  1917,  Ixvi.  513. 

10 


146  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

127.  HOWARD,  W.  S.  :    "A  simple  method  of  transfusion  in 

haemorrhage  of  the  new-born,  with  report  of  a  case.*' 
Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1915,  Ixv.  1365. 

128.  HUCK,  F.  G.  :   "  Changes  in  the  blood  immediately  follow- 

ing transfusion."  Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  Bull.,  1919, 
XXX.  63. 

129.  HULL,  A.  J.  :   "  Direct  transfusion  of  blood."     Brit  Med, 

Journ.,  1917,  ii.  683. 

130.  HUNT,  E.  L.,  &  INGLEBY,  H. :  ''  A  case  of  peptic  ulcer 

with  grave  anaemia  treated  by  intravenous  injection  of 
whole  blood."     Lancet,  1919,  i.  975. 

131.  HUNT,  V.  C.  :    "  Reaction  following  blood  transfusion  by 

the  sodium  citrate  method."  Texas  State  Journ.  Med., 
1918,  xiv.  192.  (Also  in  Collected  Papers  of  the  Mayo 
Clinic,  X.  1918.) 

132.  HUSTIN  :    "  Principe  d'une  nouvelle  methode  de  trans- 

fusion muqueuse."     Journ.  med.  deBrux.,  1914,  xii.  436. 

133.  HUTCHISON,  R.  :    "  Three  cases  of  melsena  neonatorum 

successfully  treated  by  the  injection  of  whole  blood." 
Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1917,  ii.  617. 

134.  HUTER,    C.  :     "  Ein    Fall    von    Kohlenoxydvergiftung  ; 

Heilung  durch  Transfusion."  Berl.  Klin.  Wchnschr., 
1870,  vii.  341. 

135.  INGEBRIGTSEN,   R.  :     "  The    influence   of    iso-agglu- 

tinins  on  the  final  results  of  homoplastic  transplanta- 
tion of  arteries."     Journ.  Exp.  Med.,  1912,  xvi.  169. 

136.  JANEWAY,   H.  H.  :     "  An  improved  device  for  trans- 

fusion."    Ann.  Surg.,  1911,  Ixiii.  720. 

137.  JANSKY,   J.  :     "  Haematologische   Studien  bei  psykoti- 

ken."     Kli7icky  Sborink,  1907,  viii.  85. 

138.  JANSKY,  J.  :    Recommendation   by   a   committee   that 

the  Jansky  classification  of  blood  groups  be  used  in 
preference  to  that  of  Moss  on  grounds^  of  priority. 
Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1921,  Ixxvi.  130. 

139.  KAHN,  A.  :    "  Continuous  transfusion.     The  production 

of  immunity."     N.Y.  Med.  Rec,  1916,  Ixxxix.  553. 

140.  KARSNER,    H.    T.  :     "  Laboratory   problems    of  blood 

transfusion."    Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1921,  Ixxvi.  88. 

141.  KEATOR,  H.  M.  :    "  Transfusion  in  case  of  toxaemia  of 

early  pregnancy  with  unusual  haemorrhagic  manifesta- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  147 

tions."     Am.  Journ.  Obstet.  and  Dis.  Worn,  and  Child, 

1912,  Ixv.  1003. 

142.  KEITH,   N.    M.  :     ''  Blood   volume   changes   in   wound 

shock  and  primary  haemorrhage."  Rep.  of  the  Med. 
Res.  Com.,  ix.,  March,  1919. 

143.  KEITH,  N.  M.,  ROWNTREE,  L.  G.,  &  GERAGHTY, 

J.  T.  :  "A  method  for  the  determination  of  plasma  and 
blood  volume."     Arch.  Int.  Med.,  1915,  xvi.  547. 

144.  KEYNES,  G.  L.  :    "  Blood  transfusion  ;    its  theory  and 

practice."     Lancet,  1920,  i.  1216. 

145.  KIMPTON,  A.  R.,  &  BROWN,  J.  H.  :     "A  new  and 

simple  method  of  transfusion."  Journ.  Am.  Med. 
Assoc,  1913,  Ixi.  117. 

146.  KIMPTON,  A.  R.  :    "  Further  notes  on  transfusion  by 

means  of  glass  cylinders."     Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc, 

1913,  Ixi.  1628. 

147.  KIMPTON,  A.  R.  :    "  Transfusion.     Experiences  in  over 

two  hundred  cases."  Boston  Med.  and  Surg.  Journ., 
1918,  clxxviii.  351. 

148.  KIMPTON,  A.  R.,  &  BROWN,  J.  H.  :    "  Technique  of 

transfusion  by  means  of  glass  tubes."  Bost.  Med.  and 
Surg.  Journ.,  1915,  clxxiii.  425. 

149.  KING,  E.  :    "  An  account  of  an  easier  and  safer  way  of 

transfusing  blood  out  of  one  animal  into  another,  viz., 
by  the  veins,  without  opening  an  artery  of  either." 
Philosophical  Trans.,  1667,  ii.  449. 

150.  KING,  E.  :  "  The  method  of  transfusing  into  the  veines 

of  men."     Philosophical  Trans.,  1667,  ii.  522. 

151.  KING,  E.  :     "  An  account  of  the  experiment  of  trans- 

fusion, practised  upon  a  man  in  London."  Philo- 
sophical Trans.,  1667,  ii.  557. 

152.  KING,  H.  H.  :    "  Direct  vein  to  vein  transfusion."     Brit. 

Med.  Journ.,  1918,  i.  498. 

153.  KUSH,   M.  :     "  An   automatic    transfusion    apparatus." 

Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1915,  Ixv.  1180. 

154.  LAMBERT,  S.  W.  :   "  Melaena  neonatorum,  with  report 

of  a  case  cured  by  transfusion."  N.Y.  Med.  Rec, 
1908,  Ixxiii.  885. 

155.  LANDOIS,  L.  :    "  Die  Transfusion  des  Blutes."     Berlin, 

1866.     Leipzig,  1875. 


148  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

156.  LANDSTEINER,    K.  :     "  Ueber    Agglutinationserschei- 

nungen  normalen  menschlichen  Blutes."  Wien.  Klin. 
Wchnschr.,  1901,  xiv.  1132. 

157.  LAPAGE,   C.   P.  :     "  Two  cases  of  melsena  neonatorum 

treated  by  injection  of  fresh  citrated  blood."  Proc. 
Roy.  Soc.  Med.,  1920,  xiii.  Sect.  Child.  Dis.,  158-160. 

158.  LAURIE,  R.  D.  :    "  Melaena  neonatorum  treated  by  blood 

transfusion."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1921,  i.  527. 

159.  LEARMONTH,  J.  R.  :    "  The  inheritance  of  specific  iso- 

agglutinins  in  human  blood."  Journ.  Genetics,  1920,  x. 
141. 

160.  LEE,  R.  I. :  "A  simple  and  rapid  method  for  the  selection 

of  suitable  donors  for  transfusion  by  the  determination 
of  blood  groups."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1917,  ii.  684. 

161.  LEISRINK,  H.  :     "Ueber  die  Transfusion  des  Blutes." 

Samm.  Klin.  Vortr.,  No.  41.     Leipzig,  1872,  235. 

162.  LESPINASSE,  V.  D.  :    "  The  treatment  of  hsemorrhagic 

disease  of  the  new-born  by  direct  transfusion  of  blood, 
with  a  clinical  report  of  fourteen  personal  cases." 
Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1914,  Ixii.  1866. 

163.  LESPINASSE,  V.  D.  :    ''  Technique  of  direct  transfusion 

of  blood,  using  iridio-platinum  tubes."  Chicago  Med. 
Rec,  1915,  xxxvii.  589. 

164.  LESSER,     L.  :       "  Transfusion     and     autotransfusion." 

Saniml.  Klin.  Vortr.,  No.  86,  Leipzig,  1875.  Inn.  Med., 
No.  29,  p.  665. 

165.  LEVIN,  1.  :    "  Plastic  surgery  of  blood  vessels  and  direct 

transfusion  of  blood."     Ann.  of  Surg.,  N.Y.,  1913,  May. 

166.  LEWISOHN,  R.  :    "  A  new  and  greatly  simplified  method 

of  blood  transfusion."  N.Y.  Med.  Rec,  1915,  Ixxxvii. 
141. 

167.  LEWISOHN,   R.  :     "  Blood   transfusion   by   the   citrate 

method."     Surg.  Gynec  and  Obstet.,  1915,  xxi.  37. 

168.  LEWISOHN,  R.  :    "  The  citrate  method  of  blood  trans- 

fusion in  children."    Afn.  Journ.  Med.  Sci.,  1915,  cl.  886. 

169.  LEWISOHN,  R.  :    "  The  importance  of  the  proper  dosage 

of  sodium  citrate  in  blood  transfusion."  Ann.  of  Surg., 
1916,  Ixiv.  618. 

170.  LEWISOHN,    R.  :     "  Modern   methods   of  blood   trans- 

fusion."    Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1917,  Ixviii.  826. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  149 

171.  LEYTON,  O.  :    "  Transfusion  in  diseases  of  the  blood." 

Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1919,  i.  279. 

172.  LIBAVIUS,    A.  :     "  Denfensio    syntagmatis    arcanorum 

chymicorum."     Frankfort,  1615,  eh.  iv.,  p.  8. 

173.  LIBMAN,  E.,  &  OTTENBERG,  R.  :   "  A  practical  method 

for  determining  the  amount  of  blood  passing  over  during 
direct  transfusion."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1914, 
Ixii.  764. 

174.  LIBMAN,  E.,  &  OTTENBERG,  R.  :    "  Recent  observa- 

tions on  blood  transfusion."  Tr.  Coll.  Phys.  Phila., 
1917,  xxxix.  266. 

175.  LICHTENSTEIN :   "  Eigenbluttransfusion    bei    Extrau- 

teringraviditat  und  Uterusruptur."  Munch.  Med. 
Wchnschr.,  1915,  Ixii.  1597. 

176.  LINDEMAN,    E.  :     "  Simple    syringe    transfusion    with 

special  cannulas."  Am.  Journ.  Dis.  of  Childre7i,  1913, 
vi.  28. 

177.  LINDEMAN,  E.  :    "  Blood  transfusion.     Report  of  one 

hundred  and  thirty-five  transfusions  by  the  syringe- 
cannula  system."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1914,  Ixii. 
993. 

178.  LINDEMAN,  E.  :    "  Reactions  following  blood  transfu- 

sion by  the  syringe  cannula  system."  Journ.  Am. 
Med.  Assoc,  1916,  Ixvi.  624. 

179.  LINDEMAN,    E.  :     "  The    total   blood   volume    in   per- 

nicious anaemia."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1918, 
Ixx.  1292. 

180.  LITTLE,   G.  F.  :     "  Transfusion  of  antibacterial  blood. 

Report  of  case."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1920, 
Ixxiv.  734. 

181.  LOSEE,  J.  R.  :    "  Blood  transfusion."     Am.  Journ.  Med. 

Sci.,  1919,  clviii.  711. 

182.  LOSEE,  J.  R.  :   "  Blood  transfusion  in  obstetrics."     Med. 

Rec,  1920,  xcvii.  265. 

183.  LOWENTHAL,  W.  :     "  Ein  Beitrag  zur  Lehre  von  der 

Transfusion  des  Blutes."  Berl.  Klin.  Wchnschr.,  1871, 
viii.  487. 

184.  LOWER,  R.  :    "  The  method  observed  in  transfusing  the 

blood  out  of  one  animal  into  another."  Philosophical 
Trans.,  1666,  i.  353. 


150  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

185.  McCLURE,    R.    D.  :     "  Pernicious    anaemia    treated    by 

splenectomy,  and  systematic,  often-repeated  trans- 
fusion of  blood.  Transfusion  in  benzol  poisoning." 
Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1916,  Ixvii.  793. 

186.  McCLURE,  R.  D.,  ifc  DUNN,  G.  R.  :    "  Transfusion  of 

blood.  History,  methods,  dangers,  preliminary  tests, 
present  status.  Report  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  trans- 
fusions."    Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  Bull.,  1917,  xxviii.  99. 

187.  McGRATH,  B.  F.  :    "A  simple   instrument  for  [direct] 

transfusion."     Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1914,  Ixii.  40. 

188.  McGRATH,   B.   F.  :    "  Vascular  suture  in  transfusion." 

Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1914,  Ixii.  1326. 

189.  McGRATH,  B.  F.  :    "A  simple  apparatus  for  transfusion 

by  the  aspiration- injection  method."  Surg.  Gynec 
and  Obstet.,  1914,  xviii.  376. 

190.  MADGE,  H.  M.  :   "  On  transfusion  of  blood."     Brit.  Med. 

Journ.,  1874,  i.  42. 

191.  MANN,    F.    C.  :     "  Experimental    surgical    shock.     The 

treatment  of  the  condition  of  low  blood  pressure,  which 
follows  exposure  of  the  abdominal  viscera."  Am. 
Journ.  Physiol.,  1919,  1.  86.  (Also  in  Collected  Papers 
of  the  Mayo  Clinic,  1919,  xi.  1225.) 

192.  MARTIN  :  "  Ueber  cine  mit  gunstigem  Erfolge  bei  einer 

lebensgefahrlichem  Intrauterinblutung  vollzogeneTrans- 
fusion."  Monatschr.  f.  Gehurtsk.  u.  Frauenk.,  1861, 
xvii.  269. 

193.  MARTIN:  "  Iso- agglutination beimMenschen."    Central- 

blattf.  Bact.,  1905,  xxxix.  704. 

194.  MELENEY,   H.   E.,   STEARNS,   W.   W.,   FORTUINE, 

S.  T.,  &  FERRY,  R.  M.  :  "  Post- transfusion  reactions  : 
a  review  of  280  transfusions."  Am.  Journ.  Med. 
Sci.,  1917,  cliv.  733. 

195.  MILLER,   G.   I.  :     "  Blood  transfusion,   indications  and 

technique."     Med.  Rec,  1915,  Ixxxviii.  425. 

196.  MINOT,  G.  R.  :    "  Methods  for  testing  donors  for  trans- 

fusion of  blood  and  consideration  of  factors  influencing 
agglutination  and  haemolysis."  Boston  Med.  and  Surg. 
Journ.,  1916,  clxxiv.  667. 

197.  MINOT,  G.  R.,  &  LEE,  R.  I.  :   "  The  blood  platelets  in 

haemophilia."     Arch.  Int.  Med.,  1916,  xviii.  474. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  151 

198.  MINOT,  G.  R.,  &  LEE,  R.  I.  :   "  Treatment  of  pernicious 

anaemia,  especially  by  transfusion  and  splenectomy." 
Bost.  Med.  and  Surg.  Joiirn.,  1917,  clxxvii.  761. 

199.  MOREL,   L.  :     "  Transfusion  of  blood."     Arch.  gen.   de 

Chir.,  1914,  viii.  1. 

200.  MOSS,  W.  L.  :  "  Studies  on  iso-agglutinins  and  iso-hemo- 

lysins."     Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  Bull.,  1910,  xxi.  63. 

201.  MOSS,  W.   L.  :     "  Paroxysmal    haemoglobinuria  :    blood 

studies  in  three  cases."  Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  Bull., 
1911,  xxii.  238. 

202.  MOSS,  W.  L.  :    "A  simple  method  for  the  indirect  trans- 

fusion of  blood."  Am.  Journ.  Med.  Sci.,  1914,  cxlvii. 
698. 

203.  MOSS,  W.  L.  :    "A  simplified  method  for  determining  the 

iso-agglutinin  group  in  the  selection  of  donors  for  blood 
transfusion."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1917,  Ixviii. 
1905. 

204.  NIX,  J.  T.  :    "  Blood  transfusion  simplified.     Deductions 

from  nineteen  cases,  eleven  human  and  eight  on  dog." 
New  Orleans  Med.  and  Surg.  Journ.,  1916,  Ixix.  435. 

205.  OEHLECKER,  F.  :    "  Bluttransfusion  von  Vene  zu  Vene 

mit  Messung  der  libertragenen  Blutmenge."  Zentralbl. 
f.  Chir.,  1919,  xlvi.  17. 

206.  OEHLECKER,  F.  :    "  Direkte  Bluttransfusion  von  Vene 

zu  Vene  bei  perniziose  Anaemic."  Munchen.  Med. 
Wchnschr.,  1919,  Ixvi.  895. 

207.  ORE  :     "  Etudes    historiques    et    physiologiques    sur    la 

transfusion  du  sang."     Paris,  1868. 

208.  OTTENBERG,  R.  :     "  Transfusion  and  arterial  anasto- 

mosis."    Ann.  Surg.,  1908,  xlvii.  486. 

209.  OTTENBERG,  R.  :     "  Transfusion  and  the  question  of 

intravascular  agglutination."  Journ.  of  Exp.  Med., 
1911,  xiii.  425. 

210.  OTTENBERG,  R.  :     "  The  effect  of  sodium  citrate  on 

blood  coagulation  in  haemophilia."  Proc.  Soc.  for  Exp. 
Biol,  and  Med.,  1916,  xiii.  104. 

211.  OTTENBERG,  R.  :   "  Medico-legal  applications  of  human 

blood  grouping."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.,  1921,  Ixxvii. 
682. 

212.  OTTENBERG,  R.,  &  FRIEDMAN,  S,  S,  ;    ''  The  occur- 


152  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

-  rence  of  grouped  iso-agglutination  in  the  lower  animals." 
Journ.  Exp.  Med.,  1911,  xiii.  531. 

213.  OTTENBERG,  R.,  &  KALISKI,  D.  J.:   "Accidents  in 

transfusion.  Their  prevention  by  preliminary  examina- 
tion. Based  on  an  experience  of  128  transfusions." 
Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1913,  Ixi.  2138. 

214.  OTTENBERG,  R.,  KALISKI,  D.  J.,  &  FRIEDMAN, 

S.  S.  :  "  Experimental  agglutinative  and  hemolytic 
transfusions."  Amer.  Journ.  Med.  Res.,  1913,  xxviii. 
141. 

215.  OTTENBERG,  R.,  &  LIBMAN,  E.  :   "  Blood  transfusion  ; 

indications  ;  results  ;  general  management."  Am. 
Journ.  Med.  Sci.,  1915,  cl.  36. 

216.  OTTENBERG,   R.,  &  THALIMER,   W.  :     "  Studies   in 

experimental  transfusion."  Journ.  Med.  Res.,  1915- 
16,  xxxiii.  213. 

217.  PANUM,  P.  L.  :  "  Experimentelle  Untersuchungen  iiber 

die  Transfusion,  Transplantation,  oder  Substitution  des 
Blutes  in  theoretischer  und  praktischer  beziehung." 
Virchow's  Arch.  f.  Path.  Anat,  1863,  xxvii.  240,  433. 

218.  PEMBERTON,  J.  DE  J.  :    "  Blood  transfusion."     Surg. 

Gynec.  and  Obstet,  1919,  xxviii.  262.  (Also  in  Collected 
Papers  of  the  Mayo  Clinic,  1918,  x.  508.) 

219.  PEMBERTON,  J.  DE  J.  :    "  Practical  considerations  of 

the  dangers  associated  with  blood  transfusions."  Journ. 
Iowa  State  Med.  Soc,  1920,  x.  170.  (Also  in  Collected 
Papers  of  the  Mayo  Clinic,  1919,  xi.  635.) 

220.  PERCY,  N.  M.  :    "A  simplified  method  of  blood  trans- 

fusion, with  report  of  six  cases  of  pernicious  anaemia 
treated  by  massive  blood  transfusions  and  splenectomy." 
Surg.  Gynec.  and  Obstet.,  1915,  xxi.  360. 

221.  PETERSON,  E.  W.  :     "  Purpura  hsemorrhagica  treated 

by  blood  transfusion."  Post-Graduate,  N.Y.,  1914, 
xxix.  499. 

222.  PETERSON,  E.  W.  :    "  Results  from  blood  transfusion 

in  the  treatment  of  severe  post-operative  anaemia  and 
the  haemorrhagic  diseases."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc, 
1916,  Ixvi.  1291. 

223.  PETREN,    G.  :     "  Coagulation   time   in  icterus."     Beitr. 

z.  Klin.  Chirurg.,  1920,  cxx.  501. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  153 

224.  PONFICK  :    "  Experimentelle  Beitrage  zur  Lehre  von  der 

Transfusion."  Virchow's  Arch.  f.  Path.  AnaL,  1875, 
Ixii.  273. 

225.  POOL,  E.  H.  :    "  Transfusion  and  splenectomy  for  von 

Jaksch's  anaemia  in  an  infant."  Ann.  Surg.,  March 
1915.     (In  Transact,  of  N.Y.  Surg.  Soc.) 

226.  POOL,  E.  H.,  &  McCLURE,  R.  D.  :    "  Transfusion  by 

Carrel's  end-to-end  suture  method.  With  report  of 
cases."     Ann.  Surg.,   1910,  hi.  433. 

227.  POPE,  L.  :    "  Simplified  transfusion."     Journ.  Am.  Med. 

Assoc,  1913,  Ix.  1284. 

228.  PRIMROSE,  A.  :    "  The  value  of  the  transfusion  of  blood 

in  the  treatment  of  the  wounded  in  war."  Ann.  Surg., 
1918,  Ixviii.  118. 

229.  PRIMROSE,   A.,   &   RYERSON,   E.   S.  :     "  The   direct 

transfusion  of  blood,  its  value  in  haemorrhage  and 
shock  and  in  treatment  of  the  wounded  in  the  war." 
Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1916,  ii.  384. 

230.  RAMIREZ,   M.   A.:    ''Horse    asthma    following    blood 

transfusion."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1919,  Ixxiii. 
984. 

231.  RAMSAY,    J.  :     "  Transfusion    of   blood    in    nephritis." 

Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1920,  i.  766. 

232.  RANSOM,   S.   H.  :     "  The  treatment  of  staphylococcus 

septicaemia  by  transfusion  of  immune  blood."  Ann, 
Surg.,  1917,  Ixvi.  513. 

233.  RAULSTON,  B.  O.,  &  WOODYATT,  R.  T.  :     "  Blood 

transfusion  in  diabetes  mellitus."  Journ.  Arn.  Med. 
Assoc,  1914,  Ixii.  996. 

234.  RICHARDSON,  B.  W.  :    "  The  cause  of  coagulation  of 

the  blood.  The  Astley  Cooper  prize  essay  for  1856, 
with  additional  observations  and  experiments."  London, 
1858. 

235.  RICHARDSON,  E.  H.  :    "  Treatment  of  the  emergency 

cases  of  ectopic  pregnancy."  Johns  Hopkins  Hosp. 
Bull,  1916,  xxvii.  262. 

236.  ROBERTSON,  L.  B.  :   "  The  transfusion  of  whole  blood." 

Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1916,  ii.  38. 

237.  ROBERTSON,  L.  B.  :    "A  contribution  on  blood  trans- 

fusion in  war  surgery."     Lancet,  1918,  i.  759. 


154  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

238.  ROBERTSON,  L.  B.  :   "  Blood  transfusion  in  h^emorrhagic 

disease  of  the  new-born."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1921,  i. 

239.  ROBERTSON,   L.   B.  :     "  Blood   transfusion   in    severe 

burns  in  infants  and  young  children."  Canad.  Med. 
Assoc.  Journ.,  1921,  xi.  744. 

240.  ROBERTSON,  L.   B.,  &  WATSON,  C.   G.  :     "  Further 

observations  on  the  results  of  blood  transfusion  in  war 
surgery."     Ann.  Surg.,  1918,  Ixvii.  1. 

241.  ROBERTSON,    O.    H.  :     "  The   effects   of  experimental 

plethora  on  blood  production."  Journ.  Exper.  Med., 
1917,  xxvi.  221. 

242.  ROBERTSON,   O.   H.  :     "A  method  of  citrated   blood 

transfusion."     Brit.  Med.  J  own.,  1918,  i.  477. 

243.  ROBERTSON,  O.  H.  :    "  Transfusion  with  preserved  red 

cells."     Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1918,  i.  691. 

244.  ROBERTSON,  O.  H.  :    "  Memorandum  on  blood  trans- 

fusion."    Rep.  of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  iv.  1919,  143. 

245.  ROBERTSON,  O.  H.,  &  BOCK,  A.  V.  :    "  Memorandum 

on  blood  volume  after  haemorrhage."  Rep.  of  the  Med. 
Res.  Com.,  vi.  1919,  213. 

246.  ROBERTSON,  O.  H.,  &  BOCK,  A.  V.  :  "  Blood  volume  in 

wounded  soldiers."     Journ.  Exp.  Med.,  1919,  xxix.  139. 

247.  ROSE,  A.  :    "A  case  of  melaena  neonatorum  successfully 

treated  by  the  injection  of  blood  serum."  Brit.  Med. 
Journ.,  1917,  ii.  762. 

248.  ROSE,  C.  W.,  &  HUND,  E.  J.  :    ''  Treatment  of  pneu- 

monic disturbances  complicating  influenza."  Journ. 
Am,.  Med.  Assoc.,  1919,  Ixxii.  642. 

249.  ROUS,  P.,  &  TURNER,  J.  R.  :    "  The  preservation  of 

living  red  blood  cells  in  vitro.  I.  Methods  of  pre- 
servation. II.  The  transfusion  of  kept  cells."  Journ, 
Exp.  Med.,  1916,  xxiii.  219. 

250.  ROUS,  P.,  &  WILSON,  G.  W.  :    "  Fluid  substitutes  for 

transfusion  after  haemorrhage."  Journ.  Am.  Med. 
Assoc,  Ixx.  219-222. 

251.  RUECK,    G.    A.  :       "  Transfusion    by    the    gravitation 

method."     Med.  Rec,  1915,  Ixxxvii.  354. 

252.  SALANT,  W.,  &  WISE,  L.  E.  :    "  The  action  of  sodium 

citrate  and  its  decomposition  in  the  body."  Journ. 
Biolog.  Chem.,  1917,  xxviii,  27. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  155 

253.  SANFORD,  A.  H.  :    ''  Iso-agglutination  groups  :    a  dia- 

gram showing  their  interrelation."  Journ.  Am.  Med. 
Assoc,  1916,  Ixvii.  808. 

254.  SANFORD,  A.  H.  :    "  Selection  of  the  donor  for  trans- 

fusion."    Journ.  Lancet,  1917,  xxxvii.  698. 

255.  SANFORD,  A.  H.  :   ''A  modification  of  the  Moss  method 

of  determining  iso-haemagglutination  groups."  Journ. 
Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1918,  Ixx.  1221.  (Also  in  Collected 
Papers  of  the  Mayo  Clinic,  1918,  x.  504.) 

256.  SATTERLEE,  H.  S.,  &  HOOKER,  R.  S.  :   "  Experiments 

to  develop  a  more  widely  useful  method  of  blood  trans- 
fusion."    Arch.  Int.  Med.,  1914,  xiii.  51. 

257.  SATTERLEE,  H.  S.,  &  HOOKER,  R.  S.  :    "  The  further 

development  of  an  apparatus  for  the  transfusion  of 
blood."     Surg.  Gynec.  and  Obst.,  1914,  xix.  235. 

258.  SATTERLEE,  H.  S.,  &  HOOKER,  R.  S.  :    "  The  use  of 

hirudin  in  the  transfusion  of  blood."  Journ.  Am. 
Med.  Assoc,  1914,  Ixii.  1781. 

259.  SATTERLEE,  H.  S.,  &  HOOKER,  R.  S.  :  "  Transfusion 

of  blood,  with  special  reference  to  the  use  of  anti- 
coagulants."   Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1916,  Ixvi.  618. 

260.  SAUERBRUCH  :    "  Artery  of  donor  introduced  directly 

into  recipient's  vein  for  transfusion  of  blood."  Munch. 
Medizin.  Wchnschr.,  1915,  Ixii.      No.  45. 

261.  SCHEEL,  O.,  &  BANG,  O.  :    "  Transfusion  in  a  case  of 

pernicious  anaemia."  Norsk  Mag.  f.  Lcegevidenskaben, 
1920,  March. 

262.  SCHLOSS,  C.  M.,  &  COMMINSKEY,  L.  J.  J.  :  "  Spon- 

taneous haemorrhage  in  the  new-born."  Am.  Journ, 
Dis.  Child.,  1911,  i.  276. 

263.  SCHULTZ,  W.  :   In  Gravitz.  "  Klinische  Pathologic  des 

Blutes."     Leipsic,  1911,  p.  381. 

264.  SCHWEITZER:     "Blood    reinfusion    in    extra-uterine 

pregnancy."  Munch.  Med.  Wchnschr.,  1921,  Ixviii. 
699. 

265.  SIMONS,    I.  :     "  Experiences   with   the    sodium   citrate 

method  of  indirect  transfusion  of  blood."  Journ.  Am, 
Med.  Assoc,  1915,  Ixv.  1339. 

266.  SHATTOCK,   S.   G.  :     "  Chromocyte   clumping  in  acute 

pneumonia  and  certain  other  diseases,  and  the  signific- 


156  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

ance  of  the  buffy  coat  in  the  shed  blood."     Journ.  Path, 
and  BacL,  1900,  vi.  303. 

267.  SMITH,   T.  :     "  Transfusion  of  blood   in  the  case  of  a 

patient  suffering  from  purpura."     Lancet,  1873,  i.  837. 

268.  SORESI,  A.  L.  :    "  New  instrument  for  direct  transfusion 

of  blood   and   temporary   anastomosis   between  blood 
vessels."     XVI.  Internat.  Med.  Congr.,  Budapest,  1909. 

269.  SORESI,  A.  L.  :    "  Clinical  indications  for  direct  trans- 

fusion of  blood,  with  the  author's  technique."     Med. 
Rec,  1912,  Ixxxi.  835. 

270.  SPENCER,    W.    G.  :     "  Transfusion    of    blood    in    civil 

practice."     Med.  Sci.  Abstr.  and  Rev.,  1919,  i.  309. 

271.  STANLEY,    L.    L.  :      "Blood    transfusion    apparatus." 

Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1920,  Ixxiv.  671. 

272.  STANSFELD,  A.  E.  :    "  The  principles  of  the  transfusion 

of  blood."     Lancet,  1917,  i.  488. 

273.  STANSFELD,  A.  E.  :    "  An  apparatus  for  the  transfusion 

of  blood  by  the  citrate  method."     Laiicet,  1918,  i.  334. 

274.  SYDENSTRICKER,    V.     P.    W.,     MASON,    V.    R.,    & 

RIVERS,  T.  M.  :    "  Transfusion  of  blood  by  the  citrate 
method."     Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1917,  Ixviii.  1677. 

275.  TARR,  E.  M.  :    "  Intravenous  injections  in  infancy.     Ad- 

vantage   of    the    superior    longitudinal    sinus    route." 
Arch.  Pediatr.,  1919,  xxxvi.  71. 

276.  TELFER,  S.  V.  :     "  Note  on  the  preparation  of  sterile 

gum  acacia  solution  for  intravenous  injection."     Rep. 
of  the  Med.  Res.  Com.,  \.,  1919,  42. 

277.  TERRIEN,    E.  :     "  Transfusion   of  blood   in   malignant 

measles."     Bull.  Soc  Med.  des  Hop.,  1919,  xliii.  1134. 

278.  THALIMER,    W.  :     "  Hemoglobinuria    after    a    second 

transfusion  with  the  same  donor."     Journ.  Am.  Med. 
Assoc,  1921,  Ixxvi.  1345. 

279.  THOMAS,  T.  G.  :     "  The  intravenous  injection  of  milk. 

as  a  substitute  for  the  transfusion  of  blood."     N.Y. 
Med.  Journ.,  1878,  xxvii.  449. 

280.  UNGER,    L.  :      "  Melsena    neonatorum."     Wien.    Klin. 

Woch.,  1912,  xxxix. 

281.  UNGER,  L.  J.  :   "A  new  method  of  syringe  transfusion." 

Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1915,  Ixiv.  582. 

282.  UNGER,  L.  J.  :    "  Recent  simplifications  of  the  syringe 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  157 

method  of  transfusion."  Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc. ^  1915, 
Ixv.  1029. 

283.  UNGER,  L.  J.  :    "  Transfusion  of  unmodified  blood,  an 

analysis  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  cases."  Journ. 
Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1917,  Ixix.  2159. 

284.  UNGER,  L.  J.  :    "  Precautions  necessary  in  the  selection 

of  a  donor  for  blood  transfusion."  Journ.  Am.  Med. 
Assoc,  1921,  Ixxvi.  9. 

285.  VINCENT,    B.  :     "  Blood    transfusion   for   hemorrhagic 

diseases  of  the  new-born.  The  use  of  the  external 
jugular  vein  in  infants."  Boston  Med.  and  Surg.  Journ. 
1912,  clxvi.  627. 

286.  VINCENT,  B.  :    "  Blood  transfusion  with  paraffin-coated 

needles  and  tubes."  Surg.  Gynec  and  Obstet.,  Nov. 
1916. 

287.  VINES,  H.  W.  C.  :    "  Anaphylaxis  in  the  treatment  of 

haemophilia."     Quart.  Journ.  Med.,  1920,  xiii.  257. 

288.  VINES,  H.  W.  C.  :    "  The  coagulation  of  the  blood.     I. 

The  role  of  calcium.  II.  The  clotting  complex." 
Journ.  Phys.,  1921,  Iv.  86,  287. 

289.  VOGEL,  K.  M.,  &  McCURDY,  U.  F.  :    "  Blood  trans- 

fusion and  regeneration  in  pernicious  anaemia."  Arch. 
Internat.  Med.,  1913,  xii.  707. 

290.  WAAG,  A.  :    "  Repeated  small  injections  of  blood  in  per- 

nicious anaemia."  Munch.  Medizin.  Wchnschr.,  1921, 
Ixviii.  677. 

291.  WALLICH,   V.,   &  LEVADITI,   C.  :      "  Recherches  sur 

les  reactions  sanguines,  a  considerer  a  propos  de  la 
transfusion  de  sang."  Bull,  de  VAcad.  de  Med.,  1914, 
Ixxviii.     No.  17. 

292.  WARD,    G.  :      "  Transfusion    of    plasma."     Brit.    Med. 

Journ.,  1918,  i.  301. 

293.  WATSON,  J.  J.  :    "A  method  of  fixation  of  vein  to  facili- 

tate the  introduction  of  a  needle  for  intravenous  injec- 
tions."    Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1911,  Ivii.  383. 

294.  WAUGH,  W.  G.  :    "  An  investigation  of  the  end  result  in 

one  hundred  and  twenty-four  cases  of  blood  trans- 
fusion."    Brit.  Med.  Journ.,  1919,  ii.  39. 

295.  WEIL,    P.    E.  :      "  Serum    treatment    of    haemophiUa." 

Lancet,  1920,  ii.  300. 


158  BLOOD   TRANSFUSION 

296.  WEIL,   R.  J.  :     "  Sodium  citrate  in  the  transfusion  of 

blood."     Journ.  Am.  Med.  Assoc,  1915,  Ixiv.  425. 

297.  WILLIAMSON,  H.  :    "  Blood  transfusion  before  opera- 

tion in  severe  secondary  anaemias."     Lancet,  1920,  i. 
867. 

298.  WOLTMANN,  H.  :    "  Transfusion  by  the  citrate  method 

in  a  sixty-hour-old  baby  with  melsena  neonatorum." 
Am.  Journ.  Med.  Set.,  1915,  Ixv.  2163. 

299.  WREN,  SIR  C.  :    "  An  account  of  the  rise  and  attempts 

of  a  way  to  conveigh  liquors  immediately  into  the  mass 
of  blood."     Philosophical  Trans.,  1665,  i.  128. 

300.  ZIEMSSEN,  VON  :    "  Ueber  die  subcutane  Blutinjection 

und  liber  cine  einfache  Methode  der  intra venosen  Trans- 
fusion."    Miinch.  Med.  Wchnschr.,  1892,  xix.  323. 

301.  ZIMMERMANN,    R.  :     "  Blood   transfusion   in   gyngeco- 

logical   cases."     Miinch,   Med.  Wchnschr.,  1920,  Ixvii. 
898. 

302.  ZIMMERMANN,  R.  :     "  Testing    donor's   blood    before 

transfusion."     Zentralbl.  f.   Chir.,  Leipzig,   1920,   xliv. 
1146. 


INDEX 


Abdominal    operations,    shock    in 
relation  to,  27 
value  of  transfusion  following,  32 
Abdominal  veins,  "  bleeding  into," 

27 
Accidents,  loss  of  blood  following,  20 
Acholuric  jaundice,  blood  condition 
in,  93 
blood  groups  of  patients  with,  93 
transfusion  in,  94 
Acidosis,  in  pregnancy,  63 
Agglutination,  84,  85 
abnormal,  56 
among  animals,  79 
in  infants  and  children,  84 
method  of  the  test,  101 
phenomenon  of,  71-73 
potential,  of  foetal  corpuscles,  85 
preceding  haemolysis,   70,   76 
Agglutinins,  71 

in  the  blood,  discovery  of,  15 
in    maternal    blood    serum    and 

milk,  86 
"major"  and  "minor,"   73 
"  minor  "  in  citrated  blood,  123 
"  Agglutinophilic "     properties     of 

blood  corpuscles,  72,  85 
Agote,    Prof.,    first    transfusion    of 

citrated  blood  by,  16 
Air  hunger,  21 
Air-lock  in  transfusion  apparatus, 

125,  131,  133 
Alkaline   solution  in  treatment   of 

shock,  34 
Alkalinized  blood,  63 
Amaurosis,  21 
Amputations,  value  of  transfusion 

following,  32 
Anaemia,  19,  50 
acute,  19,  20 

amount  of  blood  necessary  in 

transfusion  treatment,  25 
effect  of  transfusion  on,  22 
following  haemorrhage,  20,  24 
signs  and  symptoms  of,  20 
transfusion  treatment  of,  31 


Anaemia  (contd. ) : 
aplastic,  50 
haemophilia  with,  48 
splenic,  50 

see  also  Pernicious  anaemia 
Anaesthesia,  transfusion  in  conjunc- 
tion with,  33 
Anaesthetics,  shock  accentuated  by 

administration  of,  31 
Anaphylactic  shock,  following  trans- 
fusion, 77 
in  pernicious  anaemia,  57 
influence  on  coagulation  time  of 
blood,  45 
Anastomosis,  Crile's  method,  109 
for  direct  transfusion,  108,  109 
Antecubital  veins,  injection  of  blood 

into,  134,  135 
Anti-agglutinins,  74 
Antibodies,  in  the  blood,  58 
Anticoagulants,  16 
action  of,  120,  122 
in  haemophilia,  47 
sodium  citrate,  121 
transfusion  with,  118 
Aplastic  anaemia,  50 
Arm  tourniquet,  126,  128 
Army,  blood  transfusion  in,  17 
Arteries,  in  direct  transfusion,  108, 
109 
occlusion  of,  prevention  of,  109 
selection  of,  for  transfusion,  108 
Asthma,  transmission  of.  68 
Auto-haemolysins,  development  of, 

94 
Auto-haemolysis   of   blood   outside 
the  body,  94 
phenomenon  of,  94,  95 


Bacteria,    blood  inhibiting   growth 

of,  58 
Bacterial  infections,  58-63 

transfusion  in  relation  to,  58,  60 
Benzol  poisoning,  transfusion  treat- 
ment of,  65,  66 


159 


160 


INDEX 


Blood,  administration  of,  apparatus 
for,  115,  126,  127,  130-133 
methods,  108,  112,  130-135 
time  occupied  in,  131,  132 
agglutinins  and  iso-agglutinins  in, 

15,  71,  72,  74 
amount  in  the  body,   how  mea- 
sured, 22,  23 
animals',  use  of,  5,  6,  8,  9,  15 
anti-agglutinins  in,  74 
antibodies  in,  58 
auto-haemolysis  of,  94 
bactericidal  power  of,  58 
calcium  content  of,  120 
citrated,  see  Citrated  blood 
clotting  of,  see  Coagulation 
coagulation  of,  see  Coagulation 
defibrinated,  early  use  of,  11,  12 
examination  of,  for  transfusion, 

56,  57,  95 
hydrogen-ion  concentration  of,  28 
immunized,    in    pyogenic    infec- 
tions, 58 
inhibiting  growth  of  bacteria,  58 
loss  of,  see  Haemorrhage 
maternal,  agglutinins  in,  86 
of  donors,  see  Blood  donors 
of  patients,  reinf  usion  with,  42,  43 

testing  of,  56 
rapid  administration,  danger  of, 

78 
substitutes  for ,  35,  36 
testing  of,  for  transfusion,  68,  83, 

92,  95 
total  quantity  in  the  body,  22 
transfused,  corpuscles  in,  37 
relative    value    of     corpuscles 
and  plasma  in,  36,  37 
withdrawal  of,  methods  and  tech- 
nique, 108,  112,  116,  126-128 
Blood  clot,   mechanism  of  forma- 
tion of,  119 
rapid  haemorrhage  causing,  24 
see  also  Coagulation 
Blood  corpuscles,  "agglutinophilic" 
properties  of,  72,  85 
and  plasma,  relative   value    of, 

36,  37 
clumping  together  of,  70 
condition  during  shock,  39 
conditions  due  to  alterations  in,  50 
destruction  of,  in  the  toxaemias,  64 
effect  of  transfusion  on,  52 
foBtal,  potential  agglutination  of, 

85 
in  transfused  blood,  36,  37 
function  of,  37 


Blood  corpuscles  {contd,): 

quantity  and  concentration  dur- 
ing shock,  28 
transfusion  of,  64 
Blood  count,  during  shock,  39 
following  haemorrhage,  39 
following  transfusion,  40 
in  pernicious  anaemia,  51,  53-56 
Blood  diseases,  50-58 
Blood  donor,  69 
blood  of,  56,  57 

agglutinating  power  of  serum 

of,  72-74 
testing  of,  68 

transmission  of  disease  by,  67, 
68 
characteristics  of,  100 
choice  of,  68,  96-107 
effect  of  blood  loss  on,  99 
for  new-born  infants,  49 
for  pernicious  anaemia,  56,  57 
injury  to,  during  transfusion.  111, 

124 
members  of  patient's  familv  as, 

85,  90,  92,  95 
"  professional,"  69,  98 
testing  of,  83,  92,  95-97 
for  blood  groups,  101 
treatment  of,  60,  99,  100 
"  universal,"  72,  73 
vaccine    treatment    of,    prior    to 

withdrawal  of  blood,  60 
withdrawal  of  blood  from,    108, 
109,  124 
by  anastomosis,  108,  109 
by  Kimpton-Brown  tube,  116, 

117 
by  needle,   126-128 
by  syringe,  112,  113 
Blood  groups,  67,  69,  70,  101 
among  animals,  79 
and    disease,    relation    between, 

81,  93 
classification  of,  70,  71 
compatibility  of,  72,  75,  80 
in  families,  84,  90,  92 
testing  of,  102 
earliest  classification  of,  15 
family  incidence  of,  84,  90,  92 
incidence  among  our  own  popula- 
tion, 83 
incompatibility  of,  80,  92 
earliest  reference  to,  6 
in  animals,  80 
in  families,  84,  90,  92 
symptoms  of,  75-77 
testing  for,  101,  102 


INDEX 


161 


Blood  groups  {contd.) : 

inheritance  of,  86,  87,  90,  91 

medico-legal  considerations,  92 
maternal,  compared  with  those  of 

infants,  86,  92 
overlapping  of,  72,  96 
pathology  of,  79 
phenomena  of,  69-75 
physiology  of,  79 
popular  beliefs  concerning,  84 
racial  incidence  of,  81,  82 
reactions  between  the  serum  and 

corpuscles  of,  70,  71,  72,  73 
testing  for,  in  blood  donors,  97, 

101 
transfusion  in  relation  to,  95 
"  unit  characters  "  in,  86,  87,  88 
Blood  measurements,  22,  23 
Blood  plasma,  in  transfused  blood, 

36,  37 
Blood  pressure,  21 

as  an  indication  for  transfusion, 

40 
danger  points  in,  21 
following  loss  of  blood,  21 
low,  essential  feature  of  shock,  27 
transfusion  treatment  of,  32 
Blood  reactions,  70,  71,  72,  80,  101 
clinical  pictiire  of,  75 
disease  in  relation  to,  93 
family  incidence   of,    84,    90,    92, 

95 
following  transfusion,  95,  96, 122, 

123 
in  infants,  84,  90,  92 
incompatibility  of,  transfusion  in 

relation  to,  96 
intensity  of,  variations  in,  73 
recognition  of  symptoms  of,  75- 

77 
variation  in  degree  of,  76 
Blood  recipients,   "  universal,"   72, 

95 
"  Blood   relations,"   transfusion  in 

relation  to,  84,  92,  95 
Blood  serum,  agglutination  test  of, 
101 
preservation  of ,  101,  102 
stock,  101 

collection  of,  102 
Blood  volume,  changes  in, in  haemor- 
rhage and  shock,  24,  25,  27 
diminution  in  shock,  27,  32 
estimation  of,  22 
imperfect  oxygenation  due  to, 
36 
life  dependent  on,  24,  25 

11 


Blundell,    James,    his    "  impellor," 
10,  11 
transfusion  by  (in  1818),  10,  11 

Body,  total  quantity  of  blood  in  the, 
22 

Breathing,   difficult,   during  trans- 
fusion, 78 

Burns,  transfusion  for  shock  due  to, 
136 


Calcium,  action  of,  120 

in  the  blood,  forms  in  which  pre- 
sent, 120 
precipitation  of,  119 
Cancer,  transfusion  for,  9,   18 
Cannula,  for  direct  transfusion,  110 

for  indirect  transfusion,  130 
Capillary      circulation,      condition 
during  shock,  39 
stagnation         of,         following 
haemorrhage  and  shock,  27, 
29 
Carbon  monoxide  poisoning,  64 
condition  of  the  blood  in,  64 
transfusion  treatment  of,  64,  65 
Children,  transfusion  of,  technique, 
134 
see  also  Infants 
Chloroform,  shock  accentuated  by 

administration  of,  31 
Chlorosis,  50 

Circulation,  blood  volume  necessary 
to  maintain  balance  of,  24, 
25 
capillary  and  venous,  comparison 

during  shock,  39 
condition      during      shock      and 

haemorrhage,  27,  28,  29,  39 
stagnation  of,  28 
see  also  Blood 
Citrate  reactions,  122,  123 
Citrated  blood,  16,  121,  124 

administration  of,  methods,  129- 

134 
keeping  and  care  of,  128,  129 
reaction  following  use  of ,  122,  123 
transfusion  of,  121,  124 
first  recorded  case  of,  16 
in  pernicious  anaemia,  51,  56 
see  also  Sodium  citrate 
Clotting,  see  Coagulation 
Coagulation,      deficient,     following 
haemorrhage,  41 
fficulties     connected    with,    in 
early  experiments,  11,  12 
effect  of  transfusion  on,  42 


162 


INDEX 


Coagulation,  mechanism  of  produc- 
tion of,  119 
outside  the  body,  118,  119 
prevention  of,  114,  120 
Clotting,  prevention  of,  by  sodium 
citrate,  119,  120 
prevention  of,  during  transfusion, 

109,  110,  112 
transfusion    simplified    by    pre- 
vention of,  119 
Coagulation      time,      anaphylactic 
shock  influencing,  45 
effect  of  transfusion  on,  46,  47 
haemorrhage  in  relation  to,  44,  45 
in  jaundice,  44 
prolongation  of,  44 
Coal-gas      poisoning,      transfusion 

treatment  of,  64 
Coga,  Arthur,  8 

Cold,  predisposing  to  shock,  29,  30 
Cox,    Thomas,    transfusion   experi- 
ments by,  3 
Crile,  improvement  in  technique  of 
transfusion  by,  15 
method  of  direct  transfusion,  109 
Curtis    and    David,    improvements 
in  technique  of    transfusion 
by,  16 

Daniel,  of  Leipsic,  3 
Darwin,  Erasmus,  9 
Death,  loss  of  blood  causing,  24 
Denys,    John,    first    human    trans- 
fusion performed  by,  3,  5,  6 
Diabetes  mellitus,  transfusion    in, 

66 
Diphtheria,  60 

acute  toxaemia  in,  60 
experimental  transfusion  in,   60, 
61 
Direct  transfusion,    apparatus   for, 
109,  110 
methods,  108,  109,  110 
objections  to,  110,  111 
technique  of,  108-111 
Disease,    relation    between    blood 
groups  and,  81,  93 
transmission     by     blood     trans- 
fusion, 68 
Drysdale,  Dr.  J.  H.,  52 
Duodenal  ulcer,  severe  haemorrhage 
from,  transfusion  treatment, 
41 

Eclampsia,  "foetal  threat"  in  re- 
lation to,  85 
transfusion  treatment,  62 


Ectopic  gestation,  rupture  of,  trans- 
fusion following,  42 

Elsberg  and  Bernheim's  method  of 
direct  transfusion,  109 

Emboli,   multiple,  77 

Endocarditis,  transfusion  for,  60 

Ether,  shock  accentuated  by  ad- 
ministration of,  31 

Fever,  transfusion  for,  9 

Fluids,  administration  of,  during 
shock,  34 

"  Foetal  threat,"  85 

Folli,  Francesco,  supposed  blood 
transfusion  by  (1654),  2 

Fontanelle,  use  of,  135,  136 

Forced  fluids,  34 

Fullerton's  method  of  direct  trans- 
fusion, 110 

Gametes,  segregation  of,  88 
Gastric   ulcer,    severe    haemorrhage 
from,  transfusion  treatment, 
41 
Grafts,  tissue,  80 
Gum  transfusion,  35,  36,  37 

and   blood   transfusion,    relative 

value  of,  35,  37 
objections  to,  36 
Gurye,  Caspar  de,  6 

Haematemesis,  treatment  of,  41 
Haemoglobin     percentage,      during 

shock  and  haemorrhage,  39 
Haemoglobinuria,  6,  7,  70 

as  symptom  of  blood  reaction,  76 

following  blood  transfusion,  76 

paroxysmal,blood  condition  in,  94 
Haemolysed  blood,  toxicity  of,  77 
Haemolysins,  71 
Haemolysis,  94,  95 

agglutination  preceding,  70,  76 

early  reference  to,  6 
Haemophilia,  anaemia  with,  48 

anticoagulants  in,  47 

blood  condition  in,  45 

sodium  citrate  administration  in, 
47,  48 

transfusion  treatment  of,  45-48 
Haemophilics,  coagulation  time  of 
blood  of,  46,  47 

transfusion  beneficial  to,  46 
Haemorrhage,  20 

acute  anaemia  following,  20,  24 

blood  counts  following,  39 
•  blood- volume  changes  in,  24,  25, 
27 


INDEX 


163 


Haemorrhage,  coagulation  time  in 
relation  to,  44,  45 
condition  of  blood  following,  24, 

27,  28,  39 
danger  of,  20,  23 
effects  of,  how  combated,  33 
following    gastric     or     duodenal 
ulcer,  transfusion  treatment, 
41 
general  treatment  of,  31,  33 
gum  treatment  of,  35,  36 
in  new-born  infants,  transfusion 

treatment,  49 
intraperitoneal,  42 
limits  of,  24 

post-partum,    transfusion    treat- 
ment, 42 
rapid,  23,  24 

reflex  compensation  for,  99 
reinfusion  treatment  of,  42 
saline  treatment  of,  33 
secondary,  40,  41 

indications  for  transfusion  in,  41 
shock  always  associated  with,  20, 

26 
shock  and,  clinical  difference  be- 
tween, 38 
signs  and  symptoms  of,  38 
transfusion  treatment  of ,  20, 25,31 
effects  of,  how  judged,  40 
indications  for,  40 
traumatic,  40 
Haemorrhagic  diseases,  44-50 
Haemostasis,  blood  transfusion  pro- 
ducing, 42,  44,  45,  48 
Harvey,  William,  his  theory  of  the 

circulation,  2 
Heart,  dilatation  of,  78 

effect  of  loss  of  blood  on,  23 
Helmholtz,  method  of  transfusion 

of  infants,  135 
Heredity,  blood  groups  in  relation 
to,  86,  87,  90,  91 
Mendelian  theory  of,  86,  90 
Higginson's  transfusion  instrument, 

13,  14 
Hirudin,  use  of,   16 
Histamine,  30 
production  of,  30 
production  of  shock  by,  30 
Horse  asthma,  transmission  of,  68 
Howard's    method    of    transfusion 

of  infants,  135 
Hydrogen-ion  concentration  in  the 
blood,  28,  31 
shock  in  relation  to,  28,  32 
Hydrophobia,  transfusion  for,  9 


Immunized  blood,  transfusion  by, 

in  pyogenic  infections,  58 
Incompatibility,  symptoms  of,  6,  75 
Indirect  transfusion.  111 
Infants,  blood  groups  in,  84,  92 

compared      with      those       of 
mothers,  86,  92 
blood  reactions  in,  84,  90,  92 
transfusion  of,  48 

conditions    necessitating,     49, 

134 
dosage,  136 
technique,  134-136 
with  maternal  blood,  85,  92 
withdrawal  of  blood  from,  136 
Influenzal   pneumonia,    transfusion 

for,  61 
Innocent  VIII,  2 

Internal  saphenous  vein,  injection 
of  blood  into,  in  infants,  136 
Iso-agglutinins,  72,  79 

distribution  among  animals,  79, 
80 
Iso-haemolysins,  72,  79 

in  animals,  artificial  reproduction 
of,  96 
Isotonic   saline   solution   in   treat- 
ment of  shock,  34 

Jaiuidice,  44 

acholuric,  transfusion  in,  94 
blood   groups   in   patients   with, 

93 
haemorrhage  following  operation 

in  cases  of,  44 
transfusion  in  cases  of,  44 
Joekes,  Dr.,  52,  57 
Jugular   vein,   injection     of   blood 
into,  135 

Keith,   on  blood  volimie  changes, 
24,  27 
on  shock  and  haemorrhage,  32 

Kimpton  and  Brown,  improve- 
ments in  technique  of  trans- 
fusion by,  16 

Kimpton-Brown  tube,  whole  blood 
transfusion  with,  technique, 
114 

King,  Edmund,  transfusion  experi- 
ments by,  3,  4,  8 

Lamb's    blood,    early    transfusions 

with,  5,  9,  15 
Legitimacy,    inheritance    of    blood 

groups  in  relation  to,  92 


164 


INDEX 


Leuksemia,  50 

blood  groups  in  patients  suffering 
from,  81 

Lewisohn's  sodium   citrate  experi- 
ments, 16,  120,  122,  123 

Longitudinal  sinus,  use  of,  135 

Lower,    Richard,    transfusion    ex- 
periments by,  3,  8 

Malaria,     transmission     by     trans- 
fusion, 67,  68 
Malignant  disease,  blood  groups  in 
patients  suffering  from,   81, 
93 
"  Maternal  threat,"  85,  92 
Measles,  blood  injections  in,  62 
Median  basilic  vein,  accessible  for 
direct  transfusion,  108 
incision  of,  130 
puncture  of,  126-128 
Melsena    neonatorum,     transfusion 
for,  technique,  134,  135 
value  of  transfusion  in,  48 
Mendelian  theory,  86,  90 

of  blood  groups,  86,  87,  88,  90 
Milk,  injection  of,   15 

maternal,  agglutinins  in,  86 
Muscle,    damaged,     production    of 
histamine  from,  30 

Needle,  for  transfusion,  126 
case  of,  126 
improved  form  of,  113 
Nephritis,  transfusion  treatment  of, 

63 
New-born  infants,  blood  donors  for, 
49 
blood  reactions  of,  84,  90,  92 
hsemorrhagic  disease  of,  48,  49 
transfusion  of,  48 
technique,  134-136 
with  maternal  blood,  84,  85,  92 
Nitrobenzol  poisoning,   transfusion 
treatment  of,  65 

Obstetrics,  transfusion  in,  42 
Operations,  shock  following,  31 

value  of  transfusion  following,  32 
Osmotic  pressure,  36 
significance  of,  36 
Oxygenation,  imperfect,  blood  loss 
causing,  36 
solutions  increasing,  37 
Oxyhsemoglobin,     conversion    into 
carboxyhsemoglobin    in  car- 
bon monoxide  poisoning,  64 


Pain,  predisposing  to  shock,  29 
Paraffin  wax,  coating  of  glass  tube 
with,  114,  116 
in  prevention  of  clotting,  110,  1 14 
Paroxysmal  hsemoglobinuria,  blood 

conditions  in,  94 
Pedigree  of  blood  groups,  90 
Pellagra,  transfusion  in  cases  of,  66 
Pepys,  Samuel,  7,  8,  9 
Pernicious  anaemia,  50 
blood  condition  in,  93 
blood  count  in,  51,  53-56 
blood  groups  in  patients  with,  93 
subcutaneous  blood  injections  in, 

58 
transfusion  treatment  of,   50-58, 
95 
complications  of,  57 
cases  illustrating,  53-55 
choice  of  blood  donor,  56,  57 
dosage,  52 

reactions  following,  57 
Perspiration,  blood  loss  due  to,  28 
Placenta  prsevia,  transfusion  follow- 
ing, 42 
Pneumonia,  transfusion  in  cases  of, 

61 
Poisoning,  transfusion  treatment  of, 

64,  65 
Post-operative  shock,  31 
Post-partum  haemorrhage,   42 
Pregnancy,    toxaemias,    of    "  foetal 
threat  "  in  relation  to,  85 
transfusion  treatment  of,  62 
"  Professional  "  blood  donor,  69,  98 
Purpxira,   transfusion    in    cases  of, 

49,  50 
Pyaemia,  transfusion  in  cases  of,  59 
transfusion  in,  58 

Radial  artery,  accessible  for  direct 
transfusion,  109 
exposure  of.  111 
objections  to  use  of.   111 
Reactions,  75,  76 

following  transfusions,  57, 122, 123 
see  also  Blood  reactions 
Reinfusion     with     patient's     own 

blood,  42,  43 
Rejuvenation,  136 
Replacement  of  blood,  complete,  136 
Respiratory  system,  effect  of  loss  of 
blood  on,  23 
exhaustion  of,  21 
Robertson,    Bruce,    transfusion    of 
infants  and  children  by,  135, 
136 


INDEX 


165 


Robertson,  Oswald,  transfusion 
with  citrated  blood  by,  121, 
124 

"  Robertson's  bottle,"  124,  125 


Valine  infusion,  treatment  of  shock 

by,  33 
Saphenous  vein,  internal  use  of,  1 30, 

135 
Sauerbruch's     method     of     direct 

transfusion,  108 
Segregation  of  the  gametes,  88 
Septicaemia,  transfusion  for,  59,  136 
Serum,  see  Blood  serum 
Shock,  20 

abdominal  operations  in  relation 

to,  27 
alkaline    administration    during, 

34 
anaphylactic,    see    Anaphylactic 

shock 
avoidance   of,   following  haemor- 
rhage, 29 
blood  count  during,  39 
blood  volimie  changes  in,  24,  25, 

27,  32 
capillary  system  during,  27,  28, 

29 
causal  theories  of,  26,  27 
conditions  of  the  blood  during, 

24,  27,  28,  39 
effects  of,  how  combated,  33 
experimental  production  of,   30 
fluid  administration  during,   34 
gum  treatment  of,  35,  36 
haemorrhage     always     associated 

with,  26 
haemorrhage      and,      differential 

diagnosis,  38,  39 
hydrogen-ion     concentration     in 

relation  to,  28,  32 
low  blood  pressure  the  essential 

feature  of,  27 
mechanism  of  production  of,  30 
post-operative,  31 
primary,  29 

reinfusion  treatment,  42 
saline  treatment  of,  33 
secondary,  29 

conditions  predisposing  to,  29 
signs  and  symptoms  of,  26,  29,  38 
theories  regarding,  26 
toxic  theory  of,  30 
transfusion  treatment  of,  20,  26, 
31 
indications  for,  40 


Skin  eruption,     as     symptoms     of 

blood  reaction,  76,  77 
Sodium  bicarbonate,  in  treatment 

of  shock,  34 
Sodium     citrate,     absorption     and 
elimination  of,  120 
action  of,  122 

as  an  anticoagulant,  16,  121 
coagulation  time  of  the  blood  re- 
duced by,  47 
dosage,  121,  122 
elimination  of,  120 
form  in  which  used,  123 
in  haemophilia,  47 
in  prevention    of    clotting,    119, 

120 
reactions  following  use  of,    122, 

123 
tolerance  to,  122 
toxicity  of,  77 
Sodium  phosphate,  use  of,  16 
Solutions,  for  transfusion,  essential 
constituents  of,  36,  37 
viscosity  and  osmotic  pressure  of, 
36 
Spinal    anaesthesia,    transfusion   in 

conjunction  with,  33 
Splenic  anaemia,  50 
Stansf eld's  apparatus,  134 
Staphylococcal    septicaemia,    blood 

transfusion  in,  59,  60 
Sterility  and  blood  groups,  80 
Streptococcal     septicaemia,      blood 

transfusion  in,  136 
Syphilis,     transmission     by     blood 

transfusion,  68 
Syringe,  cleansing  of,  114 
Higginson's,  13,  14 
whole    blood    transfusion    with, 
technique,  112-114 


Tissue  transplantation,  success  of, 
dependent  upon  compatibi- 
lity of  blood  groups,  80 
Tissues,  damage  to,  producing  toxic 

substances,  30 
Tourniquet,  Canti's,  126,  128 
Toxaemia,  58-66 

acute,  in  bacterial  diseases,  60 
blood  transfusion  in,  31,  58,  60, 

61 
of  pregnancy,  transfusion  treat- 
ment of,  62 
traumatic,  30-32 
production  of,  30 
Toxic  theory  of  shock,  30 


166 


INDEX 


Transfusion,  apparatus  for,  115,126, 
127,  130-133 
in  early  experiments,  10,  13 
recent  improvements  in,  15 
continuous,  60 

direct  method,  technique,  108-1 1 1 
early  objections  to,  9 
history  of,  1 

ideal  method  of,  124,  132 
indirect  method,  technique,  111- 

112 
of  infants,  134 

technique,  134 
recent  advances  in  knowledge  and 

technique  of,  15-17 
repeated,  57 

Robertson's  citrate  method,  121, 
124 
apparatus  for,  124,  134 
whole  blood,  with  syringes,  tech- 
nique, 112 
with    anticoagulants,    technique, 

118-134 
with  Kimpton-Brown  tube,  114 
Traumatic  toxaemia,  30-32 
Tuberciilosis,  transfusion  in,  62 
Twins,  blood  groups  in,  92 
Typhoid,  transfusion  in,  62 

"  Universal  donors,"  72,  73 
"  Universal  recipients,"  72 
Urine,  haemoglobin  in,  39,  70,  76 

suppression  of,  76,  77 
Urticaria,  following  transfusion,  77 
Uterus,  rupture  of,  42 


Vaccine,   injection   of,    into   blood 

donors,  59,  60 
Vaso-motor  failure,  in  shock,  26 
Vein,   for   direct   transfusion,    108, 
109 
injection  of  blood  into,  134,  135 
insertion  of  cannula  in,  131 
occlusion  of,  prevention  of,  109 
puncture  of,  113 

technique,  126-128 
prevention  of  injury  to,  113,  124 
Venesection,  preceding  transfusion, 
60 
in  carbon  monoxide  poisoning, 
65 
Venospasm,  27 

Venous  circulation,  condition  dur- 
ing shock,  39 
Viscosity,  36 

significance  of,  36 
Vital  red,  use  of,  23 

War,  transfusion  in,  17 
Water,  during  severe  shock,  34 
Whole  blood  transfusion,  apparatus 
for,  114 
objections  to,  118 
prevention  of  clotting,  114,  118 
with  Kimpton-Brown  tube,  tech- 
nique, 114-118 
with  syringes,  112-114 
Willis,  Thomas,  3 
"  Woimd  shock,"  29 
Wren,  Sir  Christopher,  vein  injec- 
tions by,  2,  3 


u 


CO 
O 


^ 


■a 


University  of  Toronto 
library 


DO  NOT 

REMOVE 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 

U«der  Pat  "Ref.  Iad«x  File" 

Made  by  LIBRARY  BUREAU 


mmmm 


'Am